Command Reference

Alteon OS 21.0
Alteon Application Switch
Part Number: 315393-E, October 2003

TM

4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 Phone 1-800-4Nortel www.nortelnetworks.com

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Copyright 2003 Nortel Networks, Inc.,4655 Great America Parkway, Santa Clara, California 95054, USA. All rights reserved. Part Number: 315393-E. This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Nortel Networks, Inc. Documentation is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including any kind of implied or express warranty of noninfringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. U.S. Government End Users: This document is provided with a “commercial item” as defined by FAR 2.101 (Oct 1995) and contains “commercial technical data” and “commercial software documentation” as those terms are used in FAR 12.211-12.212 (Oct 1995). Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein, consistent with FAR 12.211- 12.212 (Oct 1995), DFARS 227.7202 (JUN 1995) and DFARS 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995). Nortel Networks, Inc. reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time, and without notice. Nortel Networks, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Nortel Networks, Inc. The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights, trademark rights, or any other intellectual property rights of Nortel Networks, Inc. Alteon OS is the trademarks of Nortel Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Cisco® and EtherChannel® are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. in the United States and certain other countries. Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies.

2
315393-E, October 2003

Contents
Preface 15 Who Should Use This Book 15 How This Book Is Organized 15 Related Documentation 16 Typographic Conventions 17 How to Get Help 18 Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Establishing a Console Connection 20 Requirements 20 Procedure 20 Establishing a Telnet Connection 21 Using a BOOTP Server 21 Running Telnet 21 Establishing an SSH Connection 22 Running SSH 22 Accessing the Switch 23 CLI Versus Setup 25 Command Line History and Editing 25 Idle Timeout 25 Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 27 Using the Setup Utility 27 Information Needed For Setup 27 Starting Setup When You Log In 28 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 29 Stopping Setup 29 Restarting Setup 29 Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration 29
3
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Setup Part 2: Port Configuration 31 Setup Part 3: VLANs 33 Setup Part 4: IP Configuration 35 IP Interfaces 35 Default Gateways 36 IP Routing 37 Setup Part 5: Final Steps 38 Optional Setup for SNMP Support 39 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 39 Setting Passwords 40 Changing the Default Administrator Password 40 Changing the Default User Password 42 Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password 43 Chapter 3: Menu Basics 45 The Main Menu 45 Menu Summary 46 Global Commands 47 Command Line History and Editing 49 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 50 Command Stacking 50 Command Abbreviation 50 Tab Completion 50 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 51 Information Menu 51 System Information Menu 53 General System Information 54 Show Last 30 Syslog Messages 55 Management Port Information 56 SONMP Information 56 System Information Dump 58 Layer 2 Information Menu 59 Layer 2 FDB Information 60 Show All FDB Information 61 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 61 Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information 62 Trunk Group Information 64

4

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

VLAN Information 64 Layer2 Dump Information 65 Layer3 Information Menu 66 IP Routing Information 67 Show All IP Route Information 68 Type Parameters 68 Tag Parameters 69 ARP Information Menu 69 Show All ARP Entry Information 71 ARP Address List Information 72 BGP Information Menu 72 BGP Peer information 73 BGP Summary information 73 Dump BGP Information 74 OSPF Information Menu 74 OSPF General Information 76 OSPF Interface Information 76 OSPF Database Information 77 OSPF Information Route Codes 78 IP Information 79 VRRP Information 79 Layer3 Dump Information 81 Layer 4 Information Menu 82 Session Table Information 84 Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications 86 Session dump information in Alteon OS 87 Show All Layer 4 Information 89 Link Status Information 90 Port Information 91 Bandwidth Management Information 92 Security Information 92 Software Enabled Keys 93 Information Dump 93 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 95 Statistics Menu 95 Port Statistics Menu 97 Bridging Statistics 98

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

„

5

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Ethernet Statistics 99 Interface Statistics 102 Interface Protocol Statistics 104 Link Statistics 105 RMON Statistics 106 Layer 2 Statistics Menu 109 FDB Statistics 109 Layer 3 Statistics Menu 110 OSPF Statistics Menu 111 OSPF Global Statistics 112 IP Statistics 116 Route Statistics 118 ARP statistics 119 VRRP Statistics 120 DNS Statistics 121 ICMP Statistics 121 Interface Statistics 123 TCP Statistics 125 UDP Statistics 126 Load Balancing Statistics Menu 127 Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu 129 SP Real Server Statistics 130 Real Server SLB Statistics 131 Per Service Octet Counters 132 Real Server Group Statistics 133 Virtual Server SLB Statistics 133 Filter SLB Statistics 134 Global SLB Statistics Menu 134 Real Server Global SLB Statistics 135 Real Server Group Global SLB Statistics 135 Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics 135 Global SLB Maintenance Statistics 136 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu 137 Layer7 Redirection Statistics 137 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics 138 Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics 139 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics 141 File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu 142

6

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics 142 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics 143 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics 143 FTP SLB Statistics Dump 144 RTSP SLB Statistics 145 DNS SLB Statistics 145 WAP SLB Statistics 147 SLB Maintenance Statistics 149 Clearing the SLB Statistics 150 BWM Statistics Menu 152 BWM Switch Processor Statistics 153 BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu 153 BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics 154 BWM Contract Statistics 154 BWM Contract Rate Statistics 155 BWM History Statistics 156 BWM Maintenance Statistics 158 Management Processor Statistics 158 MP Packet Statistics 159 TCP Statistics 161 UCB Statistics 161 MP-Specific SFD Statistics 162 CPU Statistics 162 SP Specific Statistics 162 SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics 163 Security Statistics 164 DOS Attack Statistics Menu 165 Types of DOS Attacks 165 IP Access Control List Statistics 166 UDP Blast Statistics 166 UDP Blast Dump Statistics 167 UDP Pattern Match Statistics 167 Rate Limiting Statistics 168 Dump Statistics for Security 169 SNMP Statistics 170 Management Port Statistics 173 Dump Statistics 174

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

„

7

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 175 Configuration Menu 175 Viewing, Applying, and Saving Changes 176 Viewing Pending Changes 177 Applying Pending Changes 177 Saving the Configuration 177 System Configuration 179 System Host Log Configuration 181 Seven Levels of Severity 182 Management Port Configuration Menu 182 Management Port Link Menu 185 SSH Server Configuration Menu 185 RADIUS Server Configuration 187 NTP Server Configuration 188 SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration 189 System SNMP Configuration 190 System Health Check Configuration Menu 192 System Access Control Configuration 193 Management Networks Menu 194 User Access Control Menu 195 Port Configuration 197 Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series 197 Fast Ethernet Ports 197 SFP GBIC Ports 197 Port Link Configuration 199 Alteon Application Switch 3000 Series 201 Port Configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 201 Single-Mode ports 202 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu 203 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu 206 Dual-Mode Ports 207 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration 208 Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu 210 Temporarily Disabling a Port 210 Port Mirroring Menu 211 Port-Mirroring Menu 211 Bandwidth Management Configuration 212

8

„

Contents
315393-E, October 2003

0 Command Reference Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration 214 Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration 215 Bandwidth Management Current Configuration 216 Layer 2 Configuration Menu 217 Spanning Tree Group Configuration 218 Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration 220 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 221 Trunk Configuration 222 VLAN Configuration 224 Layer 3 Configuration Menu 226 IP Interface Configuration 228 Default IP Gateway Configuration 229 Default Gateway Metrics 230 IP Static Route Configuration 230 ARP Configuration Menu 231 ARP Static Configuration Menu 231 IP Forwarding Configuration 233 Local Network Route Caching Definition 233 Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache 234 Network Filter Configuration 235 Routing Map Configuration Menu 236 IP Access List Configuration Menu 238 Autonomous System Filter Path 239 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 240 Open Shortest Path First Configuration 241 Area Index Configuration Menu 243 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu 245 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu 246 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu 247 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu 249 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 9 . 250 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu 250 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 251 BGP Peer Configuration Menu 253 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu 255 BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu 256 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu 257 Domain Name System Configuration Menu 258 Contents 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu 259 VRRP Configuration Menu 260 Virtual Router Configuration Menu 262 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 264 Virtual Router Group Menu 265 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu 267 Virtual Router Group Configuration 269 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 271 VRRP Interface Configuration 273 VRRP Tracking Configuration 274 Default Gateway Metrics 275 Security Configuration Menu 276 IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu 277 Pattern Matching Menu 278 Port Security Configuration Menu 279 UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu 280 Setup 281 Dump 281 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 282 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 282 Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 283 SLB Configuration 284 Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) 285 Real Server SLB Configuration 286 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration 290 Real server IDS Configuration Menu 290 Real Server Group SLB Configuration 292 SLB Health Check Types 294 Server Load Balancing Metrics 297 Virtual Server SLB Configuration 299 Virtual Server Service Configuration 301 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration 305 Cookie-Based Persistence 305 SLB Filter Configuration 307 Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters 311 Advanced Filter Configuration 312 Advanced Filter TCP Configuration 314 10 „ Contents 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 11 . 351 Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options 352 Operations-Level IP Options 352 Operations-Level BGP Options 353 Activating Optional Software 353 Removing Optional Software 354 Contents 315393-E.0 Command Reference IP Advanced Menu 315 ICMP Message Types 316 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu 317 SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu 319 Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu 320 Port SLB Configuration 321 Global SLB Configuration 323 GSLB Remote Site Configuration 326 GSLB Lookup Configuration 327 GSLB Internet Network Preference Lookup Configuration 328 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu 329 Web Cache Redirection Configuration 330 Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu 331 WAP Configuration 332 Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration 333 Peer Switch Configuration 334 Advanced Layer 4 Configuration 335 SYN Attack Detection Configuration 337 Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu 338 Scriptable Health Checks Configuration 339 SNMP Health Check Configuration 340 WAP Health Check Configuration 341 WSP Content Health Check 342 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu 343 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2224 344 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2424 345 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 3408 346 Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 347 Operations Menu 347 Operations-Level Port Options 349 Operations-Level SLB Options 350 Operations-Level VRRP Options.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 355 Boot Menu 355 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 356 Scheduled Reboot Menu 356 Updating the Switch Software Image 356 Downloading New Software to Your Switch 356 Selecting a Software Image to Run 358 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 358 Selecting a Configuration Block 359 Resetting the Switch 360 Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 361 Maintenance Menu 361 System Maintenance Options 363 Forwarding Database Options 363 Debugging Options 365 ARP Cache Options 366 ARP Entries on a Single Port 366 IP Route Manipulation 367 Uuencode Flash Dump 368 TFTP System Dump Put 368 Clearing Dump Information 369 Panic Command 369 Unscheduled System Dumps 370 Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 371 LOG_WARNING 371 LOG_ALERT 372 LOG_CRIT 373 LOG_ERR 373 LOG_NOTICE 379 LOG_INFO 381 Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 383 Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 387 Glossary 389 12 „ Contents 315393-E.

0 Command Reference Index 393 Contents 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 13 .

October 2003 .0 Command Reference 14 „ Contents 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

How This Book Is Organized Chapter 1 “The Command Line Interface.” shows how to view switch performance statistics. Port Trunking. The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts. including a menu map.” describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus. and SNMP configuration parameters. Chapter 5 “The Statistics Menu.” shows how to configure switch system parameters. Port Mirroring. 15 315393-E. Chapter 3 “Menu Basics. the IEEE 802. Spanning Tree Protocol. ports. Chapter 4 “The Information Menu. SNMP. Chapter 2 “First-Time Configuration. and menu shortcuts. IP Routing.” shows how to view switch configuration parameters.0 Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS software with your Alteon Application Switch. Chapter 6 “The Configuration Menu. October 2003 . and more.1d Spanning Tree Protocol.” describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords. see the Hardware Installation Guide for your particular switch model. global commands. IP addressing. VLANs.” provides an overview of the menu system. For documentation on installing the switches physically. Who Should Use This Book This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network.Preface The Alteon OS 21.

“Alteon OS SNMP Agent. „ Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide (315396-E) Provides a description of the Alteon Application Switch hardware—the physical features.0 Release Notes (315397-E) This document provides a detailed description of any caveats and limitations. “Performing a Serial Download.” shows how to use commands which affect switch performance immediately.” lists the Management Interface Bases (MIBs) supported in the switch software.” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images. Chapter 10 “The Maintenance Menu. “Glossary” defines the terminology used throughout the book.” shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information. The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features.0 Application Guide (Part No. 16 „ Preface 315393-E. „ Alteon OS 21. how to install it. “Alteon OS Syslog Messages. and more.” shows how to directly load a binary software image into the switch for upgrade or maintenance. October 2003 . Appendix C. Related Documentation „ „ Alteon OS 21. Chapter 9 “The Boot Options Menu. Appendix B. Filtering. but do not alter permanent switch configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports).” shows how to configure Server Load Balancing. how to load a new software image. “Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book. and how to reset the software to factory defaults. how to clear it. Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) Quick Guide (315395-B) Provides a description of the Switch BBI and how to configure and access it on the Switch. and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database.” shows a listing of syslog messages.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 8 “The Operations Menu.0 Command Reference Chapter 7 “The SLB Configuration Menu. 315394-E) Provides application explanations and configuration examples for the Switch. Appendix A. and how to troubleshoot it. Global Server Load Balancing.

AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command examples. and directories used within the text. Read your User’s Guide thoroughly.Alteon OS 21. files. host# ls [-a] Preface 315393-E. Main# sys <AaBbCc123> This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session.txt file. Example View the readme. enter: examples as a parameter placeholder. special terms.0 Command Reference Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book. Do not type the brackets. It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown. [ ] Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands. Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Symbol AaBbCc123 Meaning This type is used for names of commands. It also depicts on-screen computer output and Main# prompts. This also shows book titles. Replace host# telnet <IP address> the indicated text with the appropriate real name or value when using the command. Do not type the brackets. October 2003 „ 17 . or words to be emphasized.

When you use an ERC.0 Command Reference How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . and Africa Telephone 00800 8008 9009 or +44 (0) 870 907 9009 (800) 4NORTEL or (800) 466-7835 (61) (2) 8870-8800 (800) 810-5000 North America Asia Pacific China Additional information about the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers is available at the following URL: http://www. If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program. your call is routed to a technical support person who specializes in supporting that product or service.nortelnetworks. To locate an ERC for your product or service.com/help/contact/erc/index. contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers: Technical Solutions Center Europe. contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance.html 18 „ Preface 315393-E.nortelnetworks.com/help/contact/global An Express Routing Code (ERC) is available for many Nortel Networks products and services. refer to the following URL: http://www. Middle East.

19 315393-E. Some of the more advanced features. This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) to the switch. October 2003 .CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your Alteon Application Switch is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box. text-based command line interface and menu system for access via local terminal or remote Telnet session A GUI-based Element Management System (EMS) for interactive network access SNMP support for access through network management software such as HP OpenView Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) The command line interface is the most direct method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration. and to perform any necessary configuration. Using a basic terminal. however. The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch: „ „ „ „ A built-in. require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively. you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch.

0 Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways: „ „ „ Using a console connection via the console port Using a Telnet connection over the network Using an SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network Establishing a Console Connection Requirements To establish a console connection with the switch. (For more information. 20 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. You will next be required to enter a password for access to the switch. To establish the connection. Procedure 1. October 2003 . press <Enter> a few times on your terminal. 3. Connect the terminal to the Console port using the serial cable. 2. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40). Power on the terminal. you will need the following: „ An ASCII terminal or a computer running terminal emulation software set to the parameters shown in the table below: Table 1-1 Console Configuration Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None „ A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics).Alteon OS 21.

followed by the switch IP address: telnet <IP address> You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 22. If you have a BOOTP server on your network. Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the Alteon Application Switch are configured. Telnet access provides the same options for user access and administrator access as those available through the console port. To establish a Telnet connection with the switch. To configure the switch for Telnet access. the Alteon OS software is set up to request its IP address from a BOOTP server. from a BOOTP server on your network Manually. The switch must have an IP address. October 2003 „ 21 . Using a BOOTP Server By default. The MAC address can also be found in the System Information menu (see “System Information” on page 53). The switch can get its IP address in one of two ways: „ „ Dynamically. The MAC address can be found on a small white label on the back panel of the switch. add the MAC address of the switch to the BOOTP configuration file located on the BOOTP server. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. when you configure the switch IP address (see “Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration” on page 29). The port must be manually configured with the proper IP address.Alteon OS 21. NOTE – If connecting to the management port. run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command.0 Command Reference Establishing a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection offers the convenience of accessing the switch from any workstation connected to the network. BOOTP is not supported. you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection. you need to have a device with Telnet software located on the same network as the switch.

5 and supports SSH-1. Similarly. „ „ „ „ Server Host Authentication: Client RSA-authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection.0 Command Reference Establishing an SSH Connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of an Alteon Application Switch via Telnet. a SSH/SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client. The switch can do only one session of key/cipher generation at a time. SSH clients of other versions (especially Version 2) will not be supported. Inc.Alteon OS 21. As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration. the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH/SCP client is logging in at that time. Radius The following SSH clients have been tested: „ „ „ SSH 1.XX. Key Exchange: RSA Encryption: 3DES-CBC.X.0. The SSH (Secure Shell) protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely.) F-Secure SSH 1. Running SSH Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the Alteon Application Switch. this method does not provide a secure connection. The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below. followed by the switch IP address: >> # ssh <switch IP address> 22 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E.27 for Linux (freeware) SecureCRT 3. To establish an SSH connection with the switch.2 and SecureCRT 3.1 for Windows (Data Fellows) NOTE – The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1. you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection.5-1.2.2. DES User Authentication: Local password authentication. SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure. October 2003 .3 (Van Dyke Technologies. Thus. run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command.0.23 and SSH 1.

Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the Alteon Application Switch.0 Command Reference or. or SSH. Telnet. Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot/reset of the switch.Alteon OS 21. These changes will be lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Levels of access to CLI. The default user names/password for each access level are listed in the following table. access classes are defined as follows: „ User interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on the Alteon Application Switch. seven levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the Alteon Application Switch. Operators can only effect temporary changes on the Alteon Application Switch. October 2003 „ 23 . Once you are connected to the switch via local console. For more information. Accessing the Switch To enable better switch management and user accountability. Web management functions. Because administrators can also make temporary (operator-level) changes as well. see “Setting Passwords” on page 40. use the following command: >> # ssh -1 ace <switch IP address> You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password. Because any changes an operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch. „ „ Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords. and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks. you are prompted to enter a password. Operators have access to the switch management features used for daily switch operations. they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes. if SecurID authentication is required. such as switch statistics and current operational state information. Conceptually. Users may display information that has no security or privacy implications. operators cannot severely impact switch operation. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. NOTE – It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.

In addition to oper SLB Operator functions. access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value. slbadmin Layer 4 Operator Operator SLB Administrator Layer 4 Administrator l4admin Administrator admin NOTE – With the exception of the “admin” user. All user levels below “admin” will by default be initially disabled (empty password) until they are enabled by the “admin” user. but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch. The SLB Administrator configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. The Layer 4 Administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus. including filters and bandwidth management. and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch. with the exception of not being able to configure filters or bandwidth management. He or she can view all switch status information and statistics. In addition to being able to view all switch information and statistics.0 Command Reference Table 1-2 User Access Levels User Account User Description and Tasks Performed The User has no direct responsibility for switch management. the Layer 4 Administrator can configure all parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. and the access level is reserved for future use. This user currently has the same access level as the SLB operator. In addition to SLB Operator functions. to provide access to operational commands for operators managing traffic on the line leading to the shared Internet services.slboper vices and their loads. The Layer 4 Operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the l4oper shared Internet services. The Operator manages all functions of the switch. 24 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. Password user SLB Operator The SLB Operator manages Web servers and other Internet ser. In addition to SLB Administrator functions. the SLB Administrator can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus. the Operator can reset ports or the entire switch. This prevents inadvertently leaving the switch open to unauthorized users. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. information. the SLB Operator can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing operation menu.

Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands. Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E. shortcuts. see “Menu Basics” on page 45. which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes. you are given complete access to the switch. If the switch has already been configured. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command. For information on changing this parameter. a utility designed to help you through the first-time configuration process. the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup (see Chapter 2. the switch will disconnect your console or Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity. This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter. see “System Configuration” on page 179. The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges. the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead.Alteon OS 21. If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration.0 Command Reference CLI Versus Setup Once the administrator password is verified. some menu options will not be available. “First-Time Configuration”). always available] NOTE – If you are accessing a user account or Layer 4 administrator account. and command line editing functions.” Idle Timeout By default. October 2003 „ 25 .

0 Command Reference 26 „ Chapter 1: The Command Line Interface 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .

you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility. and negotiation mode (as appropriate) † Whether to use VLAN tagging or not (as appropriate) 27 315393-E. The Setup utility prompts you step-by-step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch. you can use the Switch Setup Utility in the Alteon Application Switch 2000-SSL Series Quick Setup Guide (part number 215102-A) instead for setting up the Switch and the SSL Processor. NOTE – If you are configuring a 2000-SSL Series Switch.CHAPTER 2 First-Time Configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch. duplex. flow control. Information Needed For Setup Setup requests the following information: „ Basic system information † Date & time † Whether to use BOOTP or not † Whether to use Spanning Tree Protocol or not † Management port configuration „ Optional configuration for each port † Speed. the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility. This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords. Then return to this guide for configuration and management information on your Switch. Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login. October 2003 . Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the system administrator under the factory default configuration.

1. or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead.0 Command Reference „ Optional configuration for each VLAN † Name of VLAN † Which ports are included in the VLAN „ Optional configuration of IP parameters † IP address. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 359. 28 Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch. Connect to the switch console. subnet mask. a "Set Up" facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided. the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings. and broadcast address. the system prompts: Connected to Alteon Application Switch 2424 18:44:05 Wed Jan 1. or n to bypass the Setup facility. After connecting. Enter admin as the default administrator password. the login prompt will appear as shown below. October 2003 . „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. and gateway IP address for each IP static route † Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not † Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings. 3. and VLAN for each IP interface † IP addresses for up to four default gateways † Destination. If the factory default configuration is detected. 2003 The switch is booted with factory default configuration. Would you like to run "Set Up" to configure the switch? [y/n]: NOTE – If the default admin login is unsuccessful. subnet mask.Alteon OS 21. To ease the configuration of the switch. If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings. Enter Password: 2.

and IP interfaces. or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning. Spanning Tree. Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt: # /cfg/setup Setup Part 1: Basic System Configuration When Setup is started. “00” is considered 2000. Management port. press <Ctrl-C> during any Setup question. you can configure them later using the configuration menus. the system will prompt: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter n to abort Setup. October 2003 „ 29 . press <Enter>. 2. the system prompts: "Set Up" will walk you through the configuration of System Date and Time. the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information. or by restarting the Setup facility. VLANs. For more information on configuring VLANs.0 Application Guide. When you abort Setup. Next.0 Command Reference Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility. BOOTP. Port Speed/Mode. If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session. see the 21. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Otherwise enter n. To keep the current year. Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs. Enter the year of the current date at the prompt: System Date: Enter year [2003]: Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99. [type Ctrl-C to abort "Set Up"] -----------------------------------------------------------Will you be configuring VLANs? [y/n] 1.Alteon OS 21.

To keep the current minute. To keep the current hour. 5. October 2003 . Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt: Enter minutes [55]: Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59. press <Enter>. To keep the current month. Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt: System Time: Enter hour in 24-hour format [18]: Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23. The system displays the date and time settings: System clock set to 18:55:36 Wed Jan 1.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 3. To keep the current second. Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt: Enter seconds [37]: Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59. To keep the current day. Enter the day of the current date at the prompt: Enter day [3]: Enter the date as a number from 1 to 31. press <Enter>. press <Enter>. 7. press <Enter>. 6. 2003. 4. Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt: System Date: Enter month [1]: Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12. press <Enter>. 30 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E.

2. Select the port to configure. a BOOTP server can supply the switch with IP parameters so that you do not have to enter them manually.0 Command Reference 8. press <Enter> without specifying any port and go to “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 33. If desired. or skip port configuration at the prompt: Port Config: Enter port number: (1-28) If you wish to change settings for individual ports. 1. Setup Part 2: Port Configuration NOTE – The port configuration options shown in these steps are for the Alteon OS 2424. Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt: Spanning Tree: Current Spanning Tree setting: ON Turn Spanning Tree OFF? [y/n] Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree. When configuring port options for other switches. default gateway. October 2003 „ 31 . you will be prompted for IP address. Enter d to disable the use of BOOTP. Enable or disable the use of BOOTP at the prompt: BootP Option: Current BOOTP usage: Enter new BOOTP usage [d/e]: disabled If available on your network. enter the number of the port you wish to configure. some of the prompts and options may be different. before the system will prompt for IP parameters. set up the management port: Management Port Config: Configure management port? [y/n] y If you answer y to configure the management port. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. broadcast address. BOOTP must be disabled however. 9. subnet mask. or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on. To skip port configuration. or enter e to enable the use of BOOTP. and other management port options. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

32 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. half for half-duplex. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port speed. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port flow control. tx for transmit flow control. If appropriate. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port Mode: Current port 1 mode setting: any Enter new speed ["full"/"half"/"any"] Enter full for full-duplex. If appropriate. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. To keep the current setting. press <Enter>. 4. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. the system prompts: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector. October 2003 . press <Enter>. the system prompts: Fast Link Configuration: Port Speed: Current Port 1 speed setting: 10/100 Enter new speed ["10"/"100"/"any"]: Enter the port speed from the options available. If you selected a port that has an Ethernet/Fast Ethernet connector.0 Command Reference 3. configure Ethernet/Fast Ethernet port duplex mode. 5. 6.Alteon OS 21. off to disable it. or enter any to have the switch auto-sense the port speed. To keep the current setting. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable autonegotiation. both to enable both. or any to have the switch auto-negotiate. press <Enter>. To keep the current setting. or none to turn flow control off for the port. If appropriate. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting.

8. or press <Enter> to keep the current setting. To keep the current setting. enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port. press <Enter> without specifying any port. configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode. Otherwise. press <Enter>. the system prompts: Gig Link Configuration: Port Flow Control: Current Port 1 flow control setting: both Enter new value ["rx"/"tx"/"both"/"none"]: Enter rx to enable receive flow control. both to enable both. If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. To keep the current setting. October 2003 „ 33 . If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector. If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1. the system prompts: Port Auto Negotiation: Current Port 1 autonegotiation: Enter new value ["on"/"off"]: on Enter on to enable port autonegotiation. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. If appropriate. tx for transmit flow control. repeat the steps in this section. Setup Part 3: VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1. The system prompts you to configure the next port: Enter port number: (1 to 28) When you are through configuring ports. press <Enter>. If configuring VLANs. 10. configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters. If appropriate. the system prompts: Port VLAN tagging config (tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs) Current TAG flag: disabled Enter new TAG status [d/e]: Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port. or none to turn flow control off for the port. 9.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 7. skip to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. off to disable it.

enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure. NULL at end: Type the first port number to add to the current VLAN and press <Enter>. 2. press <Enter> without typing a VLAN number and go to “Setup Part 4: IP Configuration” on page 35. without quotes: Entering a new VLAN name is optional. press <Enter>. 3. To use the pending new VLAN name. NULL at end: If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs. When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN. Repeat this until all ports for the VLAN being configured are entered. The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. Enter the VLAN port numbers. The system prompts you to define the first port in the VLAN: Define ports in VLAN: Current VLAN 2: empty Enter port numbers one per line. Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt: VLAN is newly created. Select the VLAN to configure. To skip VLAN configuration. 34 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. October 2003 .0 Command Reference 1. NULL at end: Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured. type the port number and press <Enter> to move to the next line.Alteon OS 21. press <Enter> without specifying any VLAN. press <Enter> without specifying any port. 4. Pending new VLAN name: "VLAN 2" Enter new VLAN name. or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt: VLAN Config: Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4090. The right angle prompt appears: > For each additional port in the VLAN. When all VLANs have been configured.

0.0. To skip IP interface configuration.0. 1.0 Command Reference Setup Part 4: IP Configuration If BOOTP was enabled back in Part 1. IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs. skip to Setup Part 5: Final Steps. No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet. press <Enter> without typing an interface number and go to “Default Gateways” on page 36. press <Enter>. enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. or skip interface configuration at the prompt: IP Config: IP interfaces: Enter interface number: (1-256) If you wish to configure individual IP interfaces. The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration.0. enter the number of the IP interface you wish to configure. 3. 2. Select the IP interface to configure. The IP address assigned to each IP interface provides the switch with an IP presence on your network. if you disabled BOOTP.0 To keep the current setting. the system prompts for IP parameters. enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation: Current subnet mask: Enter new subnet mask: 0.Alteon OS 21. For the specified IP interface. and for routing between subnets and VLANs (if used). At the prompt. Up to 256 IP interfaces can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. October 2003 „ 35 . Otherwise. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. press <Enter>.0 To keep the current setting.

At the prompt.0. This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1: Current VLAN: Enter new VLAN: 1 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. specify a VLAN for the interface. or press <Enter> without specifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting. enter the broadcast IP address in dotted decimal notation: Current broadcast address: Enter new broadcast address: 0.0 To keep the current setting. At the prompt.0. When all interfaces have been configured. select a default gateway for configuration.0 Command Reference 4. or n to leave it disabled: Enable IP interface? [y/n] 7. enter y to enable the IP interface. Default Gateways 1. press <Enter> without specifying any interface number. 5. If configuring VLANs. To skip default gateway configuration. press <Enter> without typing a gateway number and go to “IP Routing” on page 37. The system prompts you to configure another interface: Enter interface number: (1-256) Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured. 6. press <Enter>. or skip default gateway configuration: IP default gateways: Enter default gateway number: (1-259) Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured. At the prompt. 36 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E.

This eliminates the need to bounce inter-subnet communication off an external router device. enable or disable the RIP supply: Enable RIP supply? [y/n] Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. At the prompt.Alteon OS 21. press <Enter>. or press <Enter> without specifying an address to accept the current setting. or n to leave it disabled: Enable default gateway? [y/n] 4. IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for the various subnets attached to your switch. At the prompt. To disable IP forwarding.0 Command Reference 2. Routing on more complex networks. enter the IP address for the selected default gateway: Current IP address: Enter new IP address: 0. 1. When all default gateways have been configured.0. enter y to enable the default gateway. October 2003 „ 37 . At the prompt. where subnets may not have a direct presence on the Alteon Application Switch. press <Enter> without specifying any number.0 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The system prompts you to configure another default gateway: Enter default gateway number: (1-4) Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured.0.To keep the current setting. enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing: Enable IP forwarding? [y/n] Enter y to enable IP forwarding. 3. At the prompt. 2. can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically. enter n and proceed to Step 2. IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch. This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters.

At the prompt. 38 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. the system prompts whether to abort them: Abort all changes? [y/n] Enter y to discard the changes. Enter n to return to the Apply the changes? prompt. Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes.0 Command Reference Setup Part 5: Final Steps 1. decide whether to restart Setup or continue: Would you like to run from top again? [y/n] Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning. Enter n to continue without saving the changes. Changes are normally saved at this point. When prompted. or n to continue. it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in “Setting Passwords” on page 40. 3. decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt: Apply the changes? [y/n] Enter y to apply the changes.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . 5. or n to continue without applying. Next. 4. We recommend that you review the changes. decide whether to make the changes permanent: Save changes to flash? [y/n] Enter y to save the changes to flash. decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes: Review the changes made? [y/n] Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility. NOTE – After initial configuration is complete. Changes are normally applied. If you do not apply or save the changes. When prompted. 2.

such as Alteon EMS.Alteon OS 21. Set SNMP read or write community string. Apply and save configuration if you are not configuring the switch with Telnet support. enter y to enable the RIP supply. Perform this procedure only if you are planning on using SNMPbased tools. Otherwise. October 2003 „ 39 . Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Apply and save SNMP and /or telnet configuration(s). Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the switch through any telnet application. >> # /cfg/sys/ssnmp/rcomm|wcomm 3. Enable SNMP and select one of the options. they are public and private respectively. RIP listen is set by default. >> System# apply >> System# save Optional Setup for Telnet Support NOTE – This step is optional.0 Command Reference Optional Setup for SNMP Support NOTE – This step is optional. Enable telnet. 1. >> # /cfg/sys/access/snmp dis|read|write 2. 1. When RIP is enabled. >> # /cfg/sys/access/tnet ena 2. >> System# apply >> System# save If your network uses Routing Interface Protocol (RIP). Otherwise apply and save after “Optional Setup for Telnet Support” on page 39. enter n to disable it. By default.

use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# /cfg The Configuration Menu is displayed. The default password for the administrator account is admin.Alteon OS 21. including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.Port Menu pmirr .0 Command Reference Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.Restore current configuration from tftp server 40 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. To change the default password. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. and configuration commands. 2.Step by step configuration set up dump .Security Menu setup .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . To change both the user password and the administrator password. follow this procedure: 1. information. From the Main Menu. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.Port Mirroring Menu bwm . [Configuration Menu] sys .Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg .System-wide Parameter Menu port . Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus.Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . October 2003 . Passwords cannot be modified from the user command mode.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. you must login using the administrator password.Layer 3 Menu slb .Layer 2 Menu l3 .

use the following path to select the User menu: System# access/user 5. October 2003 „ 41 . Enter the current administrator password at the prompt: Changing ADMINISTRATOR password. validation required. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. From the System menu..0 Command Reference 3. From the Configuration Menu. [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur - Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters 4.Alteon OS 21.. System# user/admpw 6. Select the administrator password. Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys The System Menu is displayed.

Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch. Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password.Alteon OS 21. use the following command to select the System Menu: >> Configuration# sys 4. This password cannot be changed from the user account. use the following command to access the Configuration Menu: Main# cfg 3. 2. Enter the new administrator password. The default password for the user account is user.0 Command Reference 7. System# access/user/usrpw 42 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. Select the user password. at the prompt: Re-enter new administrator password: 9. as shown in the following procedure. again. but you can’t make configuration changes. 1. Only the administrator has the ability to change passwords. you can view switch information and statistics. Through a user account. Enter the new administrator password at the prompt: Enter new administrator password: 8. From the Main Menu. October 2003 . From the Configuration Menu.

Enter the new user password. Changing USER password. Enter current administrator password: 6.Alteon OS 21.. Select the Layer 4 administrator password: System# l4apw Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E. use the following path to access the user command: Main# /cfg/sys/access/user 3. validation required. Through a Layer 4 administrator account. you must login using the administrator password. 2. Apply and save your changes: System# apply System# save Changing the Default Layer 4 Administrator Password The Layer 4 administrator has limited control of the switch.. Passwords cannot be modified from the Layer 4 administrator account or the user account. Enter the current administrator password at the prompt. again. Connect to the switch and log in using the administrator account. To change the default password. at the prompt: Re-enter new user password: 8. you can view all switch information and statistics.0 Command Reference 5. Only the administrator can change the user password. To change any switch password. Entering the administrator password confirms your authority. October 2003 „ 43 . Enter the new user password at the prompt: Enter new user password: 7. From the Main Menu. but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. follow this procedure: 1. The default password for the Layer 4 administrator account is l4admin.

validation required. October 2003 . call your technical support representative for help using the password fix-up mode. Enter the current administrator password (not the Layer 4 administrator password) at the prompt: Changing L4 ADMINISTRATOR password. Enter the new Layer 4 administrator password at the prompt: Enter new L4 administrator password: 6. 5.Alteon OS 21.. again..0 Command Reference 4. Enter the new administrator password. Enter current administrator password: NOTE – If you forget your administrator password. at the prompt: Re-enter new L4 administrator password: 7. Apply and save your change by entering the following commands: System# apply System# save 44 „ Chapter 2: First-Time Configuration 315393-E.

The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login. and provides a list of commands and shortcuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI. Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu. To make the CLI easy to use. [Main Menu] info stats cfg oper boot maint diff apply save revert exit - Information Menu Statistics Menu Configuration Menu Operations Command Menu Boot Options Menu Maintenance Menu Show pending config changes [global command] Apply pending config changes [global command] Save updated config to FLASH [global command] Revert pending or applied changes [global command] Exit [global command.CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The Alteon Application Switch’s Command Line Interface (CLI) is used for viewing switch information and statistics. the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub-menus. along with a summary of what each command will do. always available] 45 315393-E. NOTE – The ssl option is only visible on the Alteon Application Switch 2000-SSL Series. October 2003 . Each menu displays a list of commands and/or sub-menus that are available. This chapter describes the Main Menu commands. the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration. The following table shows the Main Menu for the administrator login. In addition. Some features are not available under the user login.

It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages. „ Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes. „ Statistics Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying switch performance statistics. and more. Layer 4 settings. „ Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login. and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing functions. SNMP. selecting configuration blocks. routing. It includes sub-menus for configuring every aspect of the switch. IF. DNS.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Menu Summary „ Information Menu Provides sub-menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch: from basic system settings to VLANs. UDP. and for resetting the switch when necessary. Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied. TCP. October 2003 . „ Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software. Changes can be saved to non-volatile memory. IP. 46 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch. VRRP. and Layer 4 statistics. Included are port. „ Operations Command Menu Operations-level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration. This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of service. and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables. performing port mirroring. ARP. ICMP.

Move up one menu level / Top menu if first. Print current menu .0 Command Reference Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy. type help. October 2003 „ 47 .. Set the number of lines (n) that display on the screen at one time. lines diff apply save revert exit or quit Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. or up / Action Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu. You will see the following screen: Global Commands: [can be issued from any menu] help up print lines verbose exit diff apply save ping traceroute telnet pushd popd pwd quit revert history The following are used to navigate the menu structure: . this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line. Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last “apply” command. a summary of the global commands is displayed. Write configuration changes to non-volatile flash memory. and for applying and saving configuration changes. Exit from the command line interface and log out. or print . Show any pending configuration changes. If placed at the beginning of a command. When used without the command parameter. These commands are useful for obtaining online help. For help on a specific command. navigating through menus.Alteon OS 21. or command separator ! Execute command from history Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ? command or help . When used without a value. Apply pending configuration changes. Otherwise.. go to the Main Menu. The default is 24 lines. Go up one level in the menu structure. the current setting is displayed. Display the current menu. Remove pending configuration changes between “apply” commands.

Use this command to identify the route used for station-to-station connectivity across the network. This command is used to telnet out of the switch. the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames. The format is as follows: ping <host name>|<IP address> [tries (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m| -mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. Display the command path used to reach the current menu. 1 =Normal: Prompts and requested output are shown. Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device. traceroute pwd verbose n telnet history 48 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. the current setting is displayed. Sets the level of information displayed on the screen: 0 =Quiet: Nothing appears except errors—not even prompts. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. This command brings up the history of the last 10 commands. msec delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between attempts.Alteon OS 21. The format is as follows: traceroute <host name>| <IP address> [<max-hops (1-32)> [msec delay]] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data] Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station. If the management port is used. but no menus. If the management port is used. The format is as follows: <hostname>|<IP address> [port] [-m|-mgmt|-d|-data]. specify the -m or -mgmt option. maxhops (optional) is the maximum distance to trace (1-16 devices). When used without a value.0 Command Reference Table 3-1 Description of Global Commands Command ping Action Use this command to verify station-to-station connectivity across the network. and delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response. By default. As with ping. specify the -m or -mgmt option. specify the -m or -mgmt option. the -d or -data option for network ports is in effect. By default. October 2003 . tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1-32). 2 =Verbose: Everything is shown. If the management port is used. The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames (see “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 258). By default.

or edited using the options below. Clear the entire line. This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 10 commands. (Also the Delete key. Repeat the last entered command.) Move the cursor back one position to the left. <Ctrl-n> <Ctrl-a> <Ctrl-e> <Ctrl-b> <Ctrl-f> <Backspace> <Ctrl-d> <Ctrl-k> <Ctrl-l> <Ctrl-u> Other keys Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 10 commands. (Also the down arrow key. (Also the up arrow key. or edited using the options below. October 2003 „ 49 .) Move the cursor forward one position to the right. The recalled command can be entered as is. Move cursor to the end of the command line. Kill (erase) all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line.) Erase one character to the left of the cursor position. (Also the right arrow key. Delete one character at the cursor position. The recalled command can be entered as is. (Also the left arrow key. Move the cursor to the beginning of command line. Insert new characters at the cursor position.) Recall the next command from the history list.0 Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface. you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes. The following options are available globally at the command line: Table 3-2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option history !! !n <Ctrl-p> Description Display a numbered list of the last 10 previously entered commands.) Recall the previous command from the history list. Redraw the screen.Alteon OS 21. Repeat the nth command shown on the history list.

the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut. For example. If only one command fits the input text when <Tab> is pressed. October 2003 . For example. the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main# prompt is as follows: Main# cfg/l2/stp/port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the command from the others in the same menu or sub-menu. waiting to be entered. 50 „ Chapter 3: Menu Basics 315393-E. the command shown above could also be entered as follows: Main# c/l2/st/p Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting <Tab>. the currently active menu will be displayed. If the <Tab> key is pressed without any input on the command line. that command will be supplied on the command line. you can type multiple commands on a single line. You can connect as many commands as required to access the menu option that you want. Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed. separated by forward slashes (/).

see page 66. l3 Displays the Layer 3 information menu. 51 315393-E. To view menu options. l2 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu.Show Bandwidth Management information security .Show link status port . /info Information Menu [Information Menu] sys .Show enabled software features dump .System Information Menu l2 . Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays system menu information. see page 53. For details.Show port information bwm .Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4-1 on page 51. with pointers to where detailed information can be found.Layer 4-7 Information Menu link .Layer 3 Information Menu slb . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor- mation. October 2003 .CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes. see page 59. For details.Show Security status swkey .Layer 2 Information Menu l3 .

see page 92. For details. port Displays port status information. or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. October 2003 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. including: „ „ „ „ „ bwm Port number Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership For details. 52 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Displays bandwidth management information. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.Alteon OS 21. including: „ „ „ „ „ Port number Port speed (10. For details see page 93.0 Command Reference Table 4-1 Information Menu Options (/info) Command Syntax and Usage slb Displays the Layer 4 Information Menu. see page 92. or 1000) Duplex mode (half. 100. 10/100. security Displays current UDP blast settings and the security status of the port. full. depending on your configuration). see page 93. dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more. see page 91. or auto) Link status (up or down) For details. To view a sample. swkey Displays a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch. For details. see page 90. yes. see page 82. link Displays configuration information about each port. To view menu options.

See page 58 for a sample output. See page 55 for a sample output and detailed information. Management Processor Board Hardware. See page 56 for detailed information. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. and Fast Ethernet Board Hardware „ Software image file and version number „ Configuration name „ Log-in banner. day. if one is configured See page 54 for a sample output. Switch model name and number How long the switch has been up Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of IP interface #1 Hardware order number and part numbers of the Mainboard Hardware. and date. mgmt Displays Management port information. log Displays last 30 syslog messages. sonmp Displays SONMP topology table information. October 2003 „ 53 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /info/sys System Information Menu [System Menu] general log mgmt sonmp dump Show Show Show Show Dump general system information last 30 syslog messages Management Port information SONMP topology table information all system information Table 4-2 Information System Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general system information including: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ System information like time. dump Displays all system information. See page 56 for detailed information.

1 Hardware Order No: EB1412011 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P316017-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Software Version 21.0. Information about fan failures will also be displayed if one or more fans are not functioning. 2003 Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 0 days. There will be a warning from the software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold.1.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /info/sys/general General System Information System Information at 17:29:51 Mon Aug 25. The switch will shut down if the power supply overheats and the temperature gets to 100oC. Last boot: 17:22:29 Mon Aug 25. NOTE – The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds 60oC. October 2003 .0 (FLASH image2). 7 minutes and 21 seconds.1. 54 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. 0 hours. 2003 (reset from console) MAC address: 00:09:97:5e:4c:00 IP (If 1) address: 1. active configuration.0.

One of eight different prefixes is used.4 Nov 19 16:54:13 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 17:20:37 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. new root bridge Nov 19 13:52:03 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.80.81.1 enabled Nov 19 14:21:27 ALERT ip: cannot contact default gateway 47.25.22.81.80. „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ EMERG: indicates the system is unusable ALERT: Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT: Indicates critical conditions ERR: indicates error conditions or error operations WARNING: indicates warning conditions NOTICE: indicates a normal but significant condition INFO: indicates an information message DEBUG: indicates a debut-level message Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.80.0 Command Reference /info/sys/log Show Last 30 Syslog Messages Date Time Criticality level Message Nov 19 12:16:51 ALERT stp: STG 1.81.81.1 operational Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.80.27.4 Nov 19 14:44:02 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:15:06 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:15:20 INFO mgmt: new configuration saved Nov 19 16:18:44 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:19:37 ERROR mgmt: Error: Apply not done Nov 19 16:19:57 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Nov 19 16:34:35 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.27.80. included in text form as a prefix to the log message.27.22.22.22. depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of.80.Alteon OS 21.22. as shown below.1 Nov 19 13:52:23 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.1 Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.4 Nov 19 16:39:43 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Nov 19 16:39:59 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.4 Nov 19 17:26:21 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47. October 2003 „ 55 .49 Nov 19 17:31:53 NOTICE mgmt: admin idle timeout from Telnet/SSH Each syslog message has a criticality level associated with it.27.1 enabled Nov 19 14:38:55 NOTICE mgmt: admin login from host 47.1 operational Nov 19 14:21:47 NOTICE ip: default gateway 47.22.81.

20.20. or auto) Link (Up or down) IP address of the Interface IP address of the gateway. and is necessary so that an Alteon switch can be discovered by the Nortel Networks Optivity Switch Manager.20.When SONMP is enabled. October 2003 . 56 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.255.Alteon OS 21.0 Gateway information: 47.80. devices on the network exchange multicast packets namely: flatnet hellos and segment hellos.255 Use this command to display Management port information on an Alteon Application Switch including: „ „ „ „ „ Port speed (10/100) Duplex mode (half.88 255.1 47.0 Command Reference /info/sys/mgmt Management Port Information Speed ----100 Duplex -----full Link ---up Interface information: 47.80. a topology table is built like the one shown below. /info/sys/sonmp SONMP Information This command displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) topology table.80. SONMP protocol is enabled on Alteon Application Switches using the /cfg/sys/ sonmp on command.255. full. As the network devices exchange information. any. The IP address of the device is written into the hello packets.

The current state of the sender of the topology message. The MAC address of the sender of the topology message. Indicates if the sender of the topology message is on the same Ethernet segment (i.23.80.22. The “segment identifier” of the segment from which the remote agent send the topology message. Different devices may use different methods for representing the segment identifier.25 260 47. The chassis type of the device that sent the topology message.23.247 0 47.1 263 IP address MAC address ----------------00:01:81:2e:a3:60 00:e0:16:7c:28:24 00:60:cf:81:54:28 00:60:cf:81:54:38 00:60:cf:43:a2:10 00:60:cf:46:d5:60 Local State Seg -----------------.80.0 Command Reference Slot Port ----0 /0 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 1 /11 Seg Id --------------.10.Alteon OS 21.10.25 259 47.80.23. „ new—sending agent is in new state.----Alteon2224 true topChanged Passport1200 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat Passport8610 true heartbeat AlteonAD4 true topChanged Alteon184 true topChanged Chassis Type Table 4-3 SONMP Information Parameters Description Parameter Slot Port Description Specifies the slot and port on which the topology message was received. IP Address Seg ID Mac Address Chassis Type Local Seg State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.241 257 50. October 2003 „ 57 . not across a bridge) as the reporting agent.----. This is the IP address of the sender of the topology message.80. the values are: „ topChanged—topology information has recently changed „ heartbeat—topology information unchanged.23.80.e.1 770 47.--47.

2003 Interface information: Gateway information: Engine ID = 80:00:07:50:03:00:09:97:16:5F:00 User Name -------------------------------adminmd5 adminsha Protocol -------------------------------HMAC_MD5.80.31.3. Last boot: 13:07:55 Mon Jun 2. DES PRIVACY HMAC_SHA. Last 30 syslog message information: Jun 2 13:07:59 NOTICE system: link up on port 3 Jun 2 13:07:59 NOTICE system: link up on port 7 Jun 2 13:08:00 NOTICE system: link up on port 9 Jun 2 13:08:25 NOTICE slb: real server 172. 0 hours.10 operational Management port information: Speed ----10/100 Duplex -----any Link ---disabled 2.81 Hardware Order No: EB1412003 Mainboard Hardware: Part No: P314090-A Rev: 03 Management Processor Board Hardware: Part No: P314080-A Rev: 02 Fast Ethernet Board Hardware: Part No: P314091-A Rev: 03 Unreleased Software: FW_VERSION: #2 Mon Jun 2 11:37:20 PDT 2003 FW_VIEW: bshao_latest FW_CONTEXT: ALT-HW_CH_FE-6 / pass2 / 256m (FLASH image2).23. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /info/sys/dump System Information Dump System Information at 13:29:31 Mon Jun Alteon Application Switch 2424 Switch is up 0 days.3. 21 minutes and 36 seconds.11 operational Jun 2 13:09:27 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 2 13:09:32 INFO mgmt: new configuration applied Jun 2 13:09:37 NOTICE slb: real server 172. active configuration.31. DES PRIVACY 58 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. 2003 (reset from Telnet) MAC address: 00:09:97:16:5f:00 IP (If 1) address: 47.Alteon OS 21.

For details. see page 64. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. see page 60. stg <STG index to display or carriage return for all STGs> In addition to seeing if Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled. dump Displays all Layer 2 information. October 2003 „ 59 . see page 62. including: „ „ „ „ VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN For details. vlan <VLAN number to display or carriage return to display all VLANs> Displays VLAN configuration information.0 Command Reference /info/l2 Layer 2 Information Menu [Layer 2 Menu] fdb stg trunk vlan dump Forwarding Database Information Menu Show STG information Show Trunk Group information Show VLAN information Dump all layer 2 information Table 4-4 Layer 2 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu.Alteon OS 21. see page 64. For details. you can view the following STP bridge information: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: Port number and priority Cost State For details. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. trunk When trunk groups are configured.

xxxxxxxxxxxx.Show all FDB entries NOTE – The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch.Show FDB entries on a single VLAN refpt .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . port <port number. 60 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. 08:00:20:12:34:56. 080020123456. trunk <trunk group number> Displays all FDB entries on a single trunk. 0 for "unknown"> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. [Forwarding Database Menu] find .Alteon OS 21. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device.0 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb Layer 2 FDB Information The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. October 2003 . dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. Enter the MAC address using the format.Show FDB entries on a single port trunk . For example. see page 61. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the FDB entries referenced by a single port. For example. Each SP port supports up to 8K entries. For more information. xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address. You can also enter the MAC address using the format.Show FDB entries referenced by a single SP dump .Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan . Table 4-5 Layer 2 FDB Information Menu Options (/info/l2/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address.

Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database (FDB) or to clear the entire FDB.Alteon OS 21. the port field represents the trunk group number. the MAC address is for a virtual server router—a virtual router with the same IP address as a virtual server. means that it has been learned by the switch. but has only been seen as a destination address.0 Command Reference /info/l2/fdb/dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State Referenced SPs Referenced ports ----------------.------------00:02:01:00:00:00 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:01 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:02 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:03 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:04 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:05 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:06 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:07 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:08 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:09 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0a 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0b 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 00:02:01:00:00:0c 300 23 FWD 1 2 1 23 An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state. the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router. When in the trunking (TRK) state. October 2003 „ 61 . If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK). no outbound port is indicated. When an address is in the unknown state. If the state is listed as a virtual server (VIP). the MAC address has not yet been learned by the switch.---.-------------.----.” If the state for the port is listed as an interface (IF). although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference ports.---. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. refer to “Forwarding Database Options” on page 363.

0 Command Reference /info/l2/stg Layer 2 Spanning Tree Group Information When multiple paths exist on a network. NOTE – Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path.------- 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 The switch software uses the IEEE 802. you can view the following STP bridge information: „ „ „ „ „ Priority Hello interval Maximum age value Forwarding delay Aging time You can also see the following port-specific STP information: „ Port number and priority 62 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. In addition to seeing if STP is enabled or disabled.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 Hello 2 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 MaxAge 20 Port ----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.0 supports up to 16 multiple Spanning Tress or Spanning Tree Groups.Alteon OS 21.

The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. The aging time parameter specifies. Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The forward delay parameter specifies. LISTENING. in seconds. Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Priority (bridge) Hello Description The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge. the lower the path cost. Generally speaking.Alteon OS 21. The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database. October 2003 „ 63 . or DISABLED. FORWARDING. The state field can be either BLOCKING. The hello time parameter specifies.0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ Cost State Designated Bridge Designated Port The following table describes the STP parameters. in seconds. A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated. The maximum age parameter specifies. MaxAge FwdDel Aging priority (port) Cost State Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). The state field shows the current state of the port. the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state. LEARNING. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. in seconds. in seconds. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP network. the faster the port.

The designated port identifies a physical port. bw contract 256. Port membership is represented in slot/port format. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices.----Default VLAN ena n 256 ena 1-28 This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state. This is a number that is the numerical sum of bridge priority and the actual physical port number.Alteon OS 21. For example. When trunk groups are configured. larger virtual link. a physical port number four with bridge priority 32768 will be displayed as 32678+4=32772.----. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. /info/l2/vlan VLAN Information VLAN ---1 Name Status Jumbo BWC Learn Ports -------------------------------. VLAN information includes: 64 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Designated port /info/l2/trunk Trunk Group Information Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. This bridge is displayed as character string starting with the bridge priority (1-65535) followed by a hyphen and six byte MAC address of that switch. the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding. port state: 1: STG 1 forwarding 2: STG 1 forwarding NOTE – If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding. Trunk group 1. October 2003 . combining their bandwidth to create a single. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups.----.-----.---.0 Command Reference Table 4-6 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions (Continued) Parameter Designated Bridge Description The designated bridge resides closest to the root bridge and is responsible for forwarding packets from LAN towards the root bridge.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ „ „ „ VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Jumbo Frames Bandwidth Contract if BWM is enabled Source MAC Address Learning Port membership of the VLAN /info/l2/dump Layer2 Dump Information Spanning Tree Group 1: On Current Root: 8000 00:01:81:2e:a1:80 Parameters: Priority 32768 Cost ---0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Path-Cost 0 MaxAge 20 Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 0 2 20 15 300 FwdDel 15 Aging 300 Hello 2 Port -----1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Priority -------128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 State ---------DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED FORWARDING DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED Designated Bridge Des Port ---------------------.------ 8000-00:01:81:2e:a1:80 32773 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 65 .

and health status IP forwarding information: Enable status. see page 72. subnet mask. or 16 for infinite hops) „ The IP interface that the route uses For details.Alteon OS 21. see page 69. ospf Displays OSPF routing information menu. broadcast address. ip Displays IP Information. specifying the number of hops to the destination (1-15 hops. arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Information Menu. October 2003 . subnet mask. includes: „ „ „ „ „ IP interface information: Interface number. VLAN number. Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use. bgp Displays BGP Information Menu. and gateway address Type of route Tag indicating origin of route Metric for RIP tagged routes. and operational status. Using the options of this menu. see page 74. To view menu options. IP information. see page 67. IP address. gateway number. lnet and lmask Port status 66 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. For details.0 Command Reference info/l3 Layer3 Information Menu [Layer 3 Menu] route arp bgp ospf ip vrrp dump IP Routing Information Menu ARP Information Menu BGP Information Menu OSPF Routing Information Menu Show IP information Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information Dump all layer 3 information Table 4-7 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu. the system displays the following for each configured or learned route: „ „ „ „ Route destination IP address. see page 79. IP address. For details. For details.

For more information.0 Command Reference Table 4-7 Layer 3 Information Menu Options Command Syntax and Usage vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu.Show tag .Show a single route by destination IP address routes to a single gateway routes of a single type routes of a single tag routes on a single interface all routes Using the commands listed below.4.101)> Displays a single route by destination IP address. Table 4-8 Route Information Menu Options (/info/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. October 2003 „ 67 . Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.Show gw .17. /info/l3/route IP Routing Information [IP Routing Menu] find . see page 68. you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch.44)> Displays routes to a single gateway. 192. see Table 4-9 on page 68. tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Displays routes of a single tag.17.Alteon OS 21. For a description of IP routing types.Show if . type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Displays routes of a single type. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays routes on a single interface.4.Show type . dump Displays all Layer 3 information. see page 79. see Table 4-10 on page 69. gw <default gateway address (such as. 192. For details. For a description of IP routing types. dump Displays all routes configured in the switch.Show dump .

0 0.31.0 47. direct local broadcast martian multicast 68 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.31.200 direct vip * 172.255 broadcast broadcast Type Parameters The following table describes the Type parameters.0 172.1 255. Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch.23.23.255.3.0.80.3.1 direct fixed 2 * 172.81 255.255.31.31.1 255.255. Indicates a multicast route.4.81 direct fixed 1 * 47.31. Indicates a broadcast route.0.31.1 direct fixed 3 * 172.Alteon OS 21.255.255 47.255 255.80.255.80.255 broadcast broadcast 3 * 172.255.255 172.23.* 0.1 indirect static 1 * 47.0.255 172.0 255.0.0 0.80.0.80.255.254.255.255.255.255 255.0 martian martian * 172.0.81 local addr 1 * 47.23.1 local addr 2 * 172.--------.255.255.1 local addr 3 * 172.255.0 172.4.0.255.23.0.0 47.0. The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.0 255.255 255. October 2003 .0.0.255.0.best Destination Mask Gateway Type Tag Metr If --------------.--------------.255 255.31.31.0 255.---.31.255 172.0 224.80.--------.255.31.255.255.4.31.4.3.31.--------------.255 47.255.255 172.200 255.31.255. Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.31.4.255.4.0 255. Packets to this destination are discarded.3.3.0.0.4.80.255 172.22.4.3.0 martian martian * 255.255 broadcast broadcast 1 * 127.0 Command Reference /info/l3/route/dump Show All IP Route Information Status code: * .255 broadcast broadcast 2 * 224.255.22. Table 4-9 IP Routing Type Parameters (/info/l3/route/dump/type) Parameter indirect Description The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address.0.255.255.255.0.255 255.0 0.

the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the router is present in the ARP cache.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port . The address belongs to a filtered group.Alteon OS 21.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . VIP routes are needed to advertise virtual server IP addresses via BGP. [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show all ARP entries help . Indicates a route destination that is a virtual server IP address.0 Command Reference Tag Parameters The following table describes the Tag parameters.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory.Show help on the fields of ARP entries addr . ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses. The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). October 2003 „ 69 . ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump . The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces. Table 4-10 IP Routing Tag Parameters (info/l3/route/tag) Parameter fixed static Description The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch. In any IP communication. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol (RIP). addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian vip /info/l3/Arp ARP Information Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer. The address is a static route which has been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) Indicates a broadcast address.Show ARP address list Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

Permanent ARP entry (not obtained via ARP request). e. etc.4. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays the ARP entries referenced by a single port.17. VIP.Layer 4 IP address (VIP) MAC address: VLAN: Port: Referenced SPs: MAC address of ARP entry VLAN of this ARP entry Physical port where this IP address owner is connected SPs on which this ARP entry is present addr Displays the ARP address list: IP address.0 Command Reference The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry. address status flags (see Table 4-12 on page 71).ARP entry belongs to a Jumbo capable VLAN P .101> Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.g.Alteon OS 21. dump Displays all ARP entries. MAC address. 192. see page 71. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN. port <port number> Displays the ARP entries on a single port. For example: IP address: Flags: IP address of ARP entry J . help Displays help on the ARP field entries. and port referencing information. 70 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. IP mask. VLAN and port for the address. IP interface. October 2003 . R . including: „ „ „ „ IP address and MAC address of each entry Address status flag (see below) The VLAN and port to which the address belongs The ports which have referenced the address (empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown) For more information. and VLAN flags. Table 4-11 ARP Information Menu Options (/info/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.Indirect ARP (cache) entry for IP address reachable via indirect routes (static/dynamic) 4 .

So the traffic coming into the referenced ports has the destination IP address.3.10 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 1-4 47.---.23.----.Alteon OS 21. this traffic needs to be forwarded to the egress port (port 6 in the above example). The MAC address has not been learned.81 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 1-4 172. From the ARP entry (the referenced ports).1 P 4 00:09:97:16:5f:01 1-4 10.80.1. R U Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. Unresolved ARP entry.31.22.10.80.10 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 empty 172. The Flag field is interpreted as follows: Table 4-12 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag P P 4 Description Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.3.31. the designated port will be the normal ingress port.1 P 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 1-4 172.0 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.10. Permanent entry created for Layer 4 proxy IP address or virtual server IP address. NOTE – If you have VMA turned on.11.3. If you have VMA turned off.---. October 2003 „ 71 .---------------1.----------------. the referenced port will be the designated port. Indirect route entry.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:86 1 23 empty 47.31.11 00:b0:d0:98:d8:1b 1 3 empty Referenced ports are the ports that request the ARP entry.

4.255 255.255. 72 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.255. dump Displays the BGP routing table.81 IP mask --------------255. up/down.255 255.10.200 172.255.---. October 2003 .10 1. refer to BGP section in chapter: “The Configuration Menu” on page 175 and the Application Guide.255.----00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:01 00:09:97:16:5f:0e D 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 00:09:97:16:5f:00 1 /info/l3/bgp BGP Information Menu Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks.255.255.1 172. [BGP Menu] peer .1.255.1 47.255 MAC address VLAN Flags ----------------.255.255.Show BGP routing table Table 4-13 BGP Peer Information Menu Options (/info/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information.3.255 255.Alteon OS 21.255.31.23.255 255.4.255. summary Displays peer summary information such as AS.31. For more information.255. See page 73 for a sample output. message sent.0 Command Reference /info/l3/arp/addr ARP Address List Information IP address --------------10. message received.Show all BGP peers in summary dump . state.11.255 255.10.31.Show all BGP peers summary .1 172.80. See page 74 for a sample output. See page 73 for a sample output.

---------4 142 113 121 00:00:28 established 0 148 0 0 never connect Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.148 Information: V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down State . Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0.1. October 2003 „ 73 . LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 /info/l3/bgp/summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/summary provides. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0).0. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0.178. BGP Peer Information: 3: 2.15.-------.4 .0.23.0.201. Local AS: 0.178. Local AS: 0. Holdtime: 0. Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0.5 BGP status: idle. Old status: idle Total received packets: 0.0 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/peer provides. Holdtime: 0.1.0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.1.1.1 . Link type: IBGP Remote router ID: 0. version 0.142 2: 205.201. version 0.1.-------. BGP Peer Summary Peer --------------1: 205. Local router ID: 1.0. Sent updates: 0 Keepalive: 0. Total sent packets: 0 Received updates: 0.Alteon OS 21.0.-------.-------.1.5 BGP status: idle. LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0) Established state transitions: 0 4: 2. TTL 1 Remote AS: 0. MinAdvTime: 60 LastErrorCode: unknown(0). Local router ID: 1.

Show summary address list nsumadd . OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS).----*> 10.0.178.Show details of virtual links nbr . i .EGP. or.----.21.0 205. /info/l3/ospf OSPF Information Menu Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. a loop detected.Database Menu sumaddr .147 1 256 *>i205.0. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone.0. ? .21. >> BGP# dump Status codes: * valid.178.Show general information aindex .178. In any AS with multiple areas. which then distributes it to other areas as needed.0 * 205.21.0 is filtered out by rrmap.0.0. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area.178.0.Show neighbor(s) information dbase .Show area(s) information if . For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch.147 1 128 13.---.0.--------------. The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas.17. > best. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583.178. refer to the OSPF section in chapter “The Configuration Menu” on page 175 and your Alteon OS Application Guide.incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght --------------.internal Origin codes: i .Show interface(s) information virtual .0 205.147 1 256 Path -------------147 148 i 0 i 147 i 147 i 147 {35} ? The 13.IGP.178.21. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone.0 205.Show OSPF routes 74 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.0 0.147 1 128 *> 205.Alteon OS 21. known as the backbone. e . [OSPF Information Menu] general .0.Show NSSA summary address list routes .0 Command Reference /info/l3/bgp/dump Dump BGP Information Following is an example of the information that /info/l3/bgp/dump provides.15. one area must be designated as area 0. October 2003 .

nsumadd <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas. it displays the information about all the current neighbors. If no router ID is supplied.C. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays area information for a particular area index.Alteon OS 21. if <interface number [1-256]> Displays interface information for a particular interface.B. See page 76 for a sample output. To view menu options. If no parameter is supplied. nbr <nbr router-id (A. dbase Displays OSPF database menu. virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links. October 2003 „ 75 . Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. see page 77. it displays information for all the interfaces.D)> Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. sumaddr <area index (0-2)> Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non-NSSA areas. See page 76 for a sample output. If no parameter is supplied. it displays area information for all the areas. See page 78 for a sample output. routes Displays OSPF routing table.0 Command Reference Table 4-14 OSPF Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information.

0.1. October 2003 .0. Admin Status UP Router ID 10.10.10.1. Hello 10. 2 are =FULL state Number of areas is 2.10.Alteon OS 21. Wait 1663.1.1. Retransmit 5.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID: 47.1 Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.0.80.0.12. Poll interval 0.247 Started at 95 and the process uptime is 352315 Area Border Router: yes.10. of which 2 are >=INIT state.1. of which 3-transit 0-nssa Area Id : 0.2 Timer intervals. AS Boundary Router: no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 Number of interfaces in this router is 2 Number of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1.10.0 Authentication : none Import ASExtern : yes Number of times SPF ran : 8 Area Border Router count : 2 AS Boundary Router count : 0 LSA count : 5 LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B Summary : noSummary /info/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10. Authentication type none 76 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.23. 2 are >=EXCH state. Ip Address 10.10.14. Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10. Area 0.10.10.12.12. Ip Address 10. Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4. Dead 40. State DR.

b) asbrsum link_state_id 10. d) asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs. dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format: a) the number of LSAs of each type in each area.D)>|<self> Displays the AS-external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.D)>|<self> Displays ASBR summary LSAs.B.C.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20.1. No parameters are required.ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm .1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.NSSA External LS Database info rtr . Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. ext <adv-rtr (A.C.All Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage advrtr <router-id (A.1.Network-Summary LS Database info all .Router LS Database info self . d) the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.D)> Takes advertising router as a parameter.B.B. asbrsum <adv-rtr (A.C.C.B.1.External LS Database info nw .C.B.1.Self Originated LS Database info summ .Alteon OS 21. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1.1.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ospf/dbase OSPF Database Information [OSPF Database Menu] advrtr . c) asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.Network LS Database info nssa .1. Displays all the Link State Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID.1.1. c) the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.LS Database summary ext . The usage of this command is as follows: a) asbrsum adv-rtr 20. for example: 20.LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum .1. October 2003 „ 77 . b) the total number of LSAs for each area.

2 E2 172.1.2 E2 172.18.1.D)>|<self> Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.0/24 via 200.1.1.C.2 E2 172.1.1.B.OSPF external type 2 IA 10. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum. E2 .1. N2 . N1 .OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 .1.18.1.1.4/32 via 30.C.7/32 via 30.1.2 IA 100.18.1.1. nssa <adv-rtr (A.D)>|<link_state_id (A.0 Command Reference Table 4-15 OSPF Database Information Menu (/info/l3/ospf/dbase) Command Syntax and Usage nw <adv-rtr (A.1.1.C.10.1.1.1. /info/l3/ospf/routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes: IA .18.1.18.2 IA 150.D)>|<self> Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA.B.3/32 via 30.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.B.5/32 via 30.1.2 E2 172.C.C.1.6/32 via 30.1.OSPF external type 1.1.0.B.2 IA 40.1.1. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.D)>|<self> Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.1.1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.1. all Displays all the LSAs.1.1/32 via 30.0/28 via 200.1.1.1.Alteon OS 21.2 E2 172.2 E2 172.C.2 IA 80. No parameters are required.1.8/32 via 30. October 2003 . self Displays all the self-advertised LSAs.2 IA 140.2 E2 172.2/32 via 30.2 78 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.1.18.1.1.B.OSPF inter area.1. summ <adv-rtr (A.network LS database.B.2 E2 172.1.0/16 via 200.B.D)>|<self> Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.18.B.1.1.1.18. rtr <adv-rtr (A.0/28 via 20. The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum.0/27 via 20.C.C.OSPF NSSA external type 1.D)>|<link_state_id (A.

1 lsdb limit 0 /info/l3/vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN.3.80.31. 172.255. 172. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for more information on VRRP.31.255.255.22.0 3: 172.80.1.23. and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address.1.31.0 Command Reference /info/l3/ip IP Information Interface information: 1: 47.23. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Current OSPF settings: ON Default route none Router ID: 1. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master.80. up vlan 1. If the master fails. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.255.0 47.31.1 255. vlan any.1 255. based on a number of priority criteria. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.Alteon OS 21. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.1.4.255.81 255.254.255. vlan 1. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device.4. October 2003 „ 79 . up vlan 1.3.0 2: 172.255. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.255.

2.1. 28.200.1. if 28. renter. 172.210. renter. The server state identifies virtual routers that support Layer 4 services.200. renter. prio 118. prio 100.2.200. server 172: vrid 172.8. † backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.202. prio 102. 12.1. master 12. master 28. „ „ Priority value.21. if 172.200. prio 118.2. 12: vrid 12.2.178. proxy When virtual routers are configured. renter.Alteon OS 21. A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same.18. 100: vrid 100.0 Command Reference VRRP information: 10: vrid 10. October 2003 . renter.1. the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master. renter. backup 172. Activity status † master identifies the elected master virtual router. master 27. backup 13. prio 110. renter.21.100.1. renter. 20. renter.1.2. master. renter.1. renter.18. prio 102. server VRRP information: 1: vrid 2. prio 110.200. prio 102.1.2. renter. 172. 80 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.200. 13: vrid 13. backup. master.18. renter. prio 102. server 1.178. server 255: vrid 255. 27. you can view the status of each virtual router using this command.2. 13. VRRP information includes: „ „ „ „ Virtual router number Virtual router ID and IP address Interface number Ownership status † owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. renter.1.2. if if if if if if if if if if 10. if 2: vrid 1.2. 14. master. 14: vrid 14. 254: vrid 254.178. 205. prio 100. 28: vrid 28.204.200. 27. master.100. „ Server status. renter. prio 100. master 14. prio 110.200. prio 118.2. master if 27. 205. backup 1. 1. prio 118. † renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device. if 3: vrid 3. These are known as virtual server routers: any virtual router whose IP address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. 11: vrid 11. 205. 27: vrid 27. master 11. 10. 28. prio 110.100. 11. 20: vrid 20.8. backup 20. During the election process.1.200.

October 2003 „ 81 . /info/l3/dump Layer3 Dump Information IP information: AS number 0 Interface information: 1: 47.4. up Default gateway information: metric strict 2: 47.0 Command Reference „ Proxy status. dirbr disabled Current local networks: Current IP port settings: All other ports have forwarding ON Current network filter settings: none Current route map settings: Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. up vlan 1.4.255.80. minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured.23.255.31.3.255.31.23.255.254.81 255. 172.80. 172.0 2: 172.0 3: 172.255. The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers.31. up Current IP forwarding settings: ON.255.31.22. vlan 1.Alteon OS 21.80.1 255. vlan any.0 47.3. where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address.255.1.1 255.255. The use of virtual proxy routers enables redundant switches to share the same IP address. up vlan 1.

real server group. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature.Show filter information port . the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server. see page 84. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> „ Displays Virtual Server State: Virtual server number. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays Real server number.0 Command Reference /info/slb Layer 4 Information Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services.Show real server selected by hash or minmisses metric cookie . each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services.Session Table Information Menu real .: [Server Load Balancing Information Menu] sess . In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. and health check result. MAC address.Show port information gslb .Show Global SLB information idshash . VLAN. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. To view menu options. October 2003 .Show all layer 4 information Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sess Displays the Session Table Information Menu.Alteon OS 21. real IP address. 82 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. layer where health check is performed. server port mapping. it can become overutilized.Show real server information virt .Decode the HEX value to get the VIP and RIP synatk .Show virtual server information filt . IP address. group backup server. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. virtual MAC address „ Virtual Port State: Virtual service or port. With this software feature.Show SYN attack detection information dump . physical switch port.Show IDS server selected by hash or minmisses metric bind .

filter status. destination port. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. URL for health checks. real server port. bind <IP address> <mask> <group number> Displays the real server selected by hash or minmisses metric. and client and/or server Layer 4 activity. every two seconds. health check layer. IP address. see page 89. This feature requires dbind to be enabled. cookie <16 bytes cookie value in hexadecimal format as 0XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX> Decodes the hexadecimal value to get the virtual server IP address and real server IP address. backup server.0 Command Reference Table 4-16 Layer 4 Information Menu Options (/info/slb) Command Syntax and Usage filt <filter ID (1-2048)>|list|allow|deny|redir|nat Displays the filter number. and status. dump Displays all Layer 4 information for the switch. group backup server. proxy IP address. the number of new half open sessions is examined within a set period of time. synatk Displays SYN attack detection information. real server group. a list of applied filters. gslb Displays the remote switch number. for example. and real server group. IP address. port <port number> Displays the physical port number. October 2003 „ 83 . To identify whether or not the server is under SYN attack. and health status.Alteon OS 21. For details. idshash <IP address 1> <IP address 2> Displays the Intrusion Detection System server selected by hash or minmisses metric. IP subnet mask.

filter <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays all session entries with matching filter. dport <Destination real port> Displays all session entries with destination port.Show all session entries with destination IP address dport .Show all session entries with proxy IP address pport .Show all session entries with matching filter flag . 84 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /info/slb/sess Session Table Information [Session Table Information Menu] cip . pport <proxy port> Displays all session entries with proxy port.Show all session entries with matching flag port .Session entry description Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage cip <IP address> Displays all session entries with client’s source IP address.Show all session entries with ingress port real . cport <real port> Displays all session entries with source (client) port. flag <E|L|N|P|S|Rt|Ru|Ri|U|W> Displays all session entries with matching flag.Show all session entries on sp dump . See “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 87 for a description of these options.Show all session entries with real IP address sp .Show all session entries with source port dip . October 2003 .Show all session entries help .Show all session entries with proxy port filter . dip <Destination IP address> Displays all session entries with the destination IP address.Show all session entries with source IP address cport . pip <Proxy IP address> Displays all session entries with proxy IP address.Alteon OS 21.Show all session entries with destination port pip .

3.1. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 85 . 1 to 13 associated with a session as identified in the above example. are described in “Session dump information in Alteon OS” on page 87.0 Command Reference Table 4-17 Session Information Menu Options (/info/slb/sess) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays all session entries on the ingress port.1 http age 6 f:10 EUSPT c (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7a) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Note: The fields. 01: 1.1 4586.1. sp <port number (1-4)> Displays all session entries on switch processor. dump Displays all session entries. Information similar to the following may appear in a session entry dump: 3.3.2 3567 3. real <IP address> Displays all session entries with real server IP address.Alteon OS 21.1 http -> 1. help Displays the description of the session entry. 2.2.1.2.1.

86 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.21.07: 10.2.1 rtsp -> 47.12.31.26 http NAT age 2 f:24 E Persistent session 3.21.13 0 age 10 P During client-server port negotiation.24.144.1.200 ftp-data ->172.13 21220 age 10 P Filtering LinkLB 2. 39.2.4.84 http -> 192.215 4102.20 ftp age 10 EU 1.31.81.12.200 0 172.4.81.20 ftp-data age 10 E NAT 2.168.4.19 1040.8.01: 172.81.2. 10. 172.00: 172.16: 172.2. 3.2.1 21220 -> 47.19 1040.8.13 urlwcr age 10 f:100 EU 3.144.3.4.215 4098.1 http -> 47.24.21.21.4.31.1.1 rtsp -> 47.01: 172.26 1706.79 urlwcr age 6 f:123 E RTSP L4-L7 RTSP 3. 205.11 wcr age 4 f:12 E 3. October 2003 .14.31.79 http age 4 L4-L7 WCR HTTP 2.01: 172.12.3.4.168.0. The second session is RTSP UDP data connection.10.13 21220 age 10 P The first session is RTSP TCP control connection.21.09: 172.21. the destination port shows “rtsp” and server port shows “0” L7 WCR RTSP 3.31.2.1 http -> 47.05: 172.30 age 4 EPS C:3 The destination port.31.12.2. 39.16 2559.2.81.81.00: 237.162.1 21220 -> 47.2. 39.19 4586.21.215 80.13 rtsp age 10 EU 3.19 6970. 39.12.1. 172.4.200 ftp ->172.19 6970.19 4586.2.12.20.123 160.01: 172.3.12.2.144.31.8.81.01: 172.144.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E FTP 1.09: 172.11 age 8 EP c:1 1.0. 39.2.200 44687.01: 172.21.178.19 6970.21.Alteon OS 21. 172. 172.21. real server IP and server port are not shown for persistent session.0 Command Reference Samples of Session Dumps for Different Applications L4 HTTP 3.52. 39.81.2. 39.31.01: 172.144.1 rtsp -> 47.31.51 http -> 192.2.

this field is the same as destination IP address (5).1 http age 10 3.Alteon OS 21.1 rtsp -> 2. this field contains the IP address of the real server that the switch selects to forward client packet to.1 1040. 2. “DENY” or “NAT” instead. for load balancing.1.2.1 21220 age 10 P For filtering.01: 1.1. This field contains the Proxy IP address substituted by the switch.2.2.1.1.3. DENY or NAT instead.07: 1.1 6970. This field identifies the destination port from client’s TCP/UDP packet.10 linklb age 8 f:10 E (8) Real Server IP Address Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 87 . It will show “ALLOW”. If the switch does not find a live server.1.2.1 http -> 3. 2.01: 1.2. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow.3. this field also shows the real server IP address.1. This field identifies the source port from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. This field shows the physical port through which the client traffic enters the switch.168.2.2.01: 1. For example: 3. 2.1 1040. This field contains the source IP address from the client’s IP packet.1. No address is shown if the filter action is Allow. This field identifies the destination IP address from the client’s TCP/UDP packet. (2) Ingress port (3) Source IP address (4) Source port (5) Destination IP address (6) Destination port (7a) Proxy IP address (7) Proxy Port This field identifies the TCP/UDP source port substituted by the switch. This field also shows the real server IP address for filtering.1 http -> 3.1.2.3. If the switch does not find live server. For example: 3.1 1706.1 http age 10 f:11 2. 2. This field contains the real server IP address of the corresponding server that the switch selects to forward the client packet to.1 http-> 192. this field contains the same as the destination IP address mentioned in field (5).2.4. Deny or NAT. Deny or NAT. It will show ALLOW. For load balancing.2.3.0 Command Reference Session dump information in Alteon OS Field (1) SP number Description This field indicates the Switch Port number that created the session.

“wcr”. October 2003 . “U”: Indicates the session is L7 delay binding and switch is trying to open TCP connection to the real server. This field indicates the session created by filtering code as a result of the IP header keys matching the filtering criteria. It is for internal use only. “P”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and is not to be aged out. (7) and (8) cannot have persistent session. “L”: Indicates the session is a link load balance session.Alteon OS 21. “N”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding client traffic to the real server. “W”: Indicates the session only translates the destination MAC when forwarding layer 7 WCR traffic to the real server. or Cookie Pbind. “Ru”: Indicates UDP rate limiting per client entry. “Ri”: Indicates ICMP rate limiting per client entry.0 Command Reference Field (9) Server port Description This field is the same as the destination port (field 6) for load balancing except for the RTSP UDP session. “linkslb” or “nonat”. “Rt”: Indicates the session is TCP rate limiting per-client entry. “idslb”. For RTSP UDP session. this server port is obtained from the client-server negotiation. “E”: Indicates the session is in use and will be aged out if no traffic is received within session timeout value. the session is freed. (10) Age (11) Filter number (12) Flag This is the session timeout value. Fields (6). (13) Persistent session user count This counter indicates the number of client sessions created to associate with this persistent session. This field is the filtering application port for filtering. If no packet is received within the value specified. This field can be “urlwcr”. “S”: Indicates the session is a persistent session and the application is SSL session ID. 88 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

backup none.20. group 88.20.1.1. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 3: urltwo 4: urlthree Redirect filter state: Action redir dport http. backup none proxy enabled.20.20. up 2: 210.2. up Virtual server state: 1: 20. October 2003 „ 89 . vlan 1.2. health 3.101.20. vlan 1. up exclusionary string matching: disabled 1: any 2: urlone 27: 20. vlan 1. 2 ms.0 Command Reference /info/slb/dump Show All Layer 4 Information Real 1: 2: 26: 27: server state: 210.20. health 3. filters: 80 idslb filt enabled.101. 00:01:02:71:9c:a6.20.102. rport 3128.200. health 3. port 1. up 20. 00:01:02:70:4d:4a. vlan 1.2. backup none.1.200. 2 ms. 1 ms. 00:60:cf:47:5c:1e virtual ports: http: rport http.102.200. backup none. filters: 200 idslb filt enabled.2. port 8. filters: 200 filt disabled.20. 3 ms. backup none. filters: 50 200 Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.1. health 3. radius snoop disabled real servers: 1: 210. 00:01:02:c1:4b:48.20. backup none.Alteon OS 21. health 3. port 6. 00:03:47:07:a4:9e.1. port 7. up 20.1. dbind HTTP Application: urlslb real servers: 26: 20.20. up Port 1: 2: 3: 4: state: filt disabled. vlan any 200: group 1. up 210.

or auto) Flow control for transmit and receive (no. any.Alteon OS 21. yes. 10/100.0 Command Reference /info/link Link Status Information Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Speed Duplex -----------10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 100 full 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any 100 full 10/100 any 10/100 any 10/100 any Flow Ctrl --TX-----RX-yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Link -----down down down down up down down down down down down down down down up down down down Use this command to display link status information about each port on an Alteon Application Switch slot. 100. including: „ „ „ „ „ Port number Port speed (10. full. October 2003 . or 1000) Duplex mode (half. or auto) Link status (up or down) 90 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 91 .0 Command Reference /info/port Port Information Port ---1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Tag --n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n RMON ---e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e PVID ---300 2 4000 4000 4000 4000 7 4000 4000 4000 11 300 300 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 BWC ----256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 NAME -------------ixia2-2 pc03p bps3 bps4 bps5 bps6 pc07f bps8 bps9 bps10 pc04u ixia2-4 ixia2-3 8600-1-14 8600-1-15 8600-1-16 8600-1-17 35k-1 35k-2 35k-3 VLAN(s) ------------------300 2 4000 4000 4000 4000 7 4000 4000 4000 11 300 300 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Port information includes: „ „ „ „ „ „ Port number Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n) Port VLAN ID (PVID) Port name VLAN membership Whether RMON is enabled or disabled on the port Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.

26’ BWM history will be mailed in 9 minute(s) to ’abhijitk@nortelnetworks.0 Command Reference /info/bwm <contract number> Bandwidth Management Information Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications.com’ at host ’47. such as e-commerce transactions. /info/security Security Information This command brings up the information about the current security settings that includes: „ „ „ „ „ rate threshold for security logging whether the out-of-order IP fragment packets have the option of allow or deny on the filters the current IP addresses in the Access Control List (ACL) the current UDP blast protection settings the current port security settings 92 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E.81.138.81. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation.26’ Contract Policy wTOS Traffic Num Name Prec Hard Soft Resv oTOS uTOS State Shaping 1 filter_number01 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 2 filter_number02 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 3 filter_number03 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D 4 filter_number04 64 1 100M 1M 500K 0D 0 E D NOTE – The contract number is optional.Alteon OS 21. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic.138. It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. October 2003 .com’ at host ’47. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. You can see the following information on your switch when you execute this command: Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement:enabled BWM history will be mailed in 9 minute(s) to ’abhijitk@nortelnetworks.

Alteon OS 21. For information on ordering optional software license keys. /info/dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu (10K or more.---------------. Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. see “How to Get Help” on page 18. October 2003 „ 93 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance.0 Command Reference Current security settings: seclog 128 fragment allow Current IP address ACL settings: Number Address Mask -------.---------------Current UDP blast protection settings: Port security state: /info/swkey Software Enabled Keys For optional Layer 4 switching software. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. the information would be displayed as follows: Enabled Software features: Layer 4: GSLB Bandwidth Management Security Pack Software key information includes a list of all the optional software packages which have been activated or installed on your switch.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 94 „ Chapter 4: The Information Menu 315393-E. October 2003 .

Show SNMP stats mgmt .Dump all stats 95 315393-E. /stats Statistics Menu [Statistics Menu] port .SP-specific Stats Menu security .Layer 2 Stats Menu l3 .CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes.Security Stats Menu snmp .Layer 3 Stats Menu slb .Management Port Stats dump .MP-specific Stats Menu sp . This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics. October 2003 .Server Load Balancing (L4-7) Stats Menu bwm .Bandwidth Management Stats Menu mp .Port Stats Menu l2 .

To view menu options. For details. dump Dumps all switch statistics. To view menu options. Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated. see page 127. security Displays Security Statistics Menu. see page 162. Use this command to display traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. see page 110. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. To view menu options. l3 Displays Layer3 Statistics Menu. see page 152. see page 109. see page 174. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing (SLB) Menu. To view menu options. see page 164. If you want to capture dump data to a file. sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays Switch Processor-Specific Menu. To view menu options. l2 Displays Layer 2 Statistics Menu. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Menu.0 Command Reference Table 5-1 Statistics Menu Options (/stats) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. see page 97. See page 170 for a sample output and description of SNMP statistics. see page 158. snmp Displays SNMP Statistics. Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. See page 173 for sample output. mgmt Displays interface statistics for the Management Port. To view menu options. mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu. 96 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. To view menu options. October 2003 .

ether Displays Ethernet (“dot1”) statistics for the port. link Displays link statistics for the port. See page 106 for a sample output and the description of statistics. See page 98 for a sample output and the description of statistics. ip Displays IP statistics for the port.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number> Port Statistics Menu This menu displays traffic statistics on a port-by-port basis. if Displays interface statistics for the port.Show Internet Protocol ("IP") stats link .Show link stats rmon .Clear all port stats Table 5-2 Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/port) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the port. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Show RMON stats clear .Alteon OS 21. Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects. See page 102 for a sample output and the description of statistics. clear This command clears all the statistics on the port. rmon Displays RMON statistics for the port. See page 104 for a sample output and the description of statistics. See page 99 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Show interface ("if") stats ip .Show Ethernet ("dot3") stats if . [Port Statistics Menu] brg . October 2003 „ 97 . See page 105 for a sample output and the description of statistics.Show bridging ("dot1") stats ether .

Bridging statistics for port 1: dot1PortInFrames: dot1PortOutFrames: dot1PortInDiscards: dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards: dot1BasePortDelayExceededDiscards: dot1BasePortMtuExceededDiscards: dot1StpPortForwardTransitions: 63242584 63277826 0 0 NA NA 0 Table 5-3 Bridging Statistics of a Port (/stats/port/brg) Statistics dot1PortInFrames Description The number of frames that have been received by this port from its segment. A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. The total number of Forwarding Database entries. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges. which have been or would have been learnt. it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full (a condition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork). filtered) by the Forwarding Process. including bridge management frames.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port. including bridge management frames. The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment. Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function. The number of frames discarded by this port due to an excessive size. It is incremented by both transparent and source route bridges.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . dot1PortOutFrames dot1PortInDiscards dot1TpLearnedEntry Discards dot1BasePortDelay ExceededDiscards dot1BasePortMtu ExceededDiscards dot1StpPortForward Transitions 98 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. If this counter is increasing. The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state. The number of frames discarded by this port due to excessive transit delay through the bridge. If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing. Count of valid frames received which were discarded (that is. but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database. it indicates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.3 Layer Management. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. This count does not include frames received with frametoo-long or frame-too-short errors.3 Layer Management. A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Ethernet statistics for port 1: dot3StatsAlignmentErrors: dot3StatsFCSErrors: dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames: dot3StatsSQETestErrors: dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions: dot3StatsLateCollisions: dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions: dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors: dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors: dot3StatsFrameTooLongs: dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors: dot3CollFrequencies [1-15]: 0 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA 0 0 0 NA Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsAlignment Errors Description A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.Alteon OS 21. according to the conventions of IEEE 802. Note: Coding errors detected by the physical layer for speeds above 10 Mb/s will cause the frame to fail FCS check. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. dot3StatsFCSErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 99 . The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control (LLC) (or other MAC user).

This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. The count represented by an instance of this object does not include frames involved in collisions. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. October 2003 . or ifOutBroadcastPkts. ifOutMulticastPkts.802. Five hundred and twelve bit-times corresponds to 51. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision for purposes of other collision-related statistics. A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sub layer for a particular interface. dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot3StatsSQETestErrors dot3StatsDeferredTransmissions dot3StatsLateCollisions 100 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts.6. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object.2. The SQE TEST ERROR is set in accordance with the rules for the verification of the SQE detection mechanism in the PLS Carrier Sense Function as described in IEEE Std. ifOutMulticastPkts. or ifOutBroadcastPkts. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.Alteon OS 21.4. The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet. A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy.31998 Edition.0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames Description A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. section 7.

the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific. counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC. Received frames for which multiple error conditions are obtained are. A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer receive error. the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object. In particular. October 2003 „ 101 . This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error. even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a transmission attempt.0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3StatsExcessive Collisions Description A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions. The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation-specific.Alteon OS 21. In particular. an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors dot3StatsFrameTooLongs dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a particular interface. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). or the dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size. or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions object.3 Layer Management. The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt. an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted. according to the conventions of IEEE 802.

October 2003 . For a MAC layer protocol. a frame which is transmitted after experiencing exactly 4 collisions would be indicated by incrementing only dot3CollFrequencies [4]. The number of packets. which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer. No other instance of dot3CollFrequencies would be incremented in this example. this includes both Group and Functional addresses. The number of packets. /stats/port <port number>/if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. Interface statistics for port 1: ifHCIn Counters Octets: 51697080313 UcastPkts: 65356399 BroadcastPkts: 0 MulticastPkts: 0 Discards: 0 Errors: 0 ifHCOut Counters 51721056808 65385714 6516 0 0 0 Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInOctets Description The number of octets in valid MAC frames received on the interface.layer. The number of packets delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub) layer.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-4 Ethernet Statistics for Port (/stats/port/ether) Statistics dot3CollFrequencies Description A count of individual MAC frames for which the transmission (successful or otherwise) on a particular interface occurs after the frame has experienced exactly the number of collisions specified by the index. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sublayer. including the MAC header and FCS. ifHCInUcastPkts ifHCInBroadcastPkts ifHCInMulticastPkts 102 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in fullduplex mode.layer. For example. This does include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames received on this interface. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub. which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher sub.

The sum for this interface of: dot3statsSQETestErrors. dot3StatsFCSErrors. The number of octets transmitted in valid MAC frames on this interface.0 Command Reference Table 5-5 Interface Statistics for Port (/stats/port/if) Statistics ifHCInDiscards Description The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. including those that were discarded or not sent. and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sublayer. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. including those that were discarded or not sent. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including the MAC header and FCS. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. including those that were discarded or not sent. dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. For a MAC layer protocol. dot3StatsLateCollisions. and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sublayer. This does not include the number of octets in valid MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface. dot3StatsFrameTooLongs. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. ifHCInErrors ifHCOutOctets ifHCOutUcastPkts ifHCOutBroadcastPkts ifHCOutMulticastPkts ifHCOutDiscards ifHCOutErrors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. The sum for this interface of dot3statsAlignmentErrors. dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors and dot3StatsSymbolErrors. October 2003 „ 103 . this includes both Group and Functional addresses. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors and dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors.Alteon OS 21.

including those received in error. ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards ipInDelivers ipTtlExceeds 104 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Class E). and the Source. but which were discarded (for example. this counter will include only those packets which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch). This count includes invalid addresses (for example. 0. October 2003 . The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination.0. The number of IP datagram for which an ICMP TTL exceeded message was sent. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). IP statistics for port 1: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipTtlExceeds: ipLANDattacks: 0 0 0 0 0 0 ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: 0 0 Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly. for lack of buffer space).0.0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways.Route option processing was successful. The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.Alteon OS 21. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-6 Interface Protocol Statistics (/stats/port/ip) Statistics ipLANDattacks Description The number of packets that have the same source and destination IP address. Link statistics for port 1: linkStateChange: 4 Table 5-7 Link Statistics (/stats/port/link) Statistics linkStateChange Description The total number of link state changes. /stats/port <port number>/link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port. October 2003 „ 105 .Alteon OS 21.

the etherStatsPkts and etherStatsOctets objects should be sampled before and after a common interval. Note that this number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped. RMON statistics for port 1: etherStatsDropEvents: etherStatsOctets: etherStatsPkts: etherStatsBroadcastPkts: etherStatsMulticastPkts: etherStatsCRCAlignErrors: etherStatsUndersizePkts: etherStatsOversizePkts: etherStatsFragments: etherStatsJabbers: etherStatsCollisions: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts65to127Octets: etherStatsPkts128to255Octets: etherStatsPkts256to511Octets: etherStatsPkts64Octets: etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets: 0 3727038769 69869242 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 102426 6050515 12293234 24586063 49171870 47539775 Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsDrop Events Description The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.Alteon OS 21. respectively. The differences in the sampled values are Pkts and Octets.4 . The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). These values are used to calculate the utilization as follows: Pkts u 9. it is just the number of times this condition has been detected.6 + 6. This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of utilization (which is the percent utilization of the ethernet segment). and the number of seconds in the interval is Interval. If greater precision is desired.0 Command Reference /stats/port <port number>/rmon RMON Statistics This menu option enables you to display the remote monitor statistics of the selected port.

8 . + Octets u 0.

Utilization = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interval u 10 000 The result of this equation is the percent value of utilization. October 2003 . etherStatsOctets 106 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits. Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE802.3. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits. etherStatsBroadcastPkts etherStatsMulticastPkts etherStatsCRCAlign Errors etherStatsUndersizePkts etherStatsOversizePkts etherStatsFragments etherStatsJabbers Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).1. but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets. broadcast packets.Alteon OS 21. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.1. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. inclusive. Note that it is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment. The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. This is because it counts both runts (which are normal occurrences due to collisions) and noise hits. Note that this does not include multicast packets.4 (10Base-2).2. The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.5 (10Base-5) and section 10. but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed. These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.0 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsPkts Description The total number of packets (including bad packets. but including FCS octets). but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).) The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. October 2003 „ 107 . The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits. (A runt is a packet that is less than 64 bytes.3 section 8. The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 milliseconds and 150 milliseconds. and multicast packets) received.

2.1. in the receive mode. A 10Base-T station can only detect collisions when it is transmitting.3k) plus receiver collisions observed on any coax segments to which the repeater is connected.4 (10Base-T) of IEEE standard 802.3 (10Base-5) and section 10.1. if three or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The value returned will depend on the location of the RMON probe. 14.Alteon OS 21. Probe location plays a much smaller role when considering 10Base-T. Thus probes placed on a station and a repeater. Section 8. Note also that an RMON probe inside a repeater should ideally report collisions between the repeater and one or more other hosts (transmit collisions as defined by IEEE 802. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). Thus a probe placed on a repeater port could record more collisions than a probe connected to a station on the same segment would. etherStatsPkts64Octets etherStatsPkts65to127Octets etherStatsPkts128to255Octets etherStatsPkts256to511Octets etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets 108 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. should report the same number of collisions.3.3 (10Base-2) of IEEE standard 802.1. October 2003 . The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).3 states that a station must detect a collision.3 defines a collision as the simultaneous presence of signals on the DO and RD circuits (transmitting and receiving at the same time). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).0 Command Reference Table 5-8 Remote Monitor Statistics (/stats/port/rmon) Statistics etherStatsCollisions Description The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment. A repeater port must detect a collision when two or more stations are transmitting simultaneously. The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including Frame Check Sequence (FCS) octets).2.

Show FDB stats /stats/l2/fdb FDB Statistics FDB statistics: creates: current: lookups: finds: find_or_c’s: 30503 83 511889 21801 36140 deletes: hiwat: lookup fails: find fails: overflows: 30420 855 1126 0 0 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding database. Number of search failures in the Forwarding Database. Number of entries found or created in the Forwarding Database. and unsuccessful searches.0 Command Reference /stats/l2 Layer 2 Statistics Menu [Layer 2 Statistics Menu] fdb . Number of entries overflowing the Forwarding Database.Alteon OS 21. Number of successful searches in the Forwarding Database. lookup fails find fails overflows Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Number of entries deleted from the Forwarding Database. Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database. October 2003 „ 109 . Number of unsuccessful searches made in the Forwarding Database. Number of entry lookups in the Forwarding Database. Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database. including the number of new entries. finds. FDB statistics are described in the following table: Table 5-9 Forwarding Database Statistics (/stats/l2/fdb) Statistic creates current lookups finds find_or_c’s deletes hiwat Description Number of entries created in the Forwarding Database.

Show IP stats route .0 Command Reference /stats/l3 Layer 3 Statistics Menu [Layer 3 Statistics Menu] ospf . See page 116 for sample output.OSPF Statistics Menu ip .Show ICMP stats if . but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) See page 120 for sample output. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: „ „ „ dns Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received.Show route stats arp . See page 121 for sample output. See page 121 for sample output. October 2003 . arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.Show UDP stats ifclear .Dump layer 3 stats Table 5-10 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays OSPF statistics Menu. ip Displays IP statistics.Alteon OS 21. route Displays route statistics.Show TCP stats udp .Show DNS stats icmp . icmp Displays ICMP statistics. See page 118 for sample output.Show IP interface ("if") stats tcp .Show ARP stats vrrp . See page 111 for sample output. See page 119 for sample output. vrrp When virtual routers are configured.Clear IP stats dump . 110 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Displays Domain Name Server/System (DNS) statistics.Clear IP interface ("if") stats ipclear .Show VRRP stats dns .

See page 112 for sample output and details. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays interface statistics. udp Displays UDP statistics. See page 125 for sample output.Alteon OS 21. ifclear Clears IP interface statistics. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics. tcp Displays TCP statistics. dump Dumps all Layer 3 switch statistics.0 Command Reference Table 5-10 Layer 3 Statistics Menu (/stats/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays IP interface statistics for the management processors. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging Layer 3 switch performance. See page 126 for sample output. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 111 . aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays area index statistics. If you want to capture dump data to a file. Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP interface statistics.Show global stats aindex .Show area(s) stats if . ipclear Clears IP statistics. /stats/l3/ospf OSPF Statistics Menu [OSPF stats Menu] general .Show interface(s) stats Table 5-11 OSPF Statistics Menu (/stats/l3/ospf) Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics. See page 123 for sample output.

October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. OSPF stats ---------Rx/Tx Stats: Pkts hello database ls requests ls acks ls updates Nbr change stats: hello start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down Timers kickoff hello retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Rx -------0 23 4 3 7 9 Tx -------0 518 12 1 7 7 Intf change Stats: hello down loop unloop wait timer backup nbr change 2 0 2 2 2 2 0 0 2 0 0 1 4 2 0 0 2 0 5 514 1028 0 0 0 0 0 112 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/ospf/general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Tx Pkts Rx Hello Tx Hello Rx Database Tx Database Rx ls Requests Tx ls Requests Rx ls Acks Tx ls Acks Rx ls Updates Tx ls Updates Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 21. The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) Statistics Rx/Tx Stats: Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces. October 2003 „ 113 .

The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is. October 2003 . in an adjacency’s final state) having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets. The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces. in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Description Start n2way adjoint ok negotiation done exchange done bad requests bad sequence loading done n1way rst_ad down 114 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers. The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas. an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of HelloInterval seconds) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master/slave relationship has been negotiated.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Nbr Change Stats: hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is. across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either: a) Has an unexpected DD sequence number b) Unexpectedly has the init bit set c) Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet.Alteon OS 21. and sequence numbers have been exchanged. The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces. Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces. in the initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of link state updates received for all out-of-date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas. October 2003 „ 115 . The sum total number of interfaces. indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces. connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas. The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement (LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been fired. The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired.0 Command Reference Table 5-12 OSPF General Statistics (stats/l3/ospf/general) (Continued) Statistics Intf Change Stats: hello down loop The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas. The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces. The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired. The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces. retransmit lsa lock lsa ack dbage summary ase export Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas. The total number of times the Autonomous System Export (ASE) timer has been fired. Description unloop wait timer backup nbr change Timers Kickoff: hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired (which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF areas and interfaces.Alteon OS 21. The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

0. time-to-live exceeded. October 2003 .0) and addresses of unsupported Classes (for example.Route option processing was successful. this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address. The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers. The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the switch) was not their final IP destination. The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. ipInHdrErrors ipInAddrErrors ipForwDatagrams ipInUnknownProtos 116 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. including those received in error. this counter will include only those packets. This count includes invalid addresses (for example.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/ip IP Statistics IP statistics: ipInReceives: ipInAddrErrors: ipInUnknownProtos: ipInDelivers: ipOutDiscards: ipReasmReqds: ipReasmFails: ipFragFails: ipRoutingDiscards: ipReasmTimeout: 3115873 35447 500504 2334166 4 0 0 0 0 5 ipInHdrErrors: ipForwDatagrams: ipInDiscards: ipOutRequests: ipOutNoRoutes: ipReasmOKs: ipFragOKs: ipFragCreates: ipDefaultTTL: 1 0 0 1010542 4 0 0 0 255 Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInReceives Description The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. version number mismatch. The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header’s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity (the switch). and the Source. including bad checksums. For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams. errors discovered in processing their IP options. Class E). other format errors. In entities which do not act as IP Gateways. 0. which were Source-Routed via this entity (the switch).Alteon OS 21. and so forth. as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination.0.

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. for example. because their Don’t Fragment flag was set. Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion. but which were discarded (for example. for lack of buffer space). The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the switch) but could not be. ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipOutDiscards ipOutNoRoutes ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipInDiscards Description The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. but which were discarded (for example. errors. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity (the switch). October 2003 „ 117 . The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams. for lack of buffer space).assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out. and so forth).assembled. The number of failures detected by the IP re. The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity (the switch). The number of IP datagrams successfully re.Alteon OS 21. The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP userprotocols (including ICMP). which meet this no-route criterion. The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the switch). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-13 IP Statistics (/stats/l3/ip) Statistics ipRoutingDiscards Description The number of routing entries. The maximum number of seconds. The total number of RIP advertisement packets sent. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free-up buffer space for other routing entries. which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid. which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity (the switch). Description The total number of outstanding routes in the route table. The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table. ipDefaultTTL ipReasmTimeout /stats/l3/route Route Statistics Route statistics: ipRoutesCur: ipRoutesMax: RIP statistics: ripInPkts: ripDiscardPkts: BGP statistics: bgpInPkts: bgpBadPkts: bgpRoutesAdded: bgpRoutesCur: bgpRoutesIgnored: 7 1024 ipRoutesHighWater: 7 0 ripOutPkts: 0 ripRoutesAgedOut: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 bgpOutPkts: bgpSessFailures: bgpRoutesRemoved: bgpRoutesFailed: bgpRoutesFiltered: 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-14 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics ipRoutesCur ipRoutesHighWater ipRoutesMax RIP statistics: ripInPkts ripOutPkts The total number of good RIP advertisement packets received. The maximum number of routes that are supported. The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live (TTL) field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity (the switch). October 2003 . 118 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.

bgpRoutesFiltered /stats/l3/arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics. The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table. The total number of BGP routes that failed to add in the routing table. ripRoutesAgedOut BGP statistics: bgpInPkts bgpOutPkts bgpBadPkts bgpSessFailures bgpRoutesAdded bgpRoutesRemoved bgpRoutesCur bgpRoutesFailed bgpRoutesIgnored The total number of BGP packets received. The total number of failed sessions.Alteon OS 21. The total number of routes learned via RIP that has aged out. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The total number of routes that were removed from the routing table. The total number of routes dropped by the filter. ARP statistics: arpEntriesCur: arpEntriesMax: 3 4096 arpEntriesHighWater: 4 Table 5-15 ARP Statistics (/stats/l3/arp) Statistics arpEntriesCur arpEntriesHighWater arpEntriesMax Description The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table. The total number of BGP packets dropped.0 Command Reference Table 5-14 Route Statistics (/stats/l3/route) Statistics ripDiscardPkts Description The total number of RIP advertisement packets received that were dropped. The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported. The total number of current BGP routes. The total number of routes that were added to the routing table. The total number of BGP packets sent. The total number of routes ignored because the peer was not connected locally or multihop was not configured. October 2003 „ 119 .

and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /stats/l3/vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the Alteon Application Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. but ignored (vrrpBadAdvers) The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed: VRRP statistics: vrrpInAdvers: vrrpOutAdvers: 0 0 vrrpBadAdvers: 0 Table 5-16 VRRP Statistics (/stats/l3/vrrp) Statistics vrrpInAdvers vrrpBadAdvers vrrpOutAdvers Description The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been received. based on a number of priority criteria.Alteon OS 21. The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped. The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent. When virtual routers are configured. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master. you can display the following protocol statistics for VRRP: „ „ „ Advertisements received (vrrpInAdvers) Advertisements transmitted (vrrpOutAdvers) Advertisements received. If the master fails. one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. 120 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

/stats/l3/icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics: icmpInMsgs: icmpInDestUnreachs: icmpInParmProbs: icmpInRedirects: icmpInEchoReps: icmpInTimestampReps: icmpInAddrMaskReps: icmpOutErrors: icmpOutTimeExcds: icmpOutSrcQuenchs: icmpOutEchos: icmpOutTimestamps: icmpOutAddrMasks: 245802 41 0 0 244350 0 0 0 0 0 253777 0 0 icmpInErrors: icmpInTimeExcds: icmpInSrcQuenchs: icmpInEchos: icmpInTimestamps: icmpInAddrMasks: icmpOutMsgs: icmpOutDestUnreachs: icmpOutParmProbs: icmpOutRedirects: icmpOutEchoReps: icmpOutTimestampReps: icmpOutAddrMaskReps: 1393 0 0 18 0 0 253810 15 0 0 18 0 0 Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInMsgs Description The total number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received. DNS statistics: dnsInRequests: dnsBadRequests: 0 0 dnsOutRequests: 0 Table 5-17 DNS Statistics (/stats/l3/dns) Statistics dnsInRequests dnsOutRequests dnsBadRequests Description The total number of DNS request packets that have been received.Alteon OS 21. The total number of DNS response packets that have been transmitted. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics. The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 121 .

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received. The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received.Alteon OS 21. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received. This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent. The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent. The total number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) attempted to send. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. stop sending data) messages received. The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch) did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer.0 Command Reference Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpInErrors Description The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch) received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums. For a host. this object will always be zero. stop sending data) messages sent. The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost full. since hosts do not send redirects. bad length. Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors. The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received. In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter’s value. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received. October 2003 . The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received. and so forth). icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInTimeExcds icmpInParmProbs icmpInSrcQuenchs icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpInTimestamps icmpInTimestampReps icmpInAddrMasks icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors icmpOutDestUnreachs icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutParmProbs icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutRedirects 122 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

This object is deprecated in favor of ifInMulticastPkts and ifInBroadcastPkts. October 2003 „ 123 . delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer).0 Command Reference Table 5-18 ICMP Statistics (/stats/l3/icmp) Statistics icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutTimestampReps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpOutAddrMaskReps Description The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages sent. The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. The number of packets. The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. including framing characters. delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sublayer).Alteon OS 21. /stats/l3/if <interface number> Interface Statistics IP interface 1 statistics: ifInOctets: 48948386 ifInNUCastPkts: 167895 ifInErrors: 0 ifOutOctets: 27100789 ifOutNUcastPkts: 218652 ifOutErrors: 0 ifInUcastPkts: ifInDiscards: ifInUnknownProtos: ifOutUcastPkts: ifOutDiscards: ifStateChanges 220553 0 0 441938 0 1 Table 5-19 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInOctets Description The total number of octets received on the interface. The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent. The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent. which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. ifInUcastPkts ifInNUCastPkts ifInDiscards Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent. The number of packets.

including those that were discarded or not sent. For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing. which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including framing characters. and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors. this counter will always be 0. October 2003 . ifInUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifStateChanges 124 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-19 Interface Statistics (/stats/if) Statistics ifInErrors Description For packet-oriented interfaces. The number of outbound packets.Alteon OS 21. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. and which were addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub-layer. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. the number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher-layer protocol. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. The number of times an interface has transitioned from either down to up or from up to down. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted. the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors. For character-oriented or fixed-length interfaces. This object is deprecated in favor of ifOutMulticastPkts and ifOutBroadcastPkts. the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. including those that were discarded or not sent. For packet-oriented interfaces. For packet-oriented interfaces.

The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. In particular. an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793. In particular.0 Command Reference /stats/l3/tcp TCP Statistics TCP statistics: tcpRtoAlgorithm: tcpRtoMax: tcpActiveOpens: tcpAttemptFails: tcpInSegs: tcpRetransSegs: tcpCurBuff: tcpOutRsts: 4 240000 252214 528 756401 0 0 417 tcpRtoMin: tcpMaxConn: tcpPassiveOpens: tcpEstabResets: tcpOutSegs: tcpInErrs: tcpCurConn: 0 512 7 4 756655 0 3 Table 5-20 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity (the switch) can support. More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout. October 2003 „ 125 . The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN-SENT state or the SYN-RCVD state. tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens tcpAttemptFails Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-RCVD state from the LISTEN state. when the timeout algorithm is rsre(3). The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN-SENT state from the CLOSED state.Alteon OS 21. measured in milliseconds. plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state from the SYN-RCVD state. measured in milliseconds. In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic. this object should contain the value -1.

The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened. The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag. including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets. This count includes segments received on currently established connections. The total number of segments sent. October 2003 . The total number of segments received in error (for example. tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpCurBuff tcpCurConn tcpOutRsts /stats/l3/udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics: udpInDatagrams: udpInErrors: 54 0 udpOutDatagrams: udpNoPorts: 43 1578077 Table 5-21 UDP Statistics (/stats/l3/udp) Statistics udpInDatagrams udpOutDatagrams udpInErrors Description The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch.Alteon OS 21. The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port.that is. The total number of segments retransmitted . The total number of segments received. the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets. The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port. udpNoPorts 126 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-20 TCP Statistics (/stats/l3/tcp) Statistics tcpEstabResets Description The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSEWAIT state. including those received in error. The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack. The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the switch). bad TCP checksums).

Show DNS SLB stats wap .Show SSL SLB stats ftp . Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.0 Command Reference /stats/slb Load Balancing Statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing Statistics Menu] sp .Alteon OS 21.Show Layer 7 stats ssl . October 2003 „ 127 .Show maintenance stats clear .Show auxiliary session table stats dump .Show virtual server stats filt .Show Global SLB stats layer7 . To view menu options.Show filter stats gslb .Show real server stats group . For per-service octet counters.Show WAP SLB stats maint .Show RTSP SLB stats dns .Show FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats rtsp .SLB Switch SP Stats Menu real . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. group <real server group number (1-256)> Displays the following real server group statistics: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group. see page 129. See page 133 for sample output.Show real server group stats virt . see page 132.Dump all SLB statistics Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sp <SP number (1-4)> Displays the server load balancing statistics menu.Clear non-operational Server Load Balancing stats aux . Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the following real server statistics: „ „ „ „ „ Number of times the real server has failed its health checks Number of sessions currently open on the real server Total sessions the real server was assigned Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server Real server transmit/receive octets See page 129 for sample output. Real server transmit/receive octets.

see page 133. See page 145 for sample output. clear [y|n] Clears all non-operating SLB statistics on the Alteon Application Switch. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the total number of times any filter has been used. rtsp Displays RTSP SLB statistics. For more information. Displays auxiliary session table statistics. ssl Displays SSL server load balancing statistics. See page 141 for sample output.0 Command Reference Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the following virtual server statistics: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. See page 145 for sample output. ftp Displays FTP SLB parsing and NAT statistics. See page 134 for sample output. maint Displays SLB maintenance statistics. 128 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. gslb Displays the Global SLB Statistics Menu. dns Displays DNS SLB statistics. refer to Table 5-40 on page 150. layer7 Displays Layer 7 statistics. October 2003 . Real server transmit/receive octets. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. see page 134. To view the statistics reset by this command. See page 149 for sample output. See page 133 for sample output.Alteon OS 21. For per-service octet counters. See page 147 for sample output. See page 137 for sample output. This command does not reset the switch and does not affect the following counters: „ „ aux Counters required for Layer 4 and Layer 7 operation (such as current real server sessions). See page 142 for sample output. wap Displays WAP SLB statistics. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. resetting them to zero. All related SNMP counters.

See page 130 for a sample output. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays statistics of the virtual server.Show auxiliary session table stats clear . October 2003 „ 129 . filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays statistics of the filter. Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance. /stats/slb/sp Server Load Balancing SP statistics Menu [Server Load Balancing SP Statistics Menu] real .Show maintenance stats aux .Show real server group stats virt . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. maint Displays the SP maintenance statistics. See page 131 for a sample output. clear Deletes all the SP statistics. See page 131 for a sample output. See page 130 for a sample output. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.0 Command Reference Table 5-22 SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb) Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps all switch SLB statistics. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays real server group statistics of the switch port. aux Displays the statistics of the auxiliary session table.Show filter stats maint .Alteon OS 21. See page 130 for a sample output. To save dump data to a file.Show virtual server stats filt .Clear SP stats Table 5-23 SP Statistics Menu options (/stats/slb/sp) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays real server statistics of the switch port.Show real server stats group .

100.10.14 20 60 9 2 200.-------1 200.-------1 200.---------.--------------.-------.--------------.---------. October 2003 .-------.--------------.-------.-------200.100.10.100.-------.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/virt <virtual server number> SP Virtual Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------.15 20 77 12 ---.100 40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 130 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.14 20 60 9 2 200.10.100.10.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp/real <real server number> SP Real Server Statistics Port 1 Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Octets: 3 3 24 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/group <real group server number> SP Real Group Server Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.100.---------.10.---------.15 20 77 12 ---.

October 2003 „ 131 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/filt <filter number> SP Filter Statistics Poet 1 Filter 30 stats: Total Firings: 2 /stats/slb/sp <sp number>/maint SP Maintenance Statistics SP 1 SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: Non TCP/IP frames: TCP fragments: UDP datagrams: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: Total IP fragment sessions: IP fragment sessions: IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 523264 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /stats/slb/real <real server number> Real Server SLB Statistics Real server 1 stats: Current sessions: Total sessions: Highest sessions: Octets 129 65478 4343 523824000 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

20 for HTTP services. Table 5-24 Real Server SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/real) Statistics Current sessions Description The total number of outstanding sessions that are established to the particular real server. 132 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. you can configure IP address 10. Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Per Service Octet Counters For each load-balanced real server. The total number of octets sent by the particular real server.1. configure one real server group for each type of service. 10 real servers would have to be configured: five for the HTTP services on each physical server. two groups would be configured: one for handling HTTP and one for handling FTP. the octet counters represent the combined number of transmit and receive bytes (octets).Alteon OS 21. and group each appropriate real server IP address into the group that handles the specific service. October 2003 . two real servers would be configured for the physical server (representing each real service).0 Command Reference NOTE – Octets are provided per server. you can accomplish this through the following configuration: 1. The octet counters are provided per server–not per service.21 for FTP services on the same physical server. configure a real server with a real IP address for each service above.1. On the Alteon Application Switch.1. Continuing the example above. and five for the FTP services on each physical server. unless configured as described in “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132.1. in keeping with our example. Configure a separate IP address for each service on each server being load balanced. On the Alteon Application Switch. not per service. If there were five physical servers providing the two services (HTTP and FTP). If you need octet counters on a perservice basis. The total number of sessions that have been established to the particular real server. These counters are then added to report the total octets for each virtual server. 2. The highest number of sessions ever recorded for the particular real server. and 10. 3. For instance. Thus.

100.Alteon OS 21. Configure a virtual server and add the appropriate services to that virtual server.15 20 77 12 ---. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the real server group. Real server transmit/receive octets.10. see the procedure on “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132. Virtual server statistics include the following: Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.--------------.100. /stats/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.10.15 20 77 12 ---.10.-------1 200. October 2003 „ 133 .100.14 20 60 9 2 200.-------1 200.100.10. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server.-------.20 40 309 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 NOTE – The virtual server IP address is shown on the last line.-------. For per-service octet counters.--------------.0 Command Reference 4.100.---------.-------200. below the real server IP addresses.14 20 60 9 2 200.---------.-------.---------. /stats/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group Statistics Real server group 1 stats: Current Total Highest Real IP address Sessions Sessions Sessions ---.--------------.---------.10.-------40 137 21 Octets --------------480000 616000 --------------1096000 Real server group statistics include the following: „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server in the real server group.-------.--------------.

Show Real server group Global SLB stats virt . under which the remote server is configured. /stats/slb/gslb Global SLB Statistics Menu [Global SLB Statistics Menu] real . 134 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. /stats/slb/filt <filter number> Filter SLB Statistics Filter 1 stats: Total firings: 1011 You can obtain the total number of times any filter has been used.Show Virtual server Global SLB stats maint . see “Per Service Octet Counters” on page 132. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. Real server transmit/receive octets. see page 136.Show Real server Global SLB stats group . To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. see page 135. group <real server group number (1-1024)> To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen.0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ Current and total sessions for each real server associated with the virtual server. Current and total sessions for all real servers associated with the virtual server. For per-service octet counters. Highest number of simultaneous sessions recorded for each real server. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.Show Global SLB maintenance stats Table 5-25 Global SLB Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Where the real server number represents the real server ID on this switch. see page 135. maint To view an example and description of what is displayed on-screen. see page 135.

--------------.178.---------------Totals 1848 HTTP Redirects --------------30 12 --------------42 Real server group global statistics include the following: „ „ „ Number of DNS hand-offs to each remote real server in the group Number of HTTP redirects to each remote real server in the group Total DNS hand-offs and HTTP redirects to the remote real servers in the group /stats/slb/gslb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server Global SLB Statistics Virtual server 1 Service Server ------.-----------------205.178.13.55 4 31032 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.-----http v1 http r1 telnet v1 Global SLB stats: IP address Response time Min sessions avail --------------.178.13.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/gslb/real <real server number> Real Server Global SLB Statistics Real server 1 global stats: DNS handoffs: HTTP redirects: 3210 12 For any remote real server configured for Global Server Load Balancing.------------.13.13.54 1240 2 205.13. the following statistics can be viewed: „ „ Number of DNS hand-offs sent by the remote real server/real server group Number of HTTP redirects sent by the remote real server/real server group /stats/slb/gslb/group <group number> Real Server Group Global SLB Statistics Real server group 1 Global SLB stats: Real server IP address DNS Handoffs ----------.--------------.54 10 24120 205.178.55 16 21190 205.178. October 2003 „ 135 .---------------1 205.223 608 ----------.Alteon OS 21.

Client HTTP GET request packets that do not contain the entire URL are considered bad and are dropped. This number will change as client traffic loads change. or as real servers under the virtual server or remote sites go in or out of service. The number of bad/dropped DSSP updates/packets received from remote sites.Alteon OS 21. If bad updates or dropped packets occur. The number of bad/dropped client HTTP requests.0 Command Reference Virtual server global statistics include the following: „ „ Service: type of service running on the virtual server Server: type of server configuration and server ID number. the number represents the real server ID on this switch. Bad updates or dropped packets usually indicate that there is a GSLB switch configuration problem. † v# represents a local virtual server number † r# represents a remote site. /stats/slb/gslb/maint Global SLB Maintenance Statistics Global SLB maintenance stats: Updates received: Bad updates received: Bad requests received: 0 0 0 Global SLB maintenance statistics include the following: „ „ The number of Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates/packets received from remote sites. The time is specified in ticks of 65 milliseconds. under which the remote server is configured. „ „ „ IP address of the server Response time: the average time (current weight) that each service takes to respond to information exchanges with its peers. Minimum sessions available: the current number of sessions available for serving client requests. „ 136 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Since each remote sites is configured on its peers as if it were a real server (with certain special properties). October 2003 . check your syslog for configuration error messages.

str Displays SLB string statistics.Show SLB String stats maint . See page 137 for a sample output. maint Displays Layer 7 maintenance statistics. Total straight to ori.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7 SLB Layer7 Statistics Menu [Layer 7 Statistics Menu] redir . See page 138 for a sample output. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Total none-GETs hits The total number of none GET requests forwarded to the origin server.The total number of HTTP requests forwarded from straight to the gin server hits origin server. Total origin server hits The total number of HTTP requests forwarded to the origin server. October 2003 „ 137 . See page 139 for a sample output.Show URL Redirection stats str .Show Layer 7 Maintenance stats Table 5-26 SLB Layer 7 Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/layer7) Command Syntax & Usage redir Displays URL Redirection statistics.Alteon OS 21. /stats/slb/layer7/redir Layer7 Redirection Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total Total URL based web cache redirection stats: cache server hits: origin server hits: straight to origin server hits: none-GETs hits: ’Cookie: ’ hits: no-cache hits: RTSP cache server hits: RTSP origin server hits: HTTP redirection hits: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Description Total cache server hits The total number of HTTP requests redirected to the cache server.

com 3 www.com 6 www. /stats/slb/layer7/str Layer 7 SLB String Statistics SLB String stats: ID SLB String 1 any 2 www.[abcdefjhijklm]*. The total number of RTSP requests forwarded to the origin server.junk.com 5 www.[abcdefghijklm]*.org 7 www.0 Command Reference Table 5-27 Layer 7 Redirection Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/redir) Statistics Total ’Cookie:’ hits Total no-cache hits Total RTSP cache server hits Total RTSP origin server hits Total HTTP redirection hits Description The total number of cookie requests forwarded to the origin server.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.abc. The total number of HTTP requests that were redirected by redirection filter. The total number of instances that are load-balanced due to matching of the particular URL ID.[nopqrstuvwxyz]*.Alteon OS 21. The total number of requests containing no-cache header forwarded to the origin server.org Hits 1527115 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-28 Layer 7 SLB String Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/str) Statistics ID SLB String Hits Description The user-defined strings being used in URL matching. The total number of RTSP requests redirected to the cache server. October 2003 .com 4 www. 138 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21. Clients reset by switch on server side Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1. This means that when the switch could not connect to the real sever and the client’s retries exceeded the threshold due to delayed binding. The total number of connection swapping between different real servers in supporting multiple HTTP/1.Seq buffers: 0 Alloc Fails .1: 0 Invalid HTTP methods: 0 Aged delayed binding sessions: 0 Half open connections: 0 Switch retries: 0 Random early drops: 0 Requests exceeded 4500 bytes: 0 Invalid 3-way handshakes: 0 Exceeded max frame size: 0 Current SP[1] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[2] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[3] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP[4] memory units: 1310 Lowest: Current SP memory units: 5240 Current SEQ buffer entries: 0 Highest: Current Data buffer use: 0 Highest: Current SP buffer entries: 0 Highest: Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc: 0 Total SEQ Buffer Allocs: 0 Total SEQ Frees: Total Data Buffer Allocs: 0 Total Data Frees: Alloc Fails .0 Command Reference /stats/slb/layer7/maint Layer 7 SLB Maintenance Statistics Layer 7 maintenance stats: Clients reset by switch on client side: 0 Clients reset by switch on server side: 0 Connection Splicing to support HTTP/1.1 Invalid HTTP methods Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 The total number of HTTP requests that contain invalid methods sent by the client. the switch will send a reset frame to the client to terminate the connection.Ubufs: Max sessions per bucket: 0 Max frames per session: Max bytes buffered (sess): 0 1310 1310 1310 1310 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Clients reset by switch on client side Description The number of reset frames sent to the client by the switch during server connection termination.1 client requests. The number of reset frames sent to the server by the switch during server connection termination due to delayed binding. October 2003 „ 139 .

The number of outstanding sequence buffers used.2 The total of number buffers freed. The total number of switch-generated frames that exceeded the maximum allowed frame size. The total number of dropped frames because of invalid 3-way hand shakes. The total number of sequence buffer allocated. The highest number of sequence buffers ever used. The number of outstanding data buffers used. Switch retries Random early drops Requests exceeded 4500 bytes Invalid 3-way handshakes Exceeded max frame size Current SP memory units Current SEQ buffer entries Highest SEQ buffer entries Current Data buffer use Highest Data buffer use Total Nonzero SEQ Alloc Total SEQ Buffer Allocs Total SEQ Frees Total Data Buffer Allocs Total Data Frees 140 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . The highest number of data buffers ever used. The total number of SYN frames dropped when the buffer is low.2 The total number of sequence buffer allocations. The total number of buffers allocated to store client request.0 Command Reference Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Aged delayed binding sessions Half open connections Description The total number of aged delayed binding sessions caused by failed connection initialization between the switch and the server. The total number of switch retries to connect to the real server. The current available SP memory units. It is incremented when the switch responds to TCP SYN packet and decremented upon receiving TCP SYN ACK packet from the requester. The total numbers of outstanding TCP connections that are half opened. The total number of sequence buffer is freed. The total number of GET requests that exceeded 4500 bytes.Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21. The maximum number of items (sessions) allowed in the session table hash bucket chain. October 2003 „ 141 . The table shows the Current Sessions. The number of times allocation of a session table entry failed when attempting to store a SessionId in the table. the total sessions seen on the switch since last reset and the high water mark of current sessions for the following: Unique SessionIds Many SSL sessions can use the same SessionId. The number of times the URL data buffer allocation failed.Ubufs Max sessions per bucket Description The number of times sequence buffer allocation failed. The number of different TCP connections using SSL service. This number shows the number of unique SSL sessions seen on the switch. /stats/slb/ssl SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats: SessionId allocation fails: 0 Current Total Highest Sessions Sessions Sessions ------------------------. SSL connections Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.---------. Max bytes buffered (sess) The maximum number of bytes to be buffered per session. Max frames per session The maximum number of frames to be buffered per session.-------.0 Command Reference Table 5-29 SLB Layer 7 Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/layer7/maint) Statistics Alloc Fails .-------Unique SessionIds 0 0 0 SSL connections 0 0 0 Persistent Port Sessions 0 0 0 Table 5-30 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics SSL SLB maintenance stats SessionId allocation fails Description Debug stats for SSL SessionId based persistence.Seq buffers Alloc Fails . these should all bind to the same server.

parsing Shows parsing statistics. See page 143 for sample output. dump Shows all FTP SLB/NAT statistics. maint Shows maintenance statistics.Show parsing . October 2003 .Show dump . 142 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. See page 144.Alteon OS 21.Dump Filter Statistics Menu] active FTP NAT filter stats FTP SLB parsing server stats FTP maintenance stats all FTP SLB/NAT stats Table 5-31 FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Menu Options (/stats/slb/ftp) Command Syntax and Usage active Shows active FTP SLB parsing and filter statistics. /stats/slb/ftp/active Active FTP SLB Parsing and Filter Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats(PORT): Total FTP: Total New Active FTP Index: Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-32 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total Active FTP NAT stats (PORT) Description The number of times the switch receives the port command from the client. See page 142 for sample output. See page 143 for sample output.0 Command Reference Table 5-30 SLB Secure Socket Layer Statistics (/stats/slb/ssl) Statistics Persistent Port Sessions Description The number of SessionIds maintained to allow for persistence across different client ports.Show maint . /stats/slb/ftp File Transfer Protocol SLB and Filter Statistics Menu [FTP SLB parsing and active .

Total New FTP SLB parsing Index FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff /stats/slb/ftp/maint FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics FTP mode switch error: 0 Table 5-34 FTP SLB Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/maint) Statistics FTP mode switch error Description The number of times the switch is not able to switch modes from active to passive and vice versa. The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of times the switch creates a new index due to port command from the client.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 143 . The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the Switch needs for packet adjustment. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs FTP SLB parsing. /stats/slb/ftp/parsing Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics Total FTP SLB Parsing Stats(PASV): Total FTP: Total New FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: 0 0 0 Table 5-33 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/parsing) Statistics Total FTP Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.0 Command Reference Table 5-32 Active FTP Slb Parsing and Filter statistics (/stats/slb/ftp/active) Statistics Total FTP Total New Active FTP Index Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff Description The number of times the switch receives both active and passive FTP connections.

The number of times the switch creates a new index in response to the pasv command from the client. October 2003 . Total FTP NAT Filtered The total number of FTP NAT filter sessions that occurred.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/ftp/dump FTP SLB Statistics Dump Total FTP : Total FTP NAT Filtered: Total new active FTP NAT Index: Total new FTP SLB parsing Index: FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff: FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff: FTP mode switch error: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-35 FTP SLB Statistics Dump (/stats/slb/ftp/dump) Statistics Total FTP Description The total number of FTP sessions that occurred.Alteon OS 21. 144 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of times the switch could not switch mode from active to passive and vice versa. Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/ SEQ diff FTP mode switch error The total number of new data sessions created for FTP NAT filter in active mode. The difference in the numbers of ACK and SEQ that the switch needs for FTP SLB parsing. The total number of times the adjustment between ACK and SEQ occurred on the filter.

Redirect ConnectionDenied BufferAllocs AllocFailures /stats/slb/dns DNS SLB Statistics Total Total Total Total Total Total Total number number number number number number number of of of of of of of TCP DNS queries: UDP DNS queries: invalid DNS queries: multiple DNS queries: domain name parse errors: failed real server name matches: DNS parsing internal errors: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The total number of UDP connections for data channels.---------.Alteon OS 21.---------1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -. The total number of buffer allocations used.---------.-------0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-36 RTSP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/rtsp) Statistics ControlConnection UDP Streams Description The total number of TCP connections for RTSP control connection.---------.---------. October 2003 „ 145 . The total number of times the connection got redirected.---------.---------.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/rtsp RTSP SLB Statistics Control UDP Connection Buffer Alloc SP Connection Streams Redirect Denied Allocs Failures -. The number depends upon the type of media player being used. The total number of times the buffer allocation failed. The total number of times the connections got denied due to shortage of resources or the real server being down.---------.---------.---------.---------.

October 2003 . The total number of times the user failed to find a real server which has the same layer 7 strings that match the domain name to be resolved. The total number of DNS queries received through UDP requests. The total number of DNS queries that contain more than one domain name to be resolved. Currently only one domain name resolution per request is supported.0 Command Reference Table 5-37 DNS SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/dns) Statistics Total number of TCP DNS queries Total number of UDP DNS queries Total number of invalid DNS queries Total number of multiple DNS queries Description The total number of DNS queries that received through TCP connections.Alteon OS 21. The total number of DNS queries that have short or invalid domain names to be resolved. The total number of malformed DNS queries received. The total number of out of memory and other unexpected errors the user gets while processing the DNS query. Total number of domain name parse errors Total number of failed real server name matches Total number of DNS parsing internal errors 146 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. TPCP External Notification stats: Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit.0 Command Reference /stats/slb/Wap WAP SLB Statistics WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions: 0 allocation failures: 0 incorrect VIPs: 0 incorrect Vports: 0 no available real server: 0 requests to wrong SP: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------TPCP External Notification stats: add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails.DMA: 0 Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics Description WAP Maintenance stats: current sessions allocation failures The number of session bindings currently in use. October 2003 „ 147 . incorrect VIPs incorrect Vports no available real server requests to wrong SP The number of session add/delete requests sent to the wrong SP. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client.SP dead: 0 req fails. Indicates instances where the switch ran out of available bindings for a port.SP dead: 0 req fails.SP dead: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs: 0 acct wrap reqs: 0 acct start reqs: 0 acct update reqs: 0 acct stop reqs: 0 acct bad reqs: 0 acct reqs(FIP): 0 acct reqs(no FIP): 0 add session reqs: 0 del session reqs: 0 req fails. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured.Alteon OS 21.

Alteon OS 21.SP dead req fails. The number of add/delete requests failed due to DMA write failure.DMA 148 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.SP dead Description The number of WAP session add requests via TPCP. RADIUS Snooping stats: acct reqs acct wrap reqs The number of RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of bad RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Update frames. acct start reqs acct update reqs acct stop reqs acct bad reqs add session reqs del session reqs req fails. The number of add/delete request failures due to dead target SP. October 2003 . The number of RADIUS Accounting Stop frames received. The number of wrapped RADIUS Accounting frames received. The number of RADIUS Accounting Start frames received.0 Command Reference Table 5-38 WAP SLB Statistics (/stats/slb/wap) Statistics add session reqs req fails. The number of WAP session add requests via RADIUS snooping. The number of add-request failures due to dead target SP. The number of WAP session delete requests via RADIUS snooping.

0 Command Reference /stats/slb/maint SLB Maintenance Statistics SLB Maintenance stats: Maximum sessions: Current sessions: 4 second average: 64 second average: Terminated sessions: Allocation failures: TCP fragments: UDP datagrams: Non TCP/IP frames: Incorrect VIPs: Incorrect Vports: No available real server: Backup server activations: Overflow server activations: Filtered (denied) frames: LAND attacks: Total IP fragment sessions: Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards: IP fragment table full: 2097104 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SLB Maintenance statistics are described in the following table.Alteon OS 21. TCP Fragments UDP Datagrams Non TCP/IP Frames Incorrect VIPs Indicates the number of TCP fragments encountered by the switch. Table 5-39 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Maximum sessions Current Sessions Description The maximum number of simultaneous sessions supported. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Layer 4 processing might not handle TCP fragments. Indicates the number of non-IP based frames received by the virtual server. Indicates that the virtual server IP address and MAC are receiving UDP frames when UDP balancing is not turned on. depending on configuration. October 2003 „ 149 . Allocation Failures Indicates instances where the Switch ran out of available sessions for a port. Terminated Sessions Number of sessions removed from the session table because the server assigned to them failed and graceful server failure was not enabled. Indicates the number of times the switch received a Layer 4 request for a virtual server which was not configured. Number of session bindings currently in use (the last 4 and 64 seconds).

October 2003 . This indicates the number of frames that were dropped because they matched an active filter with the deny action set. This counter increases whenever a packet has the same source and destination IP addresses and ports. No Server Available This dropped frames counter indicates that all real servers are either out of service or at their maxcon limit. but it may be an indication of a potential security probing application like SATAN.Alteon OS 21. The number of fragmented packets that are discarded due to lack of resources. /stats/slb/clear Clearing the SLB Statistics The following statistics are reset to zero when the clear command is given and confirmed: Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server stats: Description Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets 150 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. This counter indicates how many times session table is full. This represents the total number of fragment sessions the switch has processed so far.0 Command Reference Table 5-39 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics (/stats/slb/maint) Statistic Incorrect Vports Description This dropped frames counter indicates that the virtual server has received frames for TCP/UDP services that have not been configured. Normally this indicates a mis-configuration on the virtual server or the client. This represents the current number of fragment sessions. This indicates the number of times a real server has reached the maxcon limit and caused an overflow server to be brought online. Backup Server Activations Overflow Server Activations Filtered (Denied) Frames LAND attacks Total IP fragment sessions Current IP fragment sessions IP fragment discards IP fragment table full This indicates the number of times a real server failure has occurred and caused a backup server to be brought online.

Total sessions Virtual server: Octets.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 151 . Total sessions Real server group: Octets. per port Global SLB stats URL SLB and Redirection stats SSL SLB stats FTP SLB parsing and NAT stats Real server stats Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server group stats: Description Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total firings Real server stats: Octets. Total sessions Total firings: Octets Per real server: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Per server group: DNS handoffs HTTP redirects Redir: Total cache server hits Total origin server hits Total none-GETs hits Total ’Cookie: ’ hits Total no-cache hits LB: ID SLB String hits Total Sessions Highest Sessions Total FTP Total FTP NAT Filtered Total new active FTP NAT Index Total new FTP SLB parsing Index FTP Active FTP NAT ACK/SEQ diff FTP SLB parsing ACK/SEQ diff Health check failures Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Virtual server stats Filter stats SLB switch port stats.

see page 153.Clear BWM statistics Table 5-41 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays Switch Port Contract Statistics Menu.BW History stats maint . cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. dump Displays all bandwidth management statistics. See page 158 for sample output.BW Contract stats rcont .Show BWM maint statistics dump . October 2003 . maint Displays bandwidth management maintenance statistics. See page 156 for sample output. 152 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. hist Displays bandwidth management history statistics. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. To view menu options.Switch Port Contract Stats Menu cont .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-40 SLB Statistics Reset (/stats/slb/clear) Statistics Real server group stats Description Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Total sessions Highest sessions Octets Virtual server stats /stats/bwm BWM Statistics Menu [Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu] port .BW Contract rate stats hist . See page 155 for details.Dump all BWM statistics clear . See page 154 for details.

0 Command Reference Table 5-41 Bandwidth Management Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage clear Clears all bandwidth management statistics.BW Contract stats rcont . See for a sample output.--------------. October 2003 „ 153 .Alteon OS 21. /stats/bwm/port <port number>/cont BWM Switch Processor Contract Statistics Menu BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.------.BW Contract rate stats Table 5-42 Management Port Statistics Menu Options (/stats/bwm/sp) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract statistics. rcont <BW Contract number (1-256)> Displays bandwidth management contract rate statistics. /stats/bwm/port <port number> BWM Switch Processor Statistics [Bandwidth Management Port Statistics Menu] cont .---------.-----1 cont1 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 674252832 1798583472 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 772710 0 0 16320 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.---------.

Alteon OS 21.----1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5230 682947936 1822133376 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 773974 0 0 16320 1 cont1 0 40465360 262049256 0 16320 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 16320 20 cont20 5238 684289056 1825753104 16384 16320 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 16320 256 Default 0 774114 0 0 16320 /stats/bwm/cont <contract number> BWM Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /stats/bwm/port <port number>/rcont BWM Switch Processor Rate Contract Statistics BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.---------.------.---------.--------------.-----1 cont1 223868832 568900584 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 224149728 568632456 16384 456960 25 cont25 0 0 0 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 401270 0 0 456960 The following description of statistics applies on a specific SP (switch processor-equivalent to switch port) for all contracts irrespective of whether the contract is enabled or disabled.---------.---------.------. Table 5-43 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics Contract Name Octets Description The contract number. The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.---------.--------------. The contract name. Discards 154 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-43 Bandwidth Management Contract Statistics (/stats/bwm/cont) Statistics BufUsed Description The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted. The contract name. BW Contract statistics Contract Name Rate(Kbps) Octets Discards BufUsed BufMax -------.---------. Rate at which the packets are going out of the switch on a particular contract. October 2003 „ 155 . Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.---------. BufMax /stats/bwm/rcont BWM Contract Rate Statistics Use this command to show the rate statistics of all the enabled contracts.----1 cont1 5222 285408288 735607152 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 285720864 735308784 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 4 517182 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5230 286747296 739228896 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5230 287059872 738930528 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 519400 0 0 456960 1 cont1 5222 288084192 742853160 16384 456960 2 cont2 0 0 0 0 456960 20 cont20 5238 288400992 742550760 16384 456960 26 cont26 0 0 0 0 456960 256 Default 8 521578 0 0 456960 Table 5-44 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Contract Name Rate (in Kbps) Description The contract number. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.---------.------.--------------.

80.80.124 8 filter_number08 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80. October 2003 .124 4 filter_number04 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 3 filter_number03 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.124 7 filter_number07 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.124 1 filter_number01 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.124 9 filter_number09 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.80.80. The number of octets that are being discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limits.124 2 filter_number02 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47. The current amount of buffer space used to store the packets that is waiting to be transmitted.---------. The switch starts dropping the packets of a particular contract after the maximum buffer space allocated for that contract is being occupied.23.---------------. 156 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.124 256 Default 608 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 Switch IP Cont Name Octets You can dump the stats kept in the SMTP history buffer that get dumped periodically when an E-mail is sent.---------47.124 5 filter_number05 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.80.80.Alteon OS 21. This command is used to keep long term history only for the contracts that are enabled and have history command turned on. Discards BufUsed BufMax /stats/bwm/hist BWM History Statistics Discards TimeStamp YyyyMmDd:Hr:Mi/TmZone --------------.124 6 filter_number06 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.23.23.124 10 filter_number10 0 0 20030910:15:11/ -8:00 47.23.---------.23.---.23.23.23.80.80. Maximum buffer space that can be used to store the packets before they can be transmitted.23.0 Command Reference Table 5-44 Bandwidth Management Contract Rate Statistics (/stats/bwm/rcont) Statistics Octets Description The number of octets that are being transmitted through a particular contract since the switch is booted.

October 2003 „ 157 .Alteon OS 21. TimeStamp Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. Table 5-45 Bandwidth Management History Statistics (/stats/bwm/hist) Statistics Contract Octets Discards Description The contract number for which history is enabled. Indicates the time the packets were received or discarded. The number of octets sent out on a particular contract. The sampling is done at one-minute intervals.0 Command Reference Use this command to show the history of all the contracts for which history command is enabled. The number of octets discarded because of seeing more traffic than the bandwidth contract limit permits.

see page 161. October 2003 . to check for leads and load.Show All UDP control blocks in use sfd .Show All Socket FD in use cpu .Alteon OS 21. tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use.Show Packet stats tcb .Show CPU utilization Table 5-46 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics.0 Command Reference /stats/bwm/maint BWM Maintenance Statistics BWM Maint statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for rate limiting contracts Discard pkts 0 Discard octets 0 Out pkts 35932 Out octets 4015993 Transmit failed 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Maint Stats for traffic shaping contracts QFull Discard pkts 0 QFull Discard octets 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Out of buffers pkts 0 Transmit failed 0 TDT set when qfull 0 TDT set between soft and hard 0 TDT set at soft 0 /stats/mp Management Processor Statistics [MP-specific Statistics Menu] pkt . 158 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. To view a sample output and a description of the stats.Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb . To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 159.

To view a sample output and a description of the stats. sfd Displays all Socket File Descriptors that are in use. Total number of packet allocations with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. see page 161. 4. see page 162. Description frees mediums jumbos Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. and 64 seconds. To view a sample output.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 159 . Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released) to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1. To view a sample output.0 Command Reference Table 5-46 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options (/stats/mp) Command Syntax and Usage ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. /stats/mp/pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts: allocs: mediums: jumbos: smalls: alloc fails: TCP counts: allocs: current: alloc fails: 89262 0 0 0 0 4866 46 0 frees: mediums hi-watermark: jumbos hi-watermark: smalls hi-watermark: packet discards: frees: current hi-watermark: alloc discards: 89262 4 0 4 0 4827 146 0 Table 5-47 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics Packet counts: allocs Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. see page 162. Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Total number of times the TCP packet buffers are freed (released) to MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack.Alteon OS 21. The packets are discarded because buffer resources are not available or the buffer threshold is reached and the low priority packets are discarded. Total number of TCP packet allocation failures from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. current alloc fails frees current hi-watermark alloc discards 160 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. packet discards The number of packets that are discarded by the MP. Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.0 Command Reference Table 5-47 Packet Statistics (/stats/mp/pkt) Statistics smalls Description Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP counts: allocs Total number of TCP packet allocations from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The number of TCP packets that are discarded by the MP. smalls hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of TCP packet allocation from MP memory by the TCP/IP protocol stack. The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. Total number of packets freed from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack. October 2003 . The packets are discarded because MP memory resources are not available. alloc fails frees mediums hi-watermark jumbos hi-watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 1536 bytes to 9K bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

0.80.23.27.Alteon OS 21.0.0.27.243 80/23 listen/established Description Memory Destination IP address Destination port Source IP Source port State /stats/mp/ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks: 161: listen 1985: listen 3122: listen Table 5-49 UCB Statistics on MP (/stats/mp/ucb) Field 161/1985/3122 Listen Description UDP port number State Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.0/47.0 0 <=> 0.0.80.0 Command Reference /stats/mp/tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks: 10ad41e8: 0.0.243 80 23 listen established Table 5-48 MP Specified TCP Statistics (/stats/mp/tcb) Statistics 10ad41e8/10ad5790 0.81.0.5 0/1171 0.81.5 1171 <=> 47. October 2003 „ 161 .23.0 10ad5790: 47.0.0/47.0.

133.133.Show CPU utilization 162 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.129. /stats/sp <SP Number> SP Specific Statistics [SP-specific Statistics Menu] maint .108.Show maintenance stats clear .0 0<=>47.153.0. October 2003 . CPU utilization: cpuUtil1Second: cpuUtil4Seconds: cpuUtil64Seconds: 100% 100% 100% Table 5-50 CPU Statistics (stats/mp/cpu) Statistics cpuUtil1Second cpuUtil4Seconds cpuUtil64Seconds Description The percentage of CPU utilization over a one second interval.150 5341<=>47.133.161 80 listen TCP server fdi=1 fd=16 pfdi=-1 10b9564c: 0.108. The percentage of CPU utilization over a four second interval.0.Alteon OS 21.108.161 23 listen TCP server fdi=2 fd=17 pfdi=1 10c27c78: 47.0 0<=>47.161 23 accept TCP server /stats/mp/cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics.Clear maintenance stats cpu .0.0 Command Reference /stats/mp/sfd MP-Specific SFD Statistics All Socket FD allocated: max_fdi=2 fdi=0 fd=15 pfdi=-1 10c27fd8: 0.0. The percentage of CPU utilization over a 64 second interval.

See page 163 for a sample output.Alteon OS 21. Displays what percentage of the CPU has been utilized. Deletes all the maintenance statistics.0 Command Reference Table 5-51 SP Specific Statistics (/stats/sp) Statistics maint clear cpu Description Indicates the total number of all the letter statistics received or sent from this SP. October 2003 „ 163 . /stats/sp <SP number>/maint SP-Specific Maintenance Statistics Maintenance statistics for SP 1: Receive Letter success from MP: 318730 Receive Letter success from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter success from SP 4: 0 Receive Letter errors from MP: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 2: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 3: 0 Receive Letter errors from SP 4: 0 Send Letter success to MP: 224822 Send Letter success to SP 2: 0 Send Letter success to SP 3: 0 Send Letter success to SP 4: 0 Send Letter failures to MP: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 2: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 3: 0 Send Letter failures to SP 4: 0 learnErrNoddw: 0 resolveErrNoddw: ageMPNoddw: 0 deleteMiss: pfdbFreeEmpty: 0 arpDiscards: 0 icmpDiscards: tcpDiscards: 0 udpDiscards: 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

udpblast Displays the UDP Blast statistics menu. 164 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. see page 168.0 Command Reference /stats/security Security Statistics [Security Statistics Menu] dos . see page 166. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics. To view a sample output and a description of the statistics.Show pattern match group statistics ratelim . see page 167. ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting statistics menu. dump Displays all security statistics.DoS Attack Statistics Menu ipacl . To view a sample output and a description of the stats.IP Address ACL Statistics Menu udpblast .Alteon OS 21.UDP Blast Statistics Menu pgroup . October 2003 .Dump all security statistics Command Syntax and Usage dos Displays the DOS Attack statistics menu.Show rate limiting statistics dump . pgroup Displays the Pattern Match Group statistics menu. ipacl Displays the IP Address Access Control List statistics menu. To view a sample output and a description of the stats. see page 166. see page 165.

help Displays a description of each type of DOS attack by name and how it works. on the selected port only. LandAttack. see “Types of DOS Attacks” on page 165. Xmascan. Blat For a description of these different types of DOS attacks.0 Command Reference /stats/security/dos DOS Attack Statistics Menu [DoS Attack Statistics Menu] port . PortZero. Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack. clear Deletes all DOS attack statistics. Fraggle. LandAttack. ScanSynFin.Port DoS attack statistics dump . You can use the help command to obtain a brief explanation of each type of DOS attack detected by the switch.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. PortZero. Nullscan.DoS attack statistics description Table 5-52 DOS Attacks Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/dos) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the number of times the packets were dropped for each of the following types of DOS attacks. Fraggle. Xmascan. Nullscan.Clear all DoS attack statistics help . dump Displays the number of times the packets were dropped on the switch. October 2003 „ 165 . Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for a detailed description of DOS attacks. for each of the following types of DOS attacks: Smurf.Dump all DoS attack statistics clear . Types of DOS Attacks Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. and ScanSynFin.

x. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros.0 Command Reference >> /stats/security/dos help Smurf: The ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP(x. clear Deletes all the statistics of accumulated blocked packets.Alteon OS 21.UDP Blast Stats clear .Clear all access control Stats Table 5-53 IPACL Security Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the accumulated blocked packets for each IP address and mask pair. Xmascan: TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN.x. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal destination IP. /stats/security/udpblast UDP Blast Statistics [UDP Blast Statistics Menu] dump . PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets with either source/destination port is zero. /stats/security/ipacl IP Access Control List Statistics The following IP Access Control List statistics can be viewed with this command: [IP ACL Statistics Menu] dump .IP address access control Stats clear .255).x. October 2003 . Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT.x. Fraggle: The UDP packet to a broadcast destination IP(x.Clear all UDP Blast Stats 166 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. URG and PSH bits are set. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet.255).

Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. and the current packet rate per second. The number of blocked packets. See page 167 for a sample output and a description of the statistics. Displays the current rate of packet to the UDP port.Alteon OS 21. clear Deletes all the accumulated blocked packets.0 Command Reference Table 5-54 UDP Blast Statistics Menu Options (/stats/security/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays all the accumulated blocked packets for each port. Pattern groups are configured in the “Pattern Matching Menu” on page 278. October 2003 „ 167 . /stats/security/pgroup UDP Pattern Match Statistics Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name 1 Hits 0 This menu displays how many times each configured pattern group has been matched and a subsequent filtering action performed. /stats/security/udpblast/dump UDP Blast Dump Statistics UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets ------------------------Current Packet Rate/Second -------------------------- Table 5-55 UDP Blast Dump Statistics Parameters (/stats/security/udpblast/dump) Field UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/ Second Description UDP ports that experienced UDP blast attacks.

The total number of per-client state entries for TCP/UDP/ICMP rate limiting. 168 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /stats/security/ratelim Rate Limiting Statistics Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-56 Rate Limiting Statistics (/stats/security/ratelim) Field Total holds down triggered Current per-client state entries Description The total number of packets dropped after the hold-down period expired.

0 Command Reference /stats/security/dump Dump Statistics for Security IP ACL stats: Address Blocked Packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------UDP blast protection stats: UDP Port Blocked Packets Current Packet Rate/Second ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pattern Match Group stats: ID Name Hits 1 0 100 0 101 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Rate limiting stats: TCP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: UDP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: ICMP: Total hold downs triggered: Current per-client state entries: 0 0 0 0 0 0 Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 169 .

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received. ASN.208). The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message. The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity (the switch).1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One. The total number of SNMP Messages.0 Command Reference /stats/snmp SNMP Statistics SNMP statistics: snmpInPkts: snmpInBadC’tyNames: snmpInASNParseErrs: snmpOutPkts: snmpInTooBigs: snmpInBadValues: snmpInGenErrs: snmpInTotalSetVars: snmpInGetNexts: snmpInGetResponses: snmpOutTooBigs: snmpOutBadValues: snmpOutGenErrs: snmpOutGetNexts: snmpOutGetResponses: 9592 0 0 9592 0 0 0 0 5676 0 0 0 0 0 9592 snmpInBadVersions: snmpInBadC’tyUses: snmpEnableAuthTraps: snmpInBadTypes: snmpInNoSuchNames: snmpInReadOnlys: snmpInTotalReqVars: snmpInGetRequests: snmpInSetRequests: snmpInTraps: snmpOutNoSuchNames: snmpOutReadOnlys: snmpOutGetRequests: snmpOutSetRequests: snmpOutTraps: 0 0 0 0 0 0 15268 3916 0 0 0 0 81814 0 0 Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInPkts Description The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service.1 is a flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of data types. and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER (Basic Encoding Rules. The total number of ASN. Note: OSI’s method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN. defined in X. defined in X. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version. from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences.1 type as a string of eight-bit octets.209). snmpInBadVersions snmpInBadC’tyNames snmpInBadC’tyUses snmpInASNParseErrs 170 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.

The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing. The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport service. The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is too big. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is badValue. this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP. The total number of MIB objects. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is ‘read-Only’. The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP GetRequest and Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is noSuchName. As such. It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU. which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP SetRequest Protocol Data Units (PDUs).0 Command Reference Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpEnableAuth Traps snmpOutPkts Description An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this entity (the switch). The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). October 2003 „ 171 . snmpInBadTypes snmpInTooBigs snmpInNoSuchNames snmpInBadValues snmpInReadOnlys snmpInGenErrs snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInTotalSetVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpInSetRequests Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is genErr. The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which contains the value ‘read-Only’ in the error-status field.

which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. Not in use. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is too big. The total number of SNMP Set-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Get-Request Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is genErr. which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. October 2003 . The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. snmpInTraps snmpOutTooBigs snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutBadValues snmpOutReadOnlys snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetRequests snmpOutGetNexts snmpOutSetRequests snmpOutGet Responses snmpOutTraps 172 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus field is badValue. The total number of SNMP Get-Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs). The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity. which were generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the errorstatus is noSuchName. The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units (PDUs). which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 5-57 SNMP Statistics (/stats/snmp) Statistics snmpInGetResponses Description The total number of SNMP Get-Response Protocol Data Units (PDUs).

October 2003 „ 173 . The number of packets dropped because size exceeded that of the transmit queue. Not applicable. The number of incoming packets that were dropped due to lack of receive buffers. The number of bad packets received. The number of received packets that were dropped because their size exceeded that of the receive queue.Alteon OS 21. RX packets RX errors RX dropped RX overruns RX frame errors RX multicast TX bytes TX packets TX errors TX dropped TX overruns TX carrier errors Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E. The number of packets dropped due to transmission problems. The total number of incoming packets successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of outgoing bytes successfully transferred by the interface.0 Command Reference /stats/mgmt Management Port Statistics Management port interface RX bytes: RX packets: RX errors: RX dropped: RX overruns: RX frame errors: RX multicast: statistics: 0 TX bytes: 0 TX packets: 0 TX errors: 0 TX dropped: 0 TX overruns: 0 TX carrier errors: 0 TX collisions: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 5-58 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics RX bytes Description The total number of incoming bytes successfully transferred by the interface. The total number of outgoing packets successfully transferred by the interface. The number of packets dropped due to lack of transmit buffers. The number of multicast packets received. The number of incoming packets dropped due to IP framing errors.

Collisions occur when two or more stations are transmitting signals at the same time. October 2003 . If you want to capture dump data to a file. 174 „ Chapter 5: The Statistics Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands. /stats/dump Dump Statistics Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu (40K or more.0 Command Reference Table 5-58 Management Port Statistics (/stats/mgmt) Statistics TX collisions Description The number of collisions due to congestion on the medium. This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance. depending on your configuration).

Layer 3 Menu slb . display more or different information than in the previous version.CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making.Backup current configuration to tftp server gtcfg . Important difference are called out in the text. 175 315393-E. the menu options under the Server Load Balancing Menu (/cfg/slb) are in Chapter 7.Port Mirroring Menu bwm .Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg . To make finding information easier. and saving switch configuration changes. viewing. port <port number> Displays the Port Configuration Menu.System-wide Parameter Menu port .Layer 2 Menu l3 . /cfg Configuration Menu [Configuration Menu] sys .Restore current configuration from tftp server Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Configuration Menu. see page 179. although not new.Server Load Balancing (Layer 4-7) Menu security . see page 197. To view menu options.Step by step configuration set up dump .Security Menu setup .Port Menu pmirr . To view menu options. October 2003 .Bandwidth Management Menu l2 . Many of the commands.

see page 226. any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved. see page 217. ptcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Backs up current configuration to TFTP server. security Displays security menu. Also. For details. slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu. To view menu options. bwm Displays the Bandwidth Management Configuration Menu. Viewing.0 Command Reference Table 6-1 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg) Command Syntax and Usage pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu. For details. gtcfg <host name or IP address of TFTP server> <filename on host> Restores current configuration from TFTP server. To view menu options. To view menu options. Applying. see page 282. see page 281. For details. see page 211. To view menu options. To view menu options. For details. setup Step-by-step configuration set-up of the switch. October 2003 . see page 212. dump Dumps current configuration to a script file. “The SLB Configuration Menu”. the changes you make do not take effect immediately. All changes are considered “pending” until you explicitly apply them. and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters. see page 276. l2 Displays Layer 2 Configuration Menu. see page 282. To view menu options. l3 Displays Layer 3 Configuration Menu.Alteon OS 21. see page 281. see Chapter 7. While configuration changes are in the pending state. you can do the following: „ „ „ View the pending changes Apply the pending changes Save the changes to flash memory 176 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

you can save them to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch. Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes. you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface. Therefore. October 2003 „ 177 . Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active. # apply NOTE – The apply command is a global command. Therefore.Alteon OS 21. enter the following command at any CLI prompt: # save Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. you must apply them. To save the new configuration. and then reset the switch (see “Resetting the Switch” on page 360). NOTE – If you do not save the changes. To turn STP on or off. enter apply at any prompt in the CLI. you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI. NOTE – All configuration changes take effect immediately when applied. you must apply the changes.0 Command Reference Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt. NOTE – The diff command is a global command. they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted. save them (see below). except for starting Spanning Tree Protocol. To apply configuration changes.

For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset. the changes are saved to the active configuration block.0 Command Reference When you save configuration changes.Alteon OS 21. see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 359. It is a global command that can be executed from any menu. 178 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block. October 2003 . Your options include: „ „ „ The active configuration block The backup configuration block Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command. If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block. enter the following instead: # save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch.

To view menu options. ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Menu. see page 185. see page 188. To view menu options. October 2003 „ 179 . mmgmt Displays Management Port Menu. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. see page 187.0 Command Reference /cfg/sys System Configuration [System Menu] syslog mmgmt sshd radius ntp sonmp ssnmp health access date time idle notice bannr smtp hprompt bootp cur Syslog Menu Management Port Menu SSH Server Menu RADIUS Authentication Menu NTP Server Menu SONMP Menu System SNMP Menu System Health Check Menu System Access Menu Set system date Set system time Set timeout for idle CLI sessions Set login notice Set login banner Set SMTP host Enable/disable display hostname (sysName) in CLI prompt Enable/disable use of BOOTP Display current system-wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and administrator privilege mode passwords. and management access list. see page 181. Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu. see page 182. To view menu options. radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu. Web-based management settings. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu. To view menu options.

which is used for sending bandwidth management history information. the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of the output from the /info/sys command. health Displays system health check menu. affects both console and Telnet> Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions. notice <max 1024 char multi-line login notice> <’-’ to end> Displays login notice immediately before the “Enter password:” prompt. see page 192. October 2003 . date Prompts the user for the system date. smtp <SMTP host name or IP address> Sets the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. bannr <string. When a user or administrator logs into the switch. see page 193. The default is 5 minutes. maximum 80 characters> Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters.Alteon OS 21. from 1 to 60 minutes. 180 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. hprompt disable|enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name) in the Command Line Interface (CLI). If you enable BOOTP. To view menu options. To view menu options. access Displays System Access Menu. the switch will query its BOOTP server for all of the switch IP parameters. cur Displays the current system parameters. time Configures the system time using a 24-hour clock format. bootp disable|enable Enables or disables the use of BOOTP.0 Command Reference Table 6-2 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys) Command Syntax and Usage sonmp Displays the SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) menu. To view menu options. ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines. idle <idle timeout in minutes. see page 190. To view menu options. see page 189. This command is disabled by default.

facil <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed. The default is 7. 192. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. sever2 <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed. facil2 <syslog host local facility (0-7)> This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed. The default is 0. You can choose to enable/ disable specific features (such as vlans.223)> Sets the IP address of the second syslog host.4. which means. 192. The default is 7. host2 <new syslog host IP address (such as. which means log all the seven severity levels. When necessary. see page 182. It is enabled by default. or enable/disable syslog on all available features. log all the seven severity levels.0 Command Reference /cfg/sys/syslog System Host Log Configuration [Syslog Menu] host host2 sever sever2 facil facil2 console log cur Set IP address of first syslog host Set IP address of second syslog host Set the severity of first syslog host Set the severity of second syslog host Set facility of first syslog host Set facility of second syslog host Enable/disable console output of syslog messages Enable/disable syslogging of features Display current syslog settings Table 6-3 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/syslog) Command Syntax and Usage host <new syslog host IP address (such as. filter).17. see page 182.4. For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity.17. log <feature|all> <enable|disable> Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. October 2003 „ 181 . For a detailed description of the seven levels of severity. console disable|enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. gslb. cur Displays the current syslog settings. sever <syslog host local severity (0–7)> This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed. disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages.Alteon OS 21. The default is 0.223)> Sets the IP address of the first syslog host.

This means the condition of the system is critical. the network ports have to perform all switch management (other than the switch management using the console). This port manages the switch using either telnet CLI. broadcast address. or in some cases. You can change the defaults by configuring these features to permanently use the management port. This means that the system is giving out debug-level messages. the factory default settings for some of the management features remain with the network ports. or HTTP. 5: Notice.0 Command Reference Seven Levels of Severity Following is the description of the seven levels of severity: 0: Emergency. 1: Alert. This means that corrective action must be taken immediately. subnet mask. by using the operational commands to set these options on a one-time basis. 2: Critical. While the switch can be managed from any network port. /cfg/sys/mmgmt Management Port Configuration Menu The Management port is a Fast Ethernet port that is used exclusively to manage the switch. This means that the system is giving a warning. This port is isolated from and does not participate in the networking protocols that run on the network ports. If this port is disabled. the Management port saves consuming a port that could otherwise be used for processing data and traffic. 3: Error. and default gateway. If this port is enabled. October 2003 . The Management port must be configured with a static IP address.Alteon OS 21. 182 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. 6: Informational. SNMP. This means that the condition of the system is normal but with significant conditions that need attention. Debug. 4: Warning. This means that the system is working but giving out information about certain unfavorable conditions. and must be enabled before it can be used. 7. This means that the system has errors that should be corrected. This means that the system is unusable.

1)> Sets the IP address for the default gateway. dns default port mgmt|data Sets DNS over management or data port.Enable management port dis . intr <interval (0 .Management Port Phy Menu addr .Set subnet mask gw .255. ntp default port mgmt|data Sets NTP over management or data ports.Set default port for TFTP ena . To view the menu options.Set IP address mask . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. [Management Port Menu] port .4.Set interval between gateway ping attempts retry .Set default port for RADIUS smtp . The default is data port. 255. addr <IP address (such as.4. Default is data port.Set default port for SMTP snmp .Set default gateway address intr .0)> Sets the subnet mask.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN dns .Set default port for SYSLOG sonmp .0 Command Reference NOTE – This port does not support BOOTP.Display current configuration Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the management port link menu.60 seconds)> Sets the interval between gateway ping attempts. see page 185.17.101)> Sets the IP address.Alteon OS 21.Set default port for NTP radius . October 2003 „ 183 . 192.Set default port for DNS ntp . 192. mask <subnet mask (such as. retry <number of attempts (1-120> Sets the number of failed ping attempts before a gateway is declared DOWN.Set default port for SNMP traps syslog .Set default IP for SONMP hello packets tftp .Disable management port cur .17. gw <gateway address (such as.255.

0 Command Reference Table 6-4 Management Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mmgmt) Command Syntax and Usage radius default port mgmt|data Sets RADIUS over management or data ports.Alteon OS 21. ena Enables the Management port. October 2003 . then the IP address of the data port interface specified by srcif (/cfg/sys/sonmp/srcif) command is used in the hello packets. Default is data port. Default is data port. Default is data port. When this option is set to mgmt then the Management Port IP address is used in the SONMP hello packets transmitted by the switch. Default is data port. dis Disables the Management port. But if it is set to data. snmp default port mgmt|data Sets SNMP trap host over management or data ports. cur Displays the current configuration. Default is data port. sonmp default port mgmt|data Sets default IP address for SONMP hello packets. 184 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. tftp default port mgmt|data Sets TFTP over management or data port. syslog default port mgmt|data Sets syslog host access over management or data ports. smtp default port mgmt|data Sets SMTP over management or data ports.

rsh. and scp . Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate. SSH is actually a suite of three utilities . SSH commands are encrypted and secure in several ways. and passwords are protected by being encrypted.Display current link configuration Table 6-5 Management Port Link Menu Options (/cfg/sys/mgmt/port) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the speed of the link with the Management port. October 2003 „ 185 . cur Displays the current link configuration. and rcp. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set link speed mode . auto on|off Sets auto negotiation for the port. /cfg/sys/sshd SSH Server Configuration Menu Secure Shell (SSH). Default is any. SSH uses RSA public key cryptography for both connection and authentication. is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol for securely getting access to a remote computer. By default this command is turned on.Set autonegotiation cur .Alteon OS 21. Default is any. It is widely used by network administrators to control Web and other kinds of servers remotely. ssh.0 Command Reference /cfg/sys/mmgmt/port Management Port Link Menu [Management Port Link Menu] speed .slogin. sometimes known as Secure Socket Shell.that are secure versions of the earlier UNIX utilities. rlogin.Set full or half duplex mode auto . mode full|half|any Sets half or full duplex mode.

SSH scripts can be viewed by using the /cfg/dump command (see page 281).Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current SSH server configuration. sshport <TCP port number> Sets the SSH server port number. dis Disables SCP. ena Enables SCP. Table 6-6 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sshd) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <interval (0-24)> Sets the interval for generating the RSA server key. October 2003 . When you enter this command. RSA host key generation starts immediately. scpadm Sets the Secure Copy (SCP)-only admin password. on Enables the SSH server. skeygen Generates the RSA server key. hkeygen Generates the RSA host key. When you enter this command.0 Command Reference [SSHD Menu] intrval scpadm hkeygen skeygen sshport ena dis on off cur - Set Interval for generating the RSA server key Set SCP-only admin password Generate the RSA host key Generate the RSA server key Set SSH server port number Enable the SCP apply and save Disable the SCP apply and save Turn SSH server ON Turn SSH server OFF Display current SSH server configuration For the Alteon Application Switch. 186 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client. RSA server key generation starts immediately.

Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv .0 Command Reference NOTE – The top four commands are only accessible at the serial port /cfg/sys/radius RADIUS Server Configuration [RADIUS Server Menu] prisrv .Set RADIUS secret port .Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur . between 1500 . The default is 3 seconds. on Enables the RADIUS server. telnet disable|enable Enables or disables the RADIUS back door for telnet.Set secondary RADIUS server address secret .Set RADIUS port retries . timeout <RADIUS server timeout seconds (1-10)> Sets the amount of time. before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed.3000.Turn RADIUS authentication ON off . port <RADIUS port to configure. in seconds.Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6-7 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage prisrv <IP address> Sets the primary RADIUS server address. Telnet also applies to SSH/SCP connections.Enable or disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on . October 2003 „ 187 .Set RADIUS server retries timeout . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. secret <1-32 character secret> This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server(s). secsrv <IP address> Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.Alteon OS 21. retries <RADIUS server retries (1-3)> Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server. default 1645> Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured. The default is 3 requests.Set RADIUS server timeout telnet . The default is 1645.

Turn NTP service OFF cur . By default. When enabled. cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters. dlight disable|enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock. tzone <offset from GMT. of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). to re synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. in minutes (1-2880).0 Command Reference Table 6-7 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/radius) Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the RADIUS server. 188 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. in HH:MM> Prompts for the NTP time zone offset. Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp) Command Syntax and Usage server <NTP Server IP address> Prompts for the IP addresses of the NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock.Display current NTP configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. that is.Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight .Set NTP server resync interval tzone . the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock. intrval <resync interval in minutes> Specifies the interval. By default. in hours and minutes. how often. /cfg/sys/ntp NTP Server Configuration [NTP Server Menu] server .Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time on . October 2003 .Turn NTP service ON off .Set NTP server address intrval .

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-8 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ntp)
Command Syntax and Usage on Enables the NTP synchronization service. off Disables the NTP synchronization service. cur Displays the current NTP service settings.

/cfg/sys/sonmp
SynOptics Network Management Protocol Configuration
[SONMP Menu] srcif on off cur Set source interface to be used in hello packets Turn Ethernet Autotopology ON Turn Ethernet Autotopology OFF Display current SONMP configuration

SynOptics Network Management Protocol (SONMP) is a proprietary network management protocol that is used by Nortel Networks Optivitiy Switch Manager (OSM) to discover Alteon Application Switches on the network. The following commands add support for the Ethernet Autotopology alogrithm and the Bay Topology MIB. The topology algorithm is executed by each Alteon switch on which SONMP is enabled. Table 6-9 System Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/sonmp)
Command Syntax and Usage srcif <interface number (1-256)> This command specifies the IP address to be used in the hello packets. If the interface specified by this command is not up, then the first interface which is up and running is used in the hello packets. on This command enables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology on. off This command disables the SONMP protocol, and turns Ethernet Autotopology off. cur This command displays the current SONMP configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

189

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/ssnmp
System SNMP Configuration
[System SNMP Menu] name - Set SNMP "sysName" locn - Set SNMP "sysLocation" cont - Set SNMP "sysContact" rcomm - Set SNMP read community string wcomm - Set SNMP write community string trap1 - Set first SNMP trap host address trap2 - Set second SNMP trap host address t1comm - Set community string for first trap host t2comm - Set community string for second trap host timeout - Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth - Enable/disable SNMP "sysAuthenTrap" linkt - Enable/disable SNMP link up/down trap cur - Display current system SNMP configuration

The Alteon OS software supports SNMP-based network management. If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs: „ „ „ MIB II (RFC 1213) Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643) Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)

SNMP parameters that can be modified include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap hosts Trap community strings

190

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage name <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64 characters. locn <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum of 64 characters. cont <new string (maximum 64 characters)> Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters. rcomm <new SNMP read community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default read community string is public. wcomm <new SNMP write community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32 characters. The default write community string is private. trap1 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Configures the IP address of the first SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation. The SNMP trap host is the device that receives SNMP trap messages from the switch. trap2 <new SNMP trap host IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Configures the IP address of the second SNMP trap host using dotted decimal notation. t1comm <new trap host community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the community string for the first trap host. The default community string for the first trap host is public. t2comm <new trap host community string (maximum 32 characters)> Configures the community string for the second trap host. The default community string for the second trap host is public. timeout <SNMP state machine timeout minutes, 1-30> Defines the timeout period for SNMP state machine. When you use diff and apply, memory is allocated to store the output of the command. The timeout period determines when the resources/memory allocated for the output will be freed. auth disable|enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility. The default setting is disabled.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

191

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-10 SNMP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/ssnmp)
Command Syntax and Usage linkt <port> <disable|enable> Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps. The default setting is enabled. cur Displays the current STP port parameters.

/cfg/sys/health
System Health Check Configuration Menu
[System TCP Health Menu] add - Add TCP services to listen for health check rem - Remove TCP services from listening on - Turn system TCP health services ON off - Turn system TCP health services OFF cur - Display current TCP health services configuration

Table 6-11 System Health Check Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/health)
Command Syntax and Usage add <TCP port (2-65534)> Adds TCP services to listen to the health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. rem <TCP port (2-65534)> Removes TCP services that were added for listening to health checks. Specify a TCP service port number, such as 80 for HTTP. on Turns on the TCP health check services. off Turns off the TCP health check services. cur Displays the current TCP health check services configuration.

192

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/sys/access
System Access Control Configuration
[System Access Menu] mgmt - Management Network Definition Menu user - User Access Control Menu (passwords) http - Enable/disable HTTP (Web) access wport - Set HTTP (Web) server port number snmp - Set SNMP access control tnet - Enable/disable Telnet access tnport - Set Telnet server port number rlimit - Set max rate of ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets to MP cur - Display current system access configuration

Table 6-12 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu. To view menu options, see page 194. user Displays the User Access Control Menu. To view menu options, see page 195. http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the browser-based interface. It is disabled by default. wport <TCP port number (1-65535)> Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content. The default is HTTP port 80. If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used, set this to a different port (such as 8080). snmp disable|read-only|read-write Sets the snmp user access level to either disabled, read-only, or read-write. tnet Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch. This command is disabled by default. You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through the console port. tnport <TCP port number> Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non-standard port.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

193

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-12 System Access Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access)
Command Syntax and Usage rlimit <arp|icmp|tcp|udp> <max rate, 0-65535> Sets switch-wide rate limiting on traffic entering the switch over ARP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP protocols. Specify which protocol you wish to limit. Then specify the maximum rate, which the maximum number of packets per second that is allowed to enter the switch. cur Displays the current configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/mgmt
Management Networks Menu
This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for management purposes. NOTE – The add and rem commands below replace the /cfg/sys/mnet and /cfg/ sys/mmask commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS.

[Management Networks Menu] add - Add mgmt network definition rem - Remove mgmt network definition cur - Display current mgmt network definitions

Table 6-13 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage add <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the Alteon OS browser-based interface. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address. Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted-decimal notation.

NOTE – If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces, it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a “Network Down” state on the network.

194

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-13 Management Network Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/mgmt)
Command Syntax and Usage rem <mgmt network address> <mgmt network mask> Removes a defined network, which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address. cur Displays the current configuration.

/cfg/sys/access/user
User Access Control Menu
[User Access Control Menu] usrpw - Set user password (user) sopw - Set SLB operator password (slboper) l4opw - Set L4 operator password (l4oper) opw - Set operator password (oper) sapw - Set Slb administrator password (slbadmin) l4apw - Set L4 administrator password (l4admin) admpw - Set administrator password (admin) cur - Display current user statistics

NOTE – Passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters. Table 6-14 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage usrpw Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch management. He or she can view switch status information and statistics, but cannot make any configuration changes. sopw Sets the SLB operator (slboper)password. The SLB operator manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can enable/disable servers using the Server Load Balancing configuration menus. Access includes “user” functions. l4opw Sets the Layer 4 operator (l4oper)password. The Layer 4 operator manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics. Access includes “slboper” functions.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

195

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-14 User Access Control Menu Options (/cfg/sys/access/user)
Command Syntax and Usage opw Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters. The operator manages all functions of the switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch. Access includes “l4oper” functions. sapw Sets the SLB administrator (slbadmin) password. Administrator who configures and manages Web servers and other Internet services and their loads. He or she can view all switch information and statistics, but can configure changes only on the Server Load Balancing menus. Note that the Filter Menu options are not accessible to the SLB administrator. Access includes “l4oper” functions. l4apw Sets the Layer 4 administrator (l4admin) password. The Layer 4 administrator configures and manages traffic on the lines leading to the shared Internet services. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can configure parameters on the Server Load Balancing menus, with the exception of not being able to configure filters. Access includes “slbadmin” functions. admpw Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has complete access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the Alteon Application Switch, including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords. Access includes “oper” and “l4admin” functions. cur Displays the current user status.

196

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

The ports are auto-sensing. You may order the SFP modules from Nortel Networks. auto-negotiating. Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series The following table displays the number of Fast Ethernet ports and SFP GBIC ports with the numbering of the ports on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series: Table 6-15 Port Configuration and Numbering on Alteon Application Switch 2000 Series Model Alteon 2208 (1U) Alteon 2216 (1U) Alteon 2224 (1U) Alteon 2424 (1U) 10/100 Mbps Fast Ethernet 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Port Numbers Numbers 1–8 1–16 1–24 1–24 9–10 17–18 25–26 25–28 Fast Ethernet Ports The RJ-45 jack is used for connecting 10/100 Mbps Ethernet segments to the port. The SFP modules are not shipped with the product. and support half or full-duplex operation. SFP GBIC Ports The following figure displays the LC jack connector and the SFP that fits into the port socket.0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> Port Configuration The Port Menu enables you to configure settings for individual switch ports.Alteon OS 21. please refer to the Hardware Installation Guide for Alteon Application Switch. Port configuration is different on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series and 3000 series. The LC jack is used for connecting Gigabit Ethernet fiber optic segments. The commands on Alteon Application Switch 2000 series and their description are as follows: Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 197 . For more information on connectors. This command is enabled by default.

rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. It is disabled by default. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. It is disabled by default. see page 208. ena Enables the port. gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. see page 208. To view menu options. this option displays the Fast Ethernet Physical Link Menu. The default is set to none. It is disabled by default. The default number is 1.0 Command Reference [Port 1 Menu] fast gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Fast Phy Menu Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-16 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage fast If a port is configured to support Fast Ethernet. 198 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options. this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. pvid <VLAN number. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens.Alteon OS 21. 1-4090> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. October 2003 .

/cfg/port <port number> fast|gig Port Link Configuration [Fast Link Menu] speed .Set full or half duplex mode fctl . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. NOTE – Since the speed and mode parameters cannot be set for Gigabit Ethernet ports. and negotiation mode for the port link. The choices include: „ „ „ Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected.Set flow control auto . Table 6-17 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|any Sets the link speed. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. Using these configuration menus. Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the fast and gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch.) cur Displays the current port parameters.Alteon OS 21. you can set port parameters such as speed.Set link speed mode . these options do not appear on the Gigabit Link Menu.0 Command Reference Table 6-16 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the port. October 2003 „ 199 .Display current fast link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. flow control. Not all options are valid on all ports.Set auto negotiation cur .

The choices include: „ „ „ Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex This menu appears only if a Fast Ethernet port is selected. October 2003 .The choices include: „ „ „ „ Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current port parameters. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu. fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. 200 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-17 Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port/fast|gig) Command Syntax and Usage mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.

„ NOTE – For more information on connectors. When the 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC port is selected as the preferred link. These ports are designed to operate at 1000 Mbps and full duplex mode only. 7. 7. it can be configured at any speed. and 6). The ports are autonegotiating and support half or full duplex operation. full-duplex with autonegotiation turned on. Their description is as follows: „ „ Four 1000BaseT ports (1. and 8) with RJ-45 connectors. See “Dual-Mode Ports” on page 207 for more details. You can set either interface as the preferred or backup link. Four dual-mode ports (3. 5. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. Four Small Form Pluggable (SFP) GBIC Fiber Optic ports (9–12). 4.0 Command Reference Alteon Application Switch 3000 Series The following table displays the port configuration and numbering on Alteon Application Switch 3408: Table 6-18 Port configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 Model 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Port Numbers 1. it is fixed at 1000 Mbps. 2. autonegotiation must be turned on. October 2003 „ 201 . if 1000 Mbps is selected. 2. 8 Dual-Mode Port Numbers 3–6 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Port Numbers 9–12 Alteon 3408 (1U) Port Configuration on Alteon Application Switch 3408 The Alteon Application Switch 3408 contains 12 ports. However. These ports have two interfaces each: 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC and 10/100/1000Base-T Copper. When the 10/100/1000Base-T copper port is selected as the preferred link. refer to the Alteon Application Switch Hardware Installation Guide Part Number 315393-E.

pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. 7. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. see page 203. or 8). It is disabled by default. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. 2. It is disabled by default. 2. The default is set to None. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port.Alteon OS 21. 7. October 2003 . It is disabled by default. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. ena Enables the port. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port.) 202 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. this option displays the Copper Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. To view menu options. you see the menu below: [Port 1 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-19 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. dis Disables the port. or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes.0 Command Reference Single-Mode ports 10/100/1000Base-T Copper Ports When you select a single-mode copper port (1. The default number is 1.

/cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. 2. This command is available only in the Fast Link Menu.0 Command Reference Table 6-19 Single-Mode Copper Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1. Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. 2.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. 7.Set duplex mode fctl . October 2003 Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. and negotiation mode for the port link.Set auto negotiate cur . Table 6-20 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.Set link speed mode . Not all options are valid on all ports.The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu „ 203 .Set flow control auto . or 8>) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current port parameters. you can set port parameters such as speed. 7. The choices include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. flow control. Using these configuration menus. The choices include: Any for auto negotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.

7. The default is set to None. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. October 2003 . 204 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. 1000 Mbps SFP GBIC Fiber Optic Ports When you select a single-mode fiber optic port (9–12). name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. this option displays the Optical Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link Menu. It is disabled by default. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged.0 Command Reference Table 6-20 Single-Mode Copper Port Gigabit Ethernet Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <1.Alteon OS 21. see page 206. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters. The default number is 1. 2. rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port. you see a slightly different menu as below: [Port 9 Menu] gig pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Optical Gig Phy Menu Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-21 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet. or 8>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port. To view menu options.

It is disabled by default.) cur Displays the current port parameters. It is disabled by default. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames. October 2003 „ 205 .Alteon OS 21. ena Enables the port. dis Disables the port.0 Command Reference Table 6-21 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <9–12>) Command Syntax and Usage tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the gig port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. The choices include: „ „ „ „ Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables autonegotiation for the port.Display current optical gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. and negotiation mode for the port link.Set flow control auto . October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number> gig Single-Mode Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Port Link Configuration Menu [GE Optical Link Menu] fctl . Table 6-22 Single-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/ port <9-12>/gig) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control.Alteon OS 21. you can set port parameters such as flow control.Set auto negotiate cur . 206 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Using these configuration menus. cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet Fiber Optic link port parameters.

0 Command Reference Dual-Mode Ports When you select any one of the dual-mode ports (3–6). see page 210. To view menu options. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. You cannot set the preferred port as the backup port. you see the menu below: [Port 4 Menu] cop opt pref back pvid name cont rmon tag iponly ena dis cur - Copper Gig Phy Menu Optical Gig Phy Menu Set preferred link Set backup link Set default port VLAN id Set port name Set default port BW Contract Enable/Disable RMON for port Enable/disable VLAN tagging for port Enable/disable allowing only IP related frames Enable port Disable port Display current port configuration Table 6-23 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage cop Displays Copper Gigabit Physical Link Menu. The default number is 1. pvid <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged. The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some information and statistics screens. The default is set to None. the port will not switch automatically to the backup port if the preferred port goes down. pref copper|optical Sets the port preference between copper or optical mode. The selected port will be used as the preferred port if both the ports are available. October 2003 „ 207 . opt Displays Gigabit Fiber Optic Physical Link Menu. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. back copper|optical|none Sets the preference for the backup link if the preferred port is not available. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this port. If you choose none. name <64 character string>|none Sets a name for the port. see page 208.

208 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set flow control auto .Set link speed mode . ena Enables the port. iponly disable|enable Disables or enables allowing only IP-related frames.Set duplex mode fctl . and negotiation mode for the port link.0 Command Reference Table 6-23 Dual-Mode Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Disables or enables RMON for this port.) cur Displays the current port parameters. tag disable|enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port. refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 210. October 2003 . Using these configuration menus.Alteon OS 21. you can set port parameters such as speed. It is disabled by default.Set auto negotiate cur . It is disabled by default. dis Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes. Link menu options are described in Table 6-24 and appear on the cop port configuration menus for the Alteon Application Switch. flow control.Display current ge copper link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link. /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> cop Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration [GE Copper Link Menu] speed . It is disabled by default.

cur Displays the current Gigabit Ethernet copper link port parameters.Alteon OS 21. Not all options are valid on all ports. October 2003 „ 209 .0 Command Reference Table 6-24 Dual-Mode Copper Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3–6>/cop) Command Syntax and Usage speed 10|100|1000|any Sets the link speed. The choices include: Any for autonegotiation (default) Full-duplex Half-duplex fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. The choices include: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Any for automatic detection (default) 10 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps mode full|half|any Sets the operating mode. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The choices include: Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control auto on|off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port.

Set flow control cur .Display current optical gig link configuration Table 6-25 Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/port <3-6>/opt) Command Syntax and Usage fctl rx|tx|both|none Sets the flow control. you do not need to use apply or save.Alteon OS 21. The choices include: „ „ „ „ cur Receive flow control Transmit flow control Both receive and transmit flow control (default) No flow control Displays the current Optical Gigabit link port configuration. Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes. October 2003 . See the “Operations Menu” on page 347 for other operations-level commands.0 Command Reference /cfg/port <port number (3–6)> opt Dual-Mode Fiber Optic Port Link Configuration Menu [GE Optical Link Menu] fctl . 210 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The port state will revert to its original configuration when the Alteon Application Switch is reset. enter the following command at any prompt: Main# /oper/port <port number>/dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port.

Rem "Mirrored" port and VLANs cur .0 Command Reference /cfg/pmirr Port Mirroring Menu [Port Mirroring mirror monport cur Menu] Enable/Disable Mirroring Monitoring Port based PM Menu Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports Port mirroring is disabled by default.Display current Port-based Port Mirroring configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enable.Alteon OS 21. you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage. By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port. Table 6-26 Port Mirroring menu options (/cfg/pmirr) Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable|enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport <monitoring port (port to mirror to)> Displays port-mirroring menu.Add "Mirrored" port and VLANs rem . To view menu options. network packets being sent and/or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. October 2003 „ 211 . /cfg/pmirr/monport Port-Mirroring Menu [Port 1 Menu] add . and disable the monitored port. see page 211. When enabled. The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure. cur Displays the current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.

or both)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Adds the port to be mirrored.Alteon OS 21.Policy Menu user . October 2003 .Contract Menu policy . cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing OFF cur . It is necessary to specify the direction because: If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress). It allows companies to guarantee that critical business traffic. the frame is sent to the mirrored port.Globally turn Bandwidth Management processing ON off . all traffic on that port will be mirrored.0 Command Reference Table 6-27 Port-Based Port-Mirroring Menu Options (/cfg/pmirr/monport) Command Syntax and Usage add <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <direction (in. the frame is sent to the monitoring port.Display current Bandwidth Management configuration By default.Set SMTP server user name force . VLAN-based port mirroring allows the user to monitor traffic based on VLANs associated with a port. such as e-commerce transactions. This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic.Enable or disable enforce policies on . BWM is turned off 212 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. /cfg/bwm Bandwidth Management Configuration Bandwidth Management (BWM) enables Web site managers to allocate a portion of the available bandwidth for specific users or applications. Refer to your Application Guide for more information. [Bandwidth Management Menu] cont . rem <mirrored port (port to mirror from)> <vlan index or Carriage Return for all vlans> Removes the mirrored port. receive higher priority versus non-critical traffic. Traffic classification can be based on user or application information. If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both. out. BWM policies can be configured to set lower and upper bounds on the bandwidth allocation. If you do not specify a VLAN. You can add specific VLAN(s) to a be monitored even if there are multiple VLANs associated with that port.

A bandwidth policy is often based on a rate structure whereby a Web host could charge a customer for bandwidth utilization. the reordering of the packets does not occur. you must create one or more bandwidth management contracts. For further details. To manage bandwidth on an Alteon Application Switch. this option is disabled. force disable|enable Enables or disables the enforcement of bandwidth policy on the traffic. By default. off Globally disables Bandwidth Management on this switch. October 2003 „ 213 . see the Alteon OS 21. on Globally enables Bandwidth Management on this switch. To view menu options. The switch uses these contracts to limit individual traffic flows. policy <BW policy number (1-64)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Policy Menu. By default. user <user name> Sets the SMTP user name to whom the history statistics will be mailed.0 Command Reference NOTE – Up to 256 bandwidth management contracts can be configured on Alteon OS. To view menu options.0 Application Guide. Bandwidth policies are bandwidth limita- tions defined for any set of frames. see the Alteon OS 21. For further details. This means that no bandwidth limit is applied on the queues. When disabled. The packets will exit in the order they came in. Table 6-28 Bandwidth Management Menu Options (/cfg/bwm) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BW contract number (1-256)> Displays the Bandwidth Management Contract Menu.Alteon OS 21. see page 214. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management configuration. The default is set to None. specifying the guaranteed bandwidth rates. this option is enabled. see page 215.0 Application Guide. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

wtos disable|enable Disables or enables overwriting the IP Type of Service (TOS) for this contract.Enable BW Contract dis .Set Contract Precedence history .Enable/disable Saving Contract stats history wtos .Disable BW Contract del .Delete BW Contract cur . shaping means buffering a packet and keeping it ready to be sent. shaping disable|enable Disables or enables shaping of the traffic for this contract. The default policy number is 64. it is enabled. 214 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set Contract Policy prec . dis Disables this Bandwidth Management contract.Set Contract name policy . By default. The default value is 1.Enable/disable overwriting IP TOS for this Contract shaping . ena Enables this Bandwidth Management contract. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cont <contract number> Bandwidth Management Contract Configuration [BW Contract 1 Menu] name . history disable|enable Disables or enables saving statistics for this contract on the server. cur Displays the current Bandwidth Management contract configuration.Display current BW Contract configuration Table 6-29 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/cont) Command Syntax and Usage name <15 character name> Sets the name for this Bandwidth Management contract.Enable/disable traffic shaping for this contract ena . policy <Bandwidth policy number (1-64)> Sets the policy number for this Bandwidth Management contract. In this context. del Removes this contract from the switch. prec <Bandwidth precedence value (1-255)> Sets the precedence value for this Bandwidth Management contract. By default. it is disabled.

” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. This is the highest amount of bandwidth available to this policy. buffer <Maximum buffer space (bytes) (8192-128000)> Sets the buffer limit for this policy. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.” the switch will not overwrite the TOS value. cur Displays the current value of the bandwidth policy configuration. With this option set to the default value of “0. del Deletes the bandwidth management policy. The default value is 2000 kbps. This is the amount of bandwidth always available to this policy. The default value is 1000 kbps. otos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new otos (over the limit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is over the soft limit. soft <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the soft bandwidth limit for this policy.Alteon OS 21. The default value is 500Kbytes. October 2003 „ 215 . utos <BW Policy TOS (0-255)> Sets the new utos (underlimit TOS) value to overwrite the original TOS value if the traffic for this contract is under the soft limit.0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/policy <policy number> Bandwidth Management Policy Configuration [Policy 1 Menu] hard soft resv utos otos buffer del cur Set hard Limit Set soft Limit Set Reservation Limit Set underlimit (soft limit) TOS Set overlimit (soft limit) TOS Set Buffer Limit Delete BW Policy Display current Policy configuration Table 6-30 Bandwidth Management Policy Menu Options (/cfg/bwm/pol) Command Syntax and Usage hard <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the hard bandwidth limit for this policy. With this option set to the default value of “0. The default value is 8192 bytes. resv <0k-5000k|1m-1000m> Sets the reserve limit for this policy.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference /cfg/bwm/cur Bandwidth Management Current Configuration Current Bandwidth Management setting: ON Policy Enforcement: enabled SMTP server user name: Contract Name Policy Prec Hist TOS State Shaping 1 cont_1 1 1 E E E E 2 cont_2 2 1 E D D D 256 Default -0 E D E D *Default contract gets all the BW that is available on a port after the active contracts reserved BW is taken. Policy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Hard 25M 10M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M 2M Soft 20M 8M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M 1M Resv oTOS uTOS Buffer 500K 150 100 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 500K 0 0 16320 216 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

The factory default value of this command is Nortel multiple STG mode disabled. trunk <trunk group number (1-12)> Displays Trunk Group Menu. October 2003 „ 217 . To view menu options. cur Displays the current Layer 2 parameters. When Nortel multiple STG mode is enabled. the Nortel implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. see page 224.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2 Layer 2 Configuration Menu [Layer 2 Menu] stg trunk vlan ntmstg cur Spanning Tree Menu Trunk Group Menu VLAN Menu Enable/disable Nortel multiple STG mode Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6-31 Layer 2 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2) Command Syntax and Usage stg <group number [1-16]> Displays Spanning Tree Group Menu. see page 222. To view menu options. the Cisco implementation of multiple STGs will be followed. When Nortel multiple STG mode is disabled. The ntmstg enabled device will not work with the device configured for Cisco implementation of Spanning Tree BPDUs. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays VLAN Menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 218. You need to reset the switch with the command /boot/reset for the Spanning Tree Group configuration to change to ntmstg enabled.Alteon OS 21. ntmstg disable|enable Enables or disables Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree Group mode. To view menu options.

Bridge parameter menu port .Add VLAN(s) to Spanning Tree Group remove .0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg Spanning Tree Group Configuration When multiple paths exist on a network. Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802. If that path fails. Spanning Tree configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. [Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu] brg . Thus.Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default .Display current bridge parameters 218 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Spanning Tree can be enabled or disabled for each port. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) configures the network so that a switch uses only the most efficient path. October 2003 . See your Application Guide for a detailed description of this feature and how to configure Spanning Tree Groups on the switch.Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on .Port parameter menu add . STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology.Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur . Alteon OS supports up to 16 instances of Spanning Trees or Spanning Tree groups. Multiple Spanning Trees can be enabled on tagged or untagged ports.Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off . Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) detects and eliminates logical loops in a bridged or switched network.Remove VLAN(s) from Spanning Tree Group clear . When multiple paths exist. Each VLAN can be placed in only one Spanning Tree group per switch except for the default Spanning Tree group (STG 1). The default Spanning Tree group (1) can have more than one VLAN. All other Spanning Tree groups (2-16) can have only one VLAN associated with it.Alteon OS 21. STP forces redundant data paths into a standby (blocked) state.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). This command is turned on by default. Spanning Tree automatically sets up another active path on the network to sustain network operations.

cur Displays the current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters. Table 6-32 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (/cfg/l2/stp) Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu. on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol. add <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Associates a VLAN with a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter.Alteon OS 21. default Resets STG and Group member parameters to factory default. clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree. STP must be enabled. October 2003 „ 219 . remove <VLAN numbers (1-4090)> Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter. off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol. see page 221. port <port number> Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu. see page 220. To view menu options. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options.0 Command Reference NOTE – When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy.

Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value. The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STP network. The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STP root bridge.Set bridge Max Age (6-40 secs) fwd .Set bridge Hello Time [1-10 secs] mxage . The range is 1 to 10 seconds. mxage <new bridge max age (6-40 secs)> Configures the bridge maximum age. and the default is 2 seconds. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. and the default is 15 seconds.Set bridge Priority [0-65535] hello .Set bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs) aging . To make this switch the root bridge.Alteon OS 21. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STP operation of the switch. The range is 0 to 65535. the higher the bridge priority. The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state. hello <new bridge hello time (1-10 secs)> Configures the bridge hello time. STP bridge parameters include: „ „ „ „ „ Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6-33 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new bridge priority (0-65535)> Configures the bridge priority. October 2003 .Set bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs. 220 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/stg/brg Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration [Bridge Spanning Tree Menu] prior . fwd <new bridge Forward Delay (4-30 secs)> Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. and the default is 32768. The lower the value.The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). 0 to disable) cur . and the default is 20 seconds. configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network.

October 2003 „ 221 .Turn port’s Spanning Tree OFF cur .Turn port’s Spanning Tree ON off .Display current port Spanning Tree parameters Spanning Tree port parameters are used to modify STP operation on an individual port basis. 0 to disable)> Configures the forwarding database aging time. When configuring STP bridge parameters. 0 for default) on . STP port parameters include: „ „ Port priority Port path cost Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set port Path Cost (1-65535. cur Displays the current bridge STP parameters. To disable aging. the following formulas must be used: „ „ 2*(fwd-1) > mxage 2*(hello+1) < mxage /cfg/l2/stg <STG Group Index>/port <port #> Spanning Tree Port Configuration [Spanning Tree Port 1 Menu] prior . and the default is 300 seconds.Alteon OS 21. set this parameter to 0. The range is 1 to 65535 seconds.0 Command Reference Table 6-33 Bridge Spanning Tree Menu Options (/cfg/l2/stp/brg) Command Syntax and Usage aging <new bridge Aging Time (1-65535 secs.Set port Priority (0-255) cost . The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the forwarding database.

0 for default)> Configures the port path cost. the faster the port.Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth. Best performance is achieved when all ports in a trunk are configured for the same speed. with the following restrictions: „ „ „ „ Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.Alteon OS 21. Table 6-34 Spanning Tree Port Menu (/cfg/l2/stp/port) Command Syntax and Usage prior <new port Priority (0-255)> Configures the port priority. Up to eight ports/trunks can belong to the same trunk group. combining their bandwidth to create a single. on Enables STP on the port. cur Displays the current STP port parameters. the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment. Trunking from non-Alteon devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel® technology. larger virtual link. The range is 0 to 255. When trunk groups are configured. Generally speaking. cost <new port Path Cost (1-65535. and 1 for Gigabit ports. the lower the path cost.0 Command Reference The port option of STP is turned on by default. A value of 0 indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed. and the default is 128. The default is 10 for 100Mbps ports. A trunk group is a group of ports that act together. The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups. /cfg/l2/trunk <trunk group number> Trunk Configuration Trunk groups can provide super-bandwidth connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk capable devices. Up to 12 trunk groups can be configured on the Alteon Application Switch. multi-link connections between Alteon Application Switches or other trunk-capable devices. 222 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 . The range is 1 to 65535. off Disables STP on the port. The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port.

Display current Trunk Group configuration Table 6-35 Trunk Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/trunk) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the default Bandwidth Management Contract for this trunk group.Add port to trunk group rem . rem <port number> Removes a physical port from the current trunk group.Enable trunk group dis . the contract number is 256 for AD3 and 1024 for AD4.Remove port from trunk group ena . cur Displays the current trunk group parameters. del Removes the current trunk group configuration.Delete trunk group cur .Alteon OS 21. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Disable trunk group del . the trunk group is empty and disabled. add <port number> Adds a physical port to the current trunk group.0 Command Reference By default. [Trunk group 1 Menu] cont . By default.Set BW contract for this trunk group add . ena Enables the current trunk group. October 2003 „ 223 . dis Turns the current trunk group off.

The default contract number is 256 on AD3 and 1024 on AD4. For more information on configuring VLANs. add <port number> Adds port(s) or trunk group(s) to the VLAN membership.0 Command Reference /cfg/l2/vlan <VLAN number> VLAN Configuration VLANs are commonly used to split up groups of network users into manageable broadcast domains. change the status of the VLAN. which is enabled all the time.Alteon OS 21. and change the port membership of the VLAN. The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes. to create logical segmentation of workgroups. the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1. see “Setup Part 3: VLANs” on page 33. cont <BW Contract number. 224 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. delete the VLAN. and to enforce security policies among logical segments. October 2003 . [VLAN 1 Menu] name stg cont add rem def jumbo learn ena dis del cur - Set VLAN name Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group Set BW contract Add port to VLAN Remove port from VLAN Define VLAN as list of ports Enable/disable Jumbo Frame support Enable/disable smac learning Enable VLAN Disable VLAN Delete VLAN Display current VLAN configuration Table 6-36 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name. (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for this VLAN. By default. rem <port number> Removes port(s) or trunk group(s) from this VLAN. The default VLAN name is the first one. stg <Spanning Tree Group index (1-16)> Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.

learn disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address learning on this VLAN. Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN #1. October 2003 „ 225 . You cannot remove a port from VLAN #1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN. By default. cur Displays the current VLAN configuration. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN. jumbo disable|enable Enables or disables jumbo frame support on this VLAN. dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration.Alteon OS 21. you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on (see the tag command on page 202). it defines ports between 1-28 for VLAN 1. ena Enables this VLAN.0 Command Reference Table 6-36 VLAN Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l2/vlan) Command Syntax and Usage def <list of port numbers> Defines which ports are members of this VLAN. NOTE – All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Also. You need to reset the switch using /boot/reset command to enable jumbo frames on the switch. del Deletes this VLAN.

To view menu options. see page 240.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3 Layer 3 Configuration Menu [Layer 3 Menu] if gw route arp frwd nwf rmap rip1 ospf bgp port dns bootp vrrp rtrid metrc cur Interface Menu Default Gateway Menu Static Route Menu ARP Menu Forwarding Menu Network Filters Menu Route Map Menu Routing Information Protocol Menu Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Menu Border Gateway Protocol Menu IP Port Menu Domain Name System Menu Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu Set router ID Set default gateway metric Display current IP configuration Table 6-37 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the IP Interface Menu. see page 233. frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu. rip1 Displays the Routing Interface Protocol version 1 Menu.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. rmap <route map number (1-32)> Displays the Route Map Menu. nwf <Network filter number (1-256)> Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu. To view menu options. arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol menu. October 2003 . To view menu options. To view menu options see page 236. route Displays the IP Static Route Menu. gw <default gateway number (1-259)> Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu. 226 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 229. see page 228. To view menu options see page 235. see page 230. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 231.

To view menu options. bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu. To view menu options. see page 251. 192. To view menu options.4. To view menu options. To view menu options. bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu.Alteon OS 21.101)> Defines the router ID. see page 257. dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu.17. The default gateway metric is strict. port <port number> Displays the IP Port Menu. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. see page 259. To view menu options. metrc strict|roundrobin Sets the default gateway metric for strict or roundrobin. For more information on gateway metrics. vrrp Displays Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu. see page 258. cur Displays the current IP configuration. see page 275. see page 241. October 2003 „ 227 .0 Command Reference Table 6-37 Layer 3 Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3) Command Syntax and Usage ospf Displays the OSPF Menu. see page 260 rtrid <IP address (such as.

relay disable|enable Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface. dis Disables this IP interface. mask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. It is enabled by default. Table 6-38 IP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/if) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as 192.0)> Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation. Each interface can belong to one VLAN. 228 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each IP interface represents the Alteon Application Switch on an IP subnet on your network. The Interface option is disabled by default.17.Alteon OS 21.255.101)> Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation. ena Enables this IP interface.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/if <interface number> IP Interface Configuration [IP Interface addr mask vlan relay ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Set IP address Set subnet mask Set VLAN number Enable/disable BOOTP relay Enable IP interface Disable IP interface Delete IP interface Display current interface configuration The Alteon Application Switch can be configured with up to 256 IP interfaces. October 2003 . del Removes this IP interface. cur Displays the current interface settings.4.255. though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it.

This option is disabled by default.Delete default gateway cur . retry <number of attempts (1-120)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 seconds. The default is 2 seconds. This command is disabled by default.Set IP address intr .Display current default gateway configuration NOTE – The switch can be configured with up to 255 gateways.44)> Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation. intr <0-60 seconds> The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. arp disable|enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks. 192.Set VLAN number ena . Table 6-39 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage addr <default gateway address (such as.Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN arp . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Sets the VLAN to be assigned to this default IP gateway. October 2003 „ 229 . ena Enables the gateway for use.Alteon OS 21. The default is 8 attempts. The intr option sets the time between health checks.4.Enable/disable ARP only health checks vlan .Set interval between ping attempts retry . The range is from 1 to 120 attempts.Disable default gateway del .Enable default gateway dis . Gateways one to four are reserved for default gateway load balancing.17. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/gw <gateway number> Default IP Gateway Configuration [Default gateway 1 Menu] addr . Gateways five to 259 are used for load-balancing of VLAN-based gateways.

Default Gateway Metrics For information about configuring which gateway is selected when multiple default gateways are enabled. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address. destination subnet mask. rem <destination> <mask> Removes a static route. see page 275. cur Displays the current gateway settings. and gateway address.Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured. del Deletes the gateway from the configuration. October 2003 . cur Displays the current IP static routes.Alteon OS 21. 230 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Table 6-40 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options (cfg/l3/route) Command Syntax and Usage add <destination> <mask> <gateway> <interface number> Adds a static route. Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation. The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dotted decimal notation. /cfg/l3/route IP Static Route Configuration [IP Static Route Menu] add .Add static route rem .0 Command Reference Table 6-39 Default Gateway Options (/cfg/l3/gw) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables the gateway.Remove static route cur .

Set re-ARP period in minutes . Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet. [ARP Menu] static rearp cur . Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. see page 231. Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests. the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache. In any IP communication. Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory. October 2003 „ 231 . To view options. ARP queries machines on the local network for their physical addresses.Display current ARP configuration Table 6-41 ARP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp) Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/arp ARP Configuration Menu Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer.Static ARP Menu . /cfg/l3/arp/static ARP Static Configuration Menu Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically. You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes. cur Displays the current ARP configurations. rearp <2-120 minutes> Defines re-ARP period in minutes.Alteon OS 21. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address.

0 Command Reference NOTE – Alteon OS 21.0 allows the static ARP configuration to retain over reboots.Delete an ARP entry cur . October 2003 . Alteon OS 20. 192. cur Displays current static ARP configuration. 232 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.4.Alteon OS 21.x and below allow the user to configure the ARP information but that information cannot be retained over the switch reboot. del <IP address (such as.101)> Deletes a permanent ARP entry.Display current static ARP configuration Table 6-42 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/arp/static) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <MAC address> <VLAN number> <port number> Adds a permanent ARP entry.Add a permanent ARP entry del . [Static ARP Menu] add .17.

Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off . on Enables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch.Local network definition for route caching menu dirbr . Forwarding is turned off by default.Remove local network definition cur . cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. and to remove local networks. Up to five local networks (lnets) can be configured. /cfg/l3/frwd/local Local Network Route Caching Definition [IP Local Networks Menu] add .Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF cur .Alteon OS 21. This command is disabled by default. off Disables IP forwarding (routing) on the Alteon Application Switch. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts on . October 2003 „ 233 . see page 233. To view menu options. dirbr disable|enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6-43 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd) Command Syntax and Usage local Displays the menu used to define local network for route caching.Add local network definition rem .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/frwd IP Forwarding Configuration [IP Forwarding Menu] local .Display current local network definitions This menu is used for adding local networks by setting the local network address and netmask for the route cache.

0 .255.0 128. To limit the route cache to your local hosts.0 .205.255.0 Command Reference Table 2 IP Local Networks Menu Options (/cfg/l3/frwd/local) Command Syntax and Usage add <local network address> <local network mask> Adds a definition for a local network.0.32. To determine if a route should be added to the memory cache. This produces a range that includes all Internet addresses for route caching: 0.0 205.0.0. the local network address and mask are both set to 0.255.255. rem <local network address> <local network mask> Removes a definition for a local network. the destination address is masked (bitwise and) with the local network mask and checked against the local network address. by reducing the size of the ARP table on the Alteon Application Switch.255. The default gateways must be within range.0.32.0 255.0.0 128.0.0. Addresses to be cached are subnets that are directly connected and for which there is an interface configured on the Alteon Application Switch.0.255 Address 0.0. The /cfg/l3/frwd/local/add parameters define a range of addresses that will be cached on the Alteon Application Switch.0 NOTE – All addresses that fall outside the defined range are forwarded to the default gateway.32. 234 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.255.255 205. For details. you could configure the parameters as shown in the examples in the following table. October 2003 .0. The local network address is used to define the base IP address in the range which will be cached. Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache The Local Route Cache lets you use switch resources more efficiently.0.0 through 255.255.0. Table 6-44 Local Routing Cache Address Ranges Local Host Address Range 0.Alteon OS 21.0. By default.0 . and the local network mask is the mask which is applied to produce the range.0 Mask 128.0.255.0. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for the Local Route Cache” on page 234.0.0.255. cur Displays the current local network definitions.255.0.0.127.255 128.0.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default value is 0. enable Enables the Network Filter configuration.4. For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/nwf Network Filter Configuration [IP Network Filter 1 Menu] addr .IP Subnet mask enable .44)> Sets the starting IP address for this filter. 255.0.IP Address mask .Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6-45 IP Network Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/nwf) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as.0. October 2003 „ 235 .0.Enable Network Filter disable . assign the network filter to a route map.255.Disable Network Filter delete . delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration.255. disable Disables the Network Filter configuration.0. cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration. 192.0)> Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with /cfg/l3/nwf/addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled. The default address is 0. mask <subnet mask (such as.0. then assign the route map to the peer.Alteon OS 21.17.Delete Network Filter cur .0.

lp <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the local preference of the matched route. [IP Route Map alist aspath ap lp metric type prec weight enable disable delete cur 1 - Menu] Access List number AS Filter Menu Set as-path prepend of the matched route Set local-preference of the matched route Set metric of the matched route Set OSPF metric-type of the matched route Set the precedence of this route map Set weight of the matched route Enable route map Disable route map Delete route map Display current route map configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> Routing Map Configuration Menu NOTE – The map number (1-32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.Alteon OS 21. 236 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Table 6-46 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) Command Syntax and Usage alist <number (1-8)> Displays the Access List menu. The path with the higher preference is preferred. ap <AS number> [<AS number>] [<AS number>]|none Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. see page 238. One to three path preferences can be configured. see page 239. For more information. metric <(value 0-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric of the matched route. For more information. aspath <number (1-8)> Displays the Autonomous System (AS) Filter menu. October 2003 . which affects both inbound and outbound directions.

prec <value (1-255)> Sets the precedence of the route map. none—Removes the OSPF metric.0 Command Reference Table 6-46 Routing Map Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage type <value (1|2)>|none Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The smaller the value. Type 2 routes have more cost than Type 2.Alteon OS 21. The default is type 1. disable Disables the route map. the higher the precedence. Default value is 10. enable Enables the route map. cur Displays the current route configuration. „ „ „ Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics. weight <value (0-65534)>|none Sets the weight of the route map. Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics. delete Deletes the route map. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 237 .

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number/alist <access list number>
IP Access List Configuration Menu
NOTE – The route map number (1-32) and the access list number (1-8) represent the IP access list you wish to configure.

[IP Access List nwf metric action enable disable delete cur -

1 Menu] Network Filter number Metric Set Network Filter action Enable Access List Disable Access List Delete Access List Display current Access List configuration

Table 6-47 IP Access List Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/alist)
Command Syntax and Usage nwf <network filter number (1-256)> Sets the network filter number. See “/cfg/l3/nwf” on page 235 for details. metric <(1-4294967294)>|none Sets the metric value in the AS-External (ASE) LSA. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies action for the access list. enable Enables the access list. disable Disables the access list. delete Deletes the access list. cur Displays the current Access List configuration.

238

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rmap <route map number> aspath <autonomous system path>
Autonomous System Filter Path
NOTE – The rmap number (1-32) and the path number (1-8) represent the AS path you wish to configure.

[AS Filter 1 Menu] as - AS number action - Set AS Filter action enable - Enable AS Filter disable - Disable AS Filter delete - Delete AS Filter cur - Display current AS Filter configuration

Table 6-48 AS Filter Menu Options (/cfg/l3/rmap/aspath)
Command Syntax and Usage as <AS number (1-65535)> Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number. action permit|deny or p|d Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action. enable Enables the Autonomous System filter. disable Disables the Autonomous System filter. delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter. cur Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

239

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/rip1
Routing Information Protocol Configuration
[Routing Information Protocol Menu] updat - Set update period in seconds spply - Enable/disable supplying route updates lsten - Enable/disable listening to route updates deflt - Enable/disable listening to default routes statc - Enable/disable supplying static routes poisn - Enable/disable poisoned reverse vip - Enable/disable vip advertisement on - Globally turn RIP ON off - Globally turn RIP OFF cur - Display current RIP configuration

The RIP1 Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol, version 1 (RIP1) parameters. This option is turned off by default. NOTE – Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2. Table 6-49 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage updat <update period (1-120 seconds)> Sets the RIP update period in seconds. It is set at 30 seconds by default. spply disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers. lsten disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers. deflt disable|enable When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but gives them lower priority than configured gateways. When disabled, the switch rejects RIP default routes. This command is disabled by default. statc disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch supplies static routes. poisn disable|enable This command is disabled by default. When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When disabled, the switch uses only split horizon.

240

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-49 Routing Information Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/rip1)
Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables the advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes. If a VIP route exists in a routing table, it will always be advertised except when it is included in another network route that is already being advertised. Note: If all real servers behind a VIP go down, the route gets removed from the routing table, and will not be advertised. If we disable all the real servers using operation command, the VIP route does not get eliminated from the routing table, and the switch will continue to advertise the route. on Globally turns RIP ON. off Globally turns RIP OFF. cur Displays the current RIP configuration.

/cfg/l3/ospf
Open Shortest Path First Configuration
Alteon OS supports the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing protocol. The Alteon OS implementation conforms to the OSPF version 2 specifications detailed in Internet RFC 1583. OSPF is designed for routing traffic within a single IP domain called an Autonomous System (AS). The AS can be divided into smaller logical units known as areas. In any AS with multiple areas, one area must be designated as area 0, known as the backbone. The backbone acts as the central OSPF area. All other areas in the AS must be connected to the backbone. Areas inject summary routing information into the backbone, which then distributes it to other areas as needed. For more information on how to configure OSPF on the switch, refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

241

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

[Open Shortest Path First Menu] aindex - OSPF Area (index) menu range - OSPF Summary Range menu if - OSPF Interface menu virt - OSPF Virtual Links menu host - OSPF Host Entry menu redist - OSPF Route Redistribute menu lsdb - Set the LSDB limit default - Originate default route information md5key - OSPF MD5 Key menu on - Globally turn OSPF ON off - Globally turn OSPF OFF cur - Display current OSPF configuration

Table 6-50 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the area index menu. This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number. See page 243 to view menu options. range <range number (1-16)> Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 245 to view menu options. if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu. See page 246 to view menu options. virt <virtual link (1-3)> Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See page 247 to view menu options. host <host entry number (1-128)> Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured. Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. See page 249 to view menu options. redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 250 to view menu options. lsdb <LSDB limit (0-2000, 0 for no limit)> Sets the link state database limit. default <metric (1-16777215)> <metric-type 1|2>|none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area. Use none for no default.

242

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-50 OSPF Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf)
Command Syntax and Usage md5key <key ID (1-255)> Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key. See on Enables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. off Disables OSPF on the Alteon Application Switch. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.

/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex
Area Index Configuration Menu
[OSPF Area (index) 1 Menu] areaid - Set area ID type - Set area type metric - Set stub area metric auth - Set authentication type spf - Set time interval between two SPF calculations enable - Enable area disable - Disable area delete - Delete area cur - Display current OSPF area configuration

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

243

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-51 Area Index Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/aindex)
Command Syntax and Usage areaid <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number. type transit|stub|nssa Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit. Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area. Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed. Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area. NSSA: Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes from outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas. metric <metric value (1-65535)> Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions. Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route. Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes. auth none|password|md5 None: No authentication required. Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate. MD5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is required. spf <interval (0-255)> Sets time interval between two successive SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra’s algorithm. enable Enables the OSPF area. disable Disables the OSPF area. delete Deletes the OSPF area. cur Displays the current OSPF configuration.

244

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/ospf/range
OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu
[OSPF Summary addr mask aindex hide enable disable delete cur Range 1 Menu] - Set IP address - Set IP mask - Set area index - Enable/disable hide range - Enable range - Disable range - Delete range - Display current OSPF summary range configuration

Table 6-52 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/range)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP Address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Displays the base IP address for the range. mask <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101> Displays the IP address mask for the range. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index used by the Alteon Application Switch. hide disable|enable Hides the OSPF summary range. enable Enables the OSPF summary range. disable Disables the OSPF summary range. delete Deletes the OSPF summary range. cur Displays the current OSPF summary range.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

245

retra <value (0-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds. A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or Backup Designated Router (BDR). prio <priority value (0-255)> Displays the assigned priority value to the Alteon Application Switch’s OSPF interfaces. trans <value (0-3600)> Displays the transit delay in seconds. October 2003 . 246 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down. Usually the cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet.) cost <cost value (1-65535)> Displays cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/if OSPF Interface Configuration Menu [OSPF Interface aindex prio cost hello dead trans retra key mdkey enable disable delete cur 1 Menu] Set area index Set interface router priority Set interface cost Set hello interval in seconds Set dead interval in seconds Set transit delay in seconds Set retransmit interval in seconds Set authentication key Set MD5 key ID Enable interface Disable interface Delete interface Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6-53 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. (A priority value of 127 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. Low cost indicates high bandwidth. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the interval in seconds between the hello packets for the interfaces.

/cfg/l3/ospf/virt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu [OSPF Virtual aindex hello dead trans retra nbr key mdkey enable disable delete cur Link 1 Menu] .Delete interface . enable Enables OSPF interface.Display current OSPF interface configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set retransmit interval in seconds .Enable interface .Set dead interval in seconds .Set area index .Alteon OS 21.Set MD5 key ID . delete Deletes OSPF interface.Set router ID of virtual neighbor .Set authentication key .Set hello interval in seconds . mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.Disable interface .Set transit delay in seconds . disable Disables OSPF interface. cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface. October 2003 „ 247 .0 Command Reference Table 6-53 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/if) Command Syntax and Usage key <key>|none Sets the authentication key to clear the password.

0. retra <value (1-3600)> Displays the retransmit interval in seconds.0. trans <value (1-3600)> Displays the delay in transit in seconds. mdkey <key ID (1-255)>|none Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. 248 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enable Enables OSPF virtual link. Default is 0. dead <value (1-65535)> Displays the health parameters of a hello packet.Alteon OS 21. Default is five seconds.0 Command Reference Table 6-54 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/virt) Command Syntax and Usage aindex <area index (0-2)> Displays the OSPF area index. nbr <nbr router ID (IP address)> Displays the router ID of the virtual neighbor. Default is 40 seconds. hello <value (1-65535)> Displays the authentication parameters of a hello packet. October 2003 . key <key>|none Displays the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link. Default is none. cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings. Default is one seconds. delete Deletes OSPF virtual link. which is set to be in an interval of seconds. disable Disables OSPF virtual link. Default is none.0.

Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6-55 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/host) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as. aindex <area index [0-2]> Displays the area index of the host.Set area index cost .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/host OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu [OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu] addr . 192. cost <cost value [1-65535]> Displays the cost value of the host.Set cost of this host entry enable . disable Disables OSPF host entry.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 249 .Delete host entry cur .Disable host entry delete . cur Displays the current OSPF host entries. enable Enables OSPF host entry.17.Set host entry IP address aindex .101)> Displays the base IP address for the host entry.4.Enable host entry disable . delete Deletes OSPF host entry. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

export <metric (1-16777215)><metric type (1|2)> |none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS-external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol..Remove rmap from route redistribution list export . enter routing map numbers one per line.Alteon OS 21.Add rmap into route redistribution list rem . cur Displays the current route map settings. To remove specific route maps.. rem (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>) . Removes routing maps from the rmap list. enter none. /cfg/l3/ospf/md5key OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu [OSPF MD5 Key key delete cur 1 Menu] Set authentication key Delete key Display current MD5 key configuration 250 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enter all.To add all the 32 route maps. To remove all 32 route maps. enter routing map numbers one per line. enter all.Display current route-maps added Table 6-56 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/redist) Command Syntax and Usage add (<route map (1-32)> <route map (1-32)>)|all Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list. [OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu] add . To add specific route maps. October 2003 .Export all routes of this protocol cur . The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed. NULL at the end. This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/ospf/redist <fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp> OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Menu. |all Removes the route map from the route redistribution list. NULL at end.

The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes. it's called external BGP (eBGP). [Border Gateway peer aggr as pref on off cur Protocol Menu] Peer menu Aggregation menu Set Autonomous System (AS) number Set Local Preference Globally turn BGP ON Globally turn BGP OFF Display current BGP configuration Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. up to 16 chars> Sets the authentication key up to 16 characters for this OSPF packet. it's called internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous system.Alteon OS 21. The BGP menu option is turned off by default. rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your upstream provider(s). /cfg/l3/bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks. fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers. delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet. BGP is defined in RFC 1771. You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems. October 2003 „ 251 . cur Displays the current MD5 key configuration. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best” route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network.0 Command Reference Table 6-57 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ospf/md5key) Command Syntax and Usage key <key.

To view menu options. An autonomous system shares routing information with other autonomous systems using the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP). or use the local preference if you are using iBGP. An autonomous system (AS) is the unit of router policy. either a single network or a group of networks that is controlled by a common network administrator on behalf of an administrative entity (such as a university. October 2003 .0 Command Reference NOTE – Fixed routes are subnet routes. An autonomous system is assigned a globally unique number called an Autonomous System Number (ASN). Each border router. To view menu options. The path with the higher value is preferred. cur Displays the current BGP configuration. exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks. or a business division). 252 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. on Globally turns BGP on. When multiple peers advertise the same route. a business enterprise. as <autonomous system number (1-65535)> Sets Autonomous System Number for this autonomous system. Table 6-58 Border Gateway Protocol Menu (/cfg/l3/bgp) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer number (1-16)> Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer.Alteon OS 21. within an autonomous system. pref <local preference (0-4294967294)> Sets the local preference. use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP. There is one fixed route per IP interface. see page 253. off Globally turns BGP off. aggr <aggregate number (1-16)> Displays the Aggregation Menu. see page 256.

Enable peer disable .0.Remove rmap from in-rmap list remo .Set keep alive time advert . in seconds.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer <peer number> BGP Peer Configuration Menu [BGP Peer 1 Menu] redist .4.0. that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the peer.Set connect retry interval orig .Delete peer cur .Add rmap into out-rmap list remi .Set time-to-live of IP datagrams addi .Remove rmap from out-rmap list enable . Table 6-59 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu. which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. ras <AS number (0-65535)> Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer. see page 255.Set hold time alive . using dotted decimal notation.Add rmap into in-rmap list addo .Disable peer delete .Set remote IP address ras . 3-65535)> Sets the period of time.Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers.Redistribution menu addr . The default address is 0. It is set at 0 by default. It is set at 90 seconds by default. To view the menu options.Set min time between route originations ttl . The peer option is disabled by default. 192.Set min time between advertisements retry .0.Alteon OS 21. addr <IP address (such as.101)> Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router). alive <keepalive time (0. October 2003 „ 253 .17. hold <hold time (0. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. 1-21845)> Sets the keep-alive time for the specified peer in seconds.Set remote autonomous system number hold .

addi <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into in-route map list. del Deletes this peer configuration. ttl <number of router hops (1-255)> Time-to-live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded. orig <min orig time (1-65535)> Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds. dis Disables this peer configuration.0 Command Reference Table 6-59 BGP Peer Configuration Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer) Command Syntax and Usage advert <min adv time (1-65535)> Sets time in seconds between advertisements. The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded. retry <connect retry interval (1-65535)> Sets connection retry interval in seconds. remi <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from in-route map list. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21. ena Enables this peer configuration. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that. when exhausted. which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network. would cause the packet to be discarded. 254 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. remo <route map ID (1-32)> Removes route map from out-route map list. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement makes. The default number is set at 1. addo <route map ID (1-32)> Adds route map into out-route map list. This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make. cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration. It is also used to support multi-hops.

Similarly. originate. None: No routes are configured Import: Import these routes. default none|import|originate|redistribute Sets default route action. fixed disable|enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes. If the routes are learned from default gateway configuration.Alteon OS 21. or none. you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu. rip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable|enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes. static disable|enable Enables or disables advertising static routes. you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Defaults routes can be configured as import. if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. October 2003 „ 255 . redistribute. Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers even though it does not have any default routes in its routing table.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu [Redistribution metric default rip ospf fixed static vip cur Menu] Set default-metric of advertised routes Set default route action Enable/disable advertising RIP routes Enable/disable advertising OSPF routes Enable/disable advertising fixed routes Enable/disable advertising static routes Enable/disable advertising VIP routes Display current redistribution configuration Table 6-60 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage metric <metric (1-4294967294)>|none Sets default metric of advertised routes.

0> Sets the IP mask for the selected aggregate.Alteon OS 21. enable Enables the selected aggregate. such as 255. mask <IP subnet mask.Set aggregation network mask enable .Display current aggregation configuration This menu allows you to configure aggregate routing to condense the number of routes between internal and external peer routers.Disable aggregation delete .Set aggregation IP address mask . Table 6-61 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address.101> Adds the IP address to the selected aggregate.Delete aggregation current .255. [BGP Aggr 1 Menu] addr .255. disable Disables the selected aggregate. delete Deletes the selected aggregate. cur Displays the current redistribution configuration.Enable aggregation disable . such as 192. 256 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-60 BGP Redistribution Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bgp/peer/redist) Command Syntax and Usage vip disable|enable Enables or disables advertising VIP routes. October 2003 .17. /cfg/l3/bgp/aggr <aggregate number> BGP Aggregate Routing Configuration Menu NOTE – The aggregate number (1-16) represents the aggregation route you wish to configure.4.

By default. cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings. off Disables IP forwarding for the current port. /cfg/l3/port <port number> IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu [IP Forwarding Port 1 Menu] on . the port forwarding option is turned on. October 2003 „ 257 . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 6-61 BGP Aggregate Menu Options (/cfg/l3/ip/bgp/aggr) (Continued) Command Syntax and Usage current Displays the current aggregate configuration.Turn Forwarding ON off .Turn Forwarding OFF cur .Display current port configuration The Layer 3 Port Menu allows you to turn IP forwarding on or off on a port-by-port basis. Table 6-62 IP Forwarding Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/port) Command Syntax and Usage on Enables IP forwarding for the current port.Alteon OS 21.

101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server.4. Table 6-63 Domain Name System Menu Options (/cfg/l3/dns) Command Syntax and Usage prima <IP address (such as. and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services. dname <dotted DNS notation>|none Sets the default domain name used by the switch. Use dotted decimal notation.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/dns Domain Name System Configuration Menu [Domain Name System Menu] prima . the configured secondary will be used instead. For example: mycompany. and tftp commands.17.Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System (DNS) Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network. Enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation. October 2003 . 192.com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings. 192.Set IP address of primary DNS server secon .4.17. traceroute.Alteon OS 21. DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping. secon <IP address (such as. If the primary DNS server fails.Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname .Set default domain name cur .101)> You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server. 258 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/bootp
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu
[Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu] addr - Set IP address of BOOTP server addr2 - Set IP address of second BOOTP server on - Globally turn BOOTP relay ON off - Globally turn BOOTP relay OFF cur - Display current BOOTP relay configuration

The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the Alteon Application Switch. BOOTP relay menu is turned off by default. Table 6-64 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/l3/bootp)
Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server. addr2 <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server. on Globally turns on BOOTP relay. off Globally turns off BOOTP relay. cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

259

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp
VRRP Configuration Menu
[Virtual Router vr vrgroup group if track hotstan on off holdoff cur Redundancy Protocol Menu] VRRP Virtual Router Menu VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup Menu VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu VRRP Interface Menu VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Enable/disable hot-standby processing Globally turn VRRP ON Globally turn VRRP OFF Globally VRRP hold off time Display current VRRP configuration

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on Alteon Application Switches provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP-capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address. By default, VRRP is disabled. Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between its Layer 4 switches. For more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in your Alteon OS 21.0 Application Guide. Table 6-65 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage vr <virtual router number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu. This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers on this switch. To view menu options, see page 262. vrgroup <virtual router vrgroup number (1-16)> Displays VR Group Menu. To view menu options, see page 265. group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu, used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity. Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hotstandby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time. To view menu options, see page 269.

260

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-65 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu. To view menu options, see page 273. track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu. This menu is used for weighting the criteria used when modifying priority levels in the master router election process. To view menu options, see page 274. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other. By default, this option is disabled. on Globally enables VRRP on this switch. off Globally disables VRRP on this switch. holdoff <0-255 seconds> Globally suspends VRRP operation for the specified interval. cur Displays the current VRRP parameters.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

261

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>
Virtual Router Configuration Menu
[VRRP Virtual track vrid addr if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router 1 Menu] - Priority Tracking Menu - Set virtual router ID - Set IP address - Set interface number - Set renter priority - Set advertisement interval - Enable or disable preemption - Enable or disable sharing - Enable virtual router - Disable virtual router - Delete virtual router - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for configuring up to 256 virtual routers for this switch. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. Virtual routers are disabled by default. Table 6-66 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled. To view menu options, see page 264. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. This is used in conjunction with addr (below) to define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP-enabled routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router: one that shares the same vrid and addr combination. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. The default value is 1. All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface belongs. addr <IP address (such as, 192.4.17.101)> Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation. This is used in conjunction with the vrid (above) to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device. The default address is 0.0.0.0.

262

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-66 VRRP Virtual Router Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr)
Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always assume the role of master router, even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority. This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled. The default value is 1. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. The default value is 1. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note that even when preem is disabled, this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). By default, this option is enabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing, an Alteon proprietary extension to VRRP. When enabled, this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router, even when in backup mode. By default, this option is enabled. ena Enables this virtual router. dis Disables this virtual router. del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration. cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

263

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr <router number>/track
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
[VRRP Virtual vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu] - Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers - Enable/disable tracking other interfaces - Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports - Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers - Enable/disable tracking HSRP - Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN - Display current VRRP virtual router configuration

This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 274). Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option (see preem in Table 6-66 on page 262) is enabled, this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master. Some tracking criteria (vrs, ifs, and ports below) apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual interface routers.” Other tracking criteria (l4pts, reals, and hsrp) apply to “virtual server routers,” which perform Layer 4 Server Load Balancing functions. A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address (addr) is the same as any configured virtual server IP address. Table 6-67 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. ifs disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default.

264

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Table 6-67 VRRP Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vr/track)
Command Syntax and Usage ports disable|enable When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. This command is disabled by default. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. This command is disabled by default. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this switch. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master, increasing Layer 4 efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrp disable|enable <priority (1-254)> Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. In networks where HSRP is used, enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master, optimizing routing efficiency. This command is disabled by default. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.

/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup
Virtual Router Group Menu
This feature allows the failover of individual groups of VIRs and VSRs. When Web hosting is shared between two or more customers on a single VRRP switch, you can group VIRs and VSRs to serve the high availability of a specific customer. If failover occurs on a customer link, the group of VIRs and VSRs associated with that customer alone will fail over to the backup switch. The VIRs and VSRs configured for the other customers on the master switch are not affected.

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

265

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Up to 16 virtual router groups can be configured on the switch.
[VRRP Virtual Router Vrgroup 1 Menu] track - Priority Tracking Menu name - Set virtual router group name add - Add virtual router to group rem - Remove virtual router from group prio - Set priority for virtual router group ena - Enable virtual router group dis - Disable virtual router group del - Delete virtual router group cur - Display current VRRP virtual router group configuration

Table 6-68 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup)
Command Syntax and Usage track Displays VRRP priority tracking menu for this virtual router group. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP, used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router. To view menu options, see page 267. name Defines virtual router group name up to eight characters. add <virtual router number (1-256)> Adds a virtual router to the group. Each virtual router group can have up to 16 virtual routers. rem <virtual router number (1-256)> Removes a virtual router from the group. prio <1-254> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. The default value is 100. During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup #/track), this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. ena Enables the virtual router group. dis Disables the virtual router group.

266

„

Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu
315393-E, October 2003

continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled. cur Displays the current VRRP virtual router group configuration. the priority will be increased for each active port on the VLAN on this virtual router group. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. October 2003 „ 267 . /cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup <vrgroup number>/ track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Menu This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers. the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the VRRP Tracking Menu (see page 274). This command is disabled by default. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. [VRRP Vrgroup ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur 1 Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP vrgroup tracking configuration Table 6-69 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results.0 Command Reference Table 6-68 Virtual Router Group Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the virtual router group. ports disable|enable When enabled.Alteon OS 21. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. the priority will be increased for each IP interface active on this virtual router group. Criteria are tracked dynamically. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.

This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router group. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. In networks where HSRP is used. the priority will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this virtual router group. reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. This command is disabled by default. 268 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router group for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance on the virtual router group that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. Enabling HSRP helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. the priority will be increased for each healthy real server behind the virtual server IP address of the same IP address as the virtual router on this virtual router group. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. hsrp disable|enable Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover.0 Command Reference Table 6-69 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/vrgroup/track) Command Syntax and Usage l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. optimizing routing efficiency.

used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router.Set renter priority . see page 274. vrid <virtual router ID (1-255)> Defines the virtual router ID. which forces all virtual routers on the Alteon Application Switch to either be master or backup as a group. Table 6-70 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group. where only one switch is active at any time. On each VRRP-capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router.Enable or disable preemption .Set interface number . To view menu options.Enable or disable sharing . October 2003 „ 269 .Set virtual router ID .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group Virtual Router Group Configuration [VRRP Virtual track vrid if prio adver preem share ena dis del cur Router Group Menu] . All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP interface (see if below) belongs. Tracking is Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP.Enable virtual router . Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address.Delete virtual router . NOTE – This option is required to be configured only when using at least two Alteon Application Switches in a hot-standby failover configuration.Priority Tracking Menu .Set advertisement interval .Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router. a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address. The vrid for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. Tracking is not needed if sharing (share) is enabled.Disable virtual router . The default virtual router ID is 1.Alteon OS 21.

this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same). 270 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. When priority tracking is used (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track or /cfg/l3/vrrp/vr #/track). The default value is 100.Alteon OS 21. Note that even when preem is disabled. share disable|enable Enables or disables virtual router sharing. cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group. this option is enabled. the priority for this virtual router will automatically be set to 255 (highest). October 2003 . this switch will process any traffic addressed to this virtual router. the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins.0 Command Reference Table 6-70 VRRP Virtual Router Group Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/group) Command Syntax and Usage if <interface number (1-256)> Selects a switch IP interface (between 1 and 256). this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration. ena Enables the virtual router group. When enabled. If this virtual router’s IP address (addr) is the same as the one used by the IP interface. if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master. the device with the highest IP interface address wins. This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds. During the master router election process. preem disable|enable Enables or disables master preemption. If there is a tie. dis Disables the virtual router group. The default switch IP interface number is 1. By default. this option is enabled. This can be any integer between 1 and 254. When enabled. By default. this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational criteria. prio <priority (1-254)> Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. The default is 1. adver <seconds (1-255)> Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. even when in backup mode. Alteon’s proprietary extension to VRRP.

ifs disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. This helps elect the main Layer 4 switch as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each physical switch port which has active Layer 4 processing on this switch. ports disable|enable When enabled. This command is disabled by default. Table 6-71 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable|enable When enabled. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and is forwarding traffic. October 2003 „ 271 . then the tracking option will be available only under group option. An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/group/track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration [Virtual Router vrs ifs ports l4pts reals hsrp hsrv cur Group Priority Tracking Menu] Enable/disable tracking master virtual routers Enable/disable tracking other interfaces Enable/disable tracking VLAN switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 switch ports Enable/disable tracking L4 real servers Enable/disable tracking HSRP Enable/disable tracking HSRP by VLAN Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration NOTE – If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled. This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same switch. increasing routing and load balancing efficiency. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch. The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN. This command is disabled by default. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. l4pts disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers.

272 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each healthy real server. HSRP is used with some types of routers for establishing router failover. October 2003 . optimizing routing efficiency. This helps elect the switch closest to the master HSRP router as the master. This command is disabled by default. Enable this switch option to increment only that vrrp instance that is on the same VLAN as the tagged hsrp master flagged packet. increasing Layer 4 efficiency. enable this switch option to increase the priority of this virtual router for each Layer 4 client-only port that receives HSRP advertisements.0 Command Reference Table 6-71 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vr/group/track) Command Syntax and Usage reals disable|enable When enabled for virtual server routers. This command is disabled by default.Alteon OS 21. hsrv disable|enable Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) is used to work in VLAN-tagged environments. This helps elect the switch with the largest server pool as the master. In networks where HSRP is used. This command is disabled by default. cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router. hsrp disable|enable Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) for this virtual router group.

Alteon OS 21. This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen (see auth above). del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface.0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/if <interface number> VRRP Interface Configuration NOTE – The interface-number (1 to 256) represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured. Table 6-72 VRRP Interface Menu Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/if) Command Syntax and Usage auth none|password Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication). passw <password> Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication parameters. or password (password authentication). October 2003 „ 273 . The IP interface itself is not deleted. [VRRP Interface auth passw del cur - 1 Menu] Set authentication types Set plain-text password Delete interface Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.

Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs . The default value is 2. l4pts <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for physical switch ports with active Layer 4 processing. The default value is 2.Set priority increment for L4 switch port tracking reals .Set priority increment for HSRP tracking hsrv . The default value is 2. 274 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. ports <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active ports on the virtual router’s VLAN. hsrp <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for switch ports with Layer 4 client-only processing that receive HSRP broadcasts. The default value is 2. The default value is 10. ifs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for active IP interfaces detected on this switch. October 2003 .Set priority increment for HSRP by VLAN tracking cur .Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports .Alteon OS 21. The default value is 2. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu” on page 264).Display current VRRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels during the master router election process. reals <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for healthy real servers behind the virtual server router.Set priority increment for L4 real server tracking hsrp .Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking l4pts .0 Command Reference /cfg/l3/vrrp/track VRRP Tracking Configuration [VRRP Tracking Menu] vrs . the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu. Table 6-73 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage vrs <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch.

roundrobin Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. Table 6-74 Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc) Option strict Description The gateway number determines its level of preference. October 2003 „ 275 . enabled gateway in line. All gateway requests to the same destination IP address are resolved to the same gateway. Gateway #1 acts as the preferred default IP gateway until it fails or is disabled. The switch sends each new gateway request to the next healthy. a metric can be set to determine which primary gateway is selected. These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu (see page 264) are enabled. which are described in the table “Default Gateway Metrics (/cfg/l3/metrc)” on page 275. This provides basic gateway load balancing.0 Command Reference Table 6-73 VRRP Tracking Options (/cfg/l3/vrrp/track) Command Syntax and Usage hsrv <0-254> Defines the priority increment value (1 through 254) for vrrp instances that are on the same VLAN.Alteon OS 21. These priority tracking options only define increment values. at which point the next in line will take over as the default IP gateway. There are two metrics. cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values. /cfg/l3/metrc <metric name> Default Gateway Metrics If multiple default gateways are configured and enabled. The default value is 10.

see page 279. When set to allow.Alteon OS 21. see page 277. To view options. To view menu options. pgroup <pattern group ID (1-128)> Displays Pattern Match Group Menu. seclog <rate threshold (in packets)> Defines the rate threshold for security logging by the number of packets per second. To view menu options. The default is allow. see page 278.0 Command Reference /cfg/security Security Configuration Menu [Security Menu] ipacl pgroup port udpblast seclog fragment cur IP Address ACL Menu Pattern Match Group Menu Port Security Menu UDP Blast Menu Set rate threshold for security logging Set out of order IP fragments handling in filtering Display current Security configuration Table 6-75 Security Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/security) Command Syntax and Usage ipacl Displays IP address Access Control Menu. October 2003 . cur Displays the current security configuration. fragment <allow|deny> Sets the handling of out-of-order IP fragment packets during filtering. the switch will let through all the out-of-order fragments in filtering. the switch will drop these packets. port <port number> Displays Port Security Menu. 276 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. udpblast Displays UDP Blast Menu. Any packets above the current threshold will be logged. see page 280. To view menu options. When set to deny.

October 2003 „ 277 .Add IP Address/Mask for access control rem . defined by the IP address/mask pair. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E.Display All IP address/mask for access control Table 6-76 IP Address ACL Menu Options (/cfg/sec/ipacl) Command Syntax and Usage add <IP address> <IP mask> Adds range of source IP addresses to be denied.Alteon OS 21. [IP ACL Menu] add . then the client traffic is blocked.Remove IP Address/Mask for access control cur . the client source IP address is checked against this pool of addresses. rem <IP address> <IP mask> Removes range of source IP addresses to be denied. When traffic ingresses the switch. defined by the IP address/mask pair. If a match is found.0 Command Reference /cfg/security/ipacl IP Address Access Control List Configuration Menu Alteon OS can be configured with IP access control lists (ACLs) composed of ranges of client IP addresses that are to be denied access to the switch. cur Displays current IP addresses ranges in Access Control List.

Remove SLB string from group del .Delete pattern group cur . the packet content can be detected and thus denied access to the network. Configure the binary or ASCII pattern strings.Display current configuration Table 6-77 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage name <31 character name>|none Specifies a descriptive name for this pattern group. also on page 331. To configure SLB strings. When a pattern group is applied to a deny filter.Alteon OS 21. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/cur command. and then apply the group to a filter. „ To view existing strings and their ID numbers.Add SLB string to group rem . add <string ID> „ Adds a pre-configured SLB string to this pattern group by the string ID number. October 2003 . By applying the patterns and groups to a deny filter.0 Command Reference /cfg/security/pgroup <pattern group number> Pattern Matching Menu When a virus or other attack contains multiple patterns or strings. Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. rem <SLB string ID> Removes an SLB string from this pattern group. NOTE – You can only add the binary or ASCII strings to a pattern matching group. The filtering commands in Alteon OS Security Pack allow the administrator to define groups of patterns and place them into groups.Set pattern group name add . the switch will match any of the strings or patterns within that group before denying and dropping the packet. name the pattern group. use the /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add command described on page 331. it is useful to combine them into one group and give the group a name that is easy to remember. del Deletes the pattern group. [Pattern Match Group 1 Menu] name . Up to five patterns can be combined into a single pattern group. 278 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. group them into a pattern group.

Enable DOS protection on ports connected to any network that could be the source of an attack.255). TCP sequence number is zero and the FIN. PortZero: TCP/UDP Packets whose source or destination port is zero. Nullscan: TCP sequence number is zero and all control bits are zeros. /cfg/security/port <port number> Port Security Configuration Menu Alteon OS can protect switch ports against a variety of Denial of Service (DOS) attacks including Port Smurf. Enabling this command will allow detection of the following DoS attacks: Smurf: Fraggle: Xmascan: ICMP ping request to a broadcast destination IP (x. ipacl disable|enable Enables or disables IP access control List denial on this port. ScanSynFin: SYN and FIN bits are set in the packet. [Port 1 Menu] dos ipacl udpblast cur - Enable/disable DOS attack detection Enable/disable IP ACL processing Enable/disable UDP Blast processing Display current port configuration Table 6-78 Port Security Menu Options (/cfg/security/port) Command Syntax and Usage dos disable|enable Enables or disables Denial of Service (DOS) protection on this port. Nullscan. Fraggle.x. URG and PSH bits are set. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. and ScanSynFin. PortZero. udpblast disable|enable Enables or disables UDP blast protection on this port. LandAttack. Xmascan. Blat: TCP packets with SIP!=DIP and SPORT=DPORT. LandAttack: Packets with source IP equal to destination IP.Alteon OS 21.x. October 2003 „ 279 .0 Command Reference Table 6-77 Pattern Matching Group Menu Options (/cfg/sec/pgroup) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current configuration of this pattern group. UDP packet sent to a broadcast destination IP (x.x.255). cur Displays the current security configuration on this port.x.

UDP traffic will be dropped. [UDP Blast Protection Menu] add . the last number that can be used is 5300.Alteon OS 21. If the number of packets on this port range exceeds the maximum packet rate per second. When the maximum number of packets/second is reached. If the first port number is 300. October 2003 . UDP traffic is shut down on those ports. While you can configure multiple port ranges. The maximum port range is 5000. You can specify a series of UDP port ranges and the allowed packet limit for that range. 280 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. as well as the maximum packet rate per second. using any integer from 1 to 65535. rem <UDP port number or range (first-last)> Removes UDP port or range for UDP blast protection.Default packet rate for UDP blast protection cur . thus ensuring that backend servers are not flooded with data and disabled. Alteon OS can be configured to restrict the amount of traffic allowed on any UDP port.Remove UDP port/range for UDP blast protection default .Display all UDP blast protection Ports Table 6-79 UDP Blast Protection Menu Options (/cfg/sec/udpblast) Command Syntax and Usage add <UDP port number or range (first-last)> [packet rate] Adds UDP port or range for UDP blast protection. the sum of ranges cannot exceed the maximum of 5000 ports.0 Command Reference /cfg/security/udpblast UDP Blast Protection Configuration Menu Malicious attacks over UDP protocol ports are becoming a common way to bring down real servers. cur Displays all UDP blast protection ports. default <packet rate> Defines the default packet rate for UDP blast protection.Add UDP port/range for UDP blast protection rem . Alteon OS supports up to 5000 UDP port numbers.

see Chapter 2. The screen display can be captured. edited. For a complete description of how to use setup. paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch.” To start the setup program. enter: Configuration# setup /cfg/dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen. When using Telnet to configure a new switch. at the Configuration# prompt. BOOTP. Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. VLAN parameters. enter: Configuration# dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default values. The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP. and placed in a script file.0 Command Reference /cfg/setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time. October 2003 „ 281 . IP. port speed/mode.Alteon OS 21. To start the dump program. Spanning Tree. at the Configuration# prompt. which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection. “First-Time Configuration. as described on page 282. and IP interfaces.

The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration. the active configuration will be replaced with the commands found in the specified configuration file. and not locked by any application).0 Command Reference /cfg/ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the ptcfg command is used. the apply action will be performed automatically. /cfg/gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gtcfg command is used. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. NOTE – The output file is formatted with line-breaks but no carriage returns—the file cannot be viewed with editors that require carriage returns (such as Microsoft Notepad). the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the ptcfg command and must be writable (set with proper permission. If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command. at the Configuration# prompt. at the Configuration# prompt. 282 „ Chapter 6: The Configuration Menu 315393-E. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. and filename is the name of the target script configuration file. October 2003 . To start the switch configuration download. To start the switch configuration upload. the switch’s active configuration commands (as displayed using /cfg/dump) will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server. enter: Configuration# gtcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname.Alteon OS 21. enter: Configuration# ptcfg <TFTP server> <filename> [-m | -mgmt | -d | -data] where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. The configuration loaded using gtcfg is not activated until the apply command is used.

In an average network that employs multiple servers without server load balancing. With this software feature. based on a variety of load-balancing algorithms. it can become overutilized.CHAPTER 7 The SLB Configuration Menu Server Load Balancing (SLB) allows you to configure the Alteon Application Switch to balance user session traffic among a pool of available servers that provide shared services. This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for configuring Server Load Balancing (SLB) on the Alteon Application Switch. October 2003 . 283 315393-E. each server usually specializes in providing one or two unique services. Refer to your Alteon OS Application Guide for detailed information on this feature. Placing this kind of strain on a server can decrease the performance of the entire network as user requests are rejected by the server and then resubmitted by the user stations. If one of these servers provides access to applications or data that is in high demand. the switch is aware of the services provided by each server and can direct user session traffic to an appropriate server.

To view menu options. October 2003 . port <port number> Displays the menu for setting physical switch port states for Layer 4 activity.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. To view menu options. filt <filter ID (1-2048)> Displays the menu for Filtering and Application Redirection. To view menu options. To view menu options. see page 323. see page 292. gslb Displays the menu for configuring Global Server Load Balancing. see page 329. see page 307. virt <virtual server number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for defining virtual servers. 284 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb SLB Configuration [Layer 4 Menu] real group virt filt port gslb layer7 wap sync adv advhc pip on off cur Real Server Menu Real Server Group Menu Virtual Server Menu Filtering Menu Layer 4 Port Menu Global SLB Menu Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu WAP Menu Config Synch Menu Layer 4 Advanced Menu Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu Proxy IP Address Menu Globally turn Layer 4 processing ON Globally turn Layer 4 processing OFF Display current Layer 4 configuration Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage real <real server number (1-1023)> Displays the menu for configuring real servers. To view menu options. see page 286. layer7 Displays later 7 Resource Definition Menu. To view menu options. group <real server group number (1-1024)> Displays the menu for placing real servers into real server groups. see page 299. see page 321.

require Layer 4 software services. see page 333.0 Command Reference Table 7-1 Server Load Balancing Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb) Command Syntax and Usage wap Displays WAP Menu. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options. on Globally turns on Layer 4 software services for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection. off Globally disables Layer 4 services. Filtering and Layer 4 (Server Load Balancing) Filters configured to allow. deny. see page 344. To view menu options.Alteon OS 21. These filters are not affected by the Server Load Balancing on and off commands in this menu. see page 335. but the software processes will no longer be active in the switch cur Displays the current Server Load Balancing configuration. deny. When the pip is defined. All configuration information will remain in place (if applied or saved). sync Displays the Synch Peer Switch Menu. or NAT traffic. Application Redirection filters. Enabling Layer 4 services is not necessary for using filters only to allow. To view menu options. adv Displays the Layer 4 Advanced Menu. October 2003 „ 285 . however. see page 338. To view menu options. see page 332. This option can be performed only after the optional Layer 4 software is enabled (see “Activating Optional Software on page 353). Layer 4 processing must be turned on before redirection filters will work. advhc Displays Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu. pip This menu is used to set the switch proxy IP address using dotted decimal notation. or perform Network Address Translation (NAT) on traffic do not require Layer 4 software to be activated.To view options. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.

Set IP addr of real server name .Set number of failed attempts to declare server DOWN restr . October 2003 .Add real port to server remport .Layer 7 Command Menu ids .Set interval between health checks retry .Set number of successful attempts to declare server UP addport .Display current real server configuration 286 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Remove real port from server remote .Set server weight maxcon .Delete real server cur .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <server number> Real Server SLB Configuration [Real server 1 Menu] layer7 .Enable real server dis .Alteon OS 21.Set backup real server inter .Enable/disable source MAC address substitution ena .Disable real server del .Set minutes inactive connection remains open backup .Enable/disable remote site operation proxy .Enable/disable client proxy operation submac .IDS Command Menu rip .Set server name weight .Set maximum number of connections tmout .

This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server by a natural language keyword value. By default. maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each real server. A setting of 10 would assign the server roughly 10 times the number of connections as a server with a weight of 1. When this command is used. see page 290. the number of maximum connections is set at 20. To view menu options. Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics (see “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 297). client requests will be dropped by the virtual server. see page 290. To view menu options.0 Command Reference This menu is used for configuring information about real servers that participate in a server pool for Server Load Balancing or Application Redirection. client requests will be sent to the backup/overflow server or backup/overflow server group. New connections will be issued again to this server once the number of current connections has decreased below the maxcon setting. rip <real server IP address> Sets the IP address of the real server in dotted decimal format.Alteon OS 21. name <string. each real server is given a weight setting of 1.000. maxcon <maximum connections (0-200000)> Sets the maximum number of connections that this server should simultaneously support. weight <real server weight (1-48)> Sets the weighting value (1 to 48) that this real server will be given in the load balancing algorithms. The required parameters are: „ „ Real server IP address Real server enabled (disabled by default) Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays the Layer 7 Menu. October 2003 „ 287 . This option sets a threshold as an artificial barrier. If no backup servers/server group are configured. ids Displays Intrusion Detection Server/system menu. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. such that new connections will not be issued to this server if the maxcon limit is reached. and the administrator will be warned if the server does not respond. By default. If all servers in a real server group for a virtual server reach their maxcon limit at the same time. the address entered is PINGed to determine if the server is up. Higher weighting values force the server to receive more connections than the other servers configured in the same real server group.

When a client makes a request. the switch will activate the backup real server until the original becomes operative again. you can set the number of minutes to wait before removing orphan table entries. the switch verifies that real servers and their corresponding services are operational by opening a TCP connection to each service. such as when a client application is abnormally terminated by the client’s system. the data is transferred until the client ends the session. if the real server becomes inoperative. Settings must be specified in even numbered increments between 2 and 30 minutes. In certain circumstances. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default is 8 attempts 288 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default interval is 2 seconds. the switch pings servers to determine their status. this option sets how long an idle client is allowed to remain associated with a particular server. and the session table entry is then removed. use this option to assign a backup real server number. Determining the health of each real server is a necessary function for Layer 4 switching. Using the tmout option. the session is recorded in the table. Every client-to-server session being load balanced is recorded in the switch’s Session Table. these orphaned entries must be aged out of the binding table. If the real server reaches its maxcon (maximum connections) limit. When persistent is activated. TCP/UDP connections will remain registered in the switch’s binding table. An interval of “0” disables health checking for the server. The backup server is also used in overflow situations. In order to prevent table overflow. retry <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this real server inoperative. The same backup/overflow server may be assigned to more than one real server at the same time inter <number of seconds between health checks (0-60)> Sets the interval between real server health verification attempts. For UDP services. The range is from 1 to 63 attempts. The default setting is 10. The inter option lets you choose the time between health checks. Then.Alteon OS 21. the backup comes online to provide additional processing power until the original server becomes desaturated. This option is also used with the Persistent option (see /cfg/slb/virt/pbind). The range is from 1 to 60 seconds.0 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage tmout <even number of minutes (2-32768)> Sets the number of minutes an inactive session remains open (in even numbered increments). using the defined service ports configured as part of each virtual service. backup <real server number (1-1023)>|none Sets the real server used as the backup/overflow server for this real server. October 2003 . To prevent loss of service if a particular real server fails. For TCP services. The default is 4 attempts restr <number of consecutive health checks (1-63)> Sets the number of successful health check attempts required before declaring a UDP service operational.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables proxy IP address translation.0 Command Reference Table 7-2 Real Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real) Command Syntax and Usage addport <real server port (2–65534)> Add multiple service ports to the server. remote disable|enable Enables or disables remote site operation for this server. By default. This option should be enabled when the real IP address supplied above represents a remote server (real or virtual) that this switch will access as part of its Global Server Load Balancing network. NOTE – This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown. disables this real server until it is explicitly re-enabled. as it will delete any configuration options that have been set for this real server. enables this real server for operation until explicitly disabled. the real server can process virtual server requests associated with its real server group. By default. October 2003 „ 289 . del Deletes this real server from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. when the apply and save commands are used. this option is disabled. With this option enabled (default). A disabled server will no longer process virtual server requests as part of the real server group to which it is assigned. cur Displays the current configuration information for this real server. When enabled. This removes the real server from operation within its real server groups. this option is disabled. submac disable|enable Enables or disables source MAC address substitution. remport <real server port (2–65534)> Remove multiple service ports from the server.Alteon OS 21. when the apply and save commands are used. Use this command with caution. See /oper/slb/ena on page 350 for an operations-level command. dis Disables this real server from Layer 4 service. This option. This option. ena You must perform this command to enable this real server for Layer 4 service. a client request from any application can be proxied using a load-balancing Proxy IP address (PIP). See /oper/slb/dis on page 350 for an operations-level command that permits graceful server shutdown. This option does not perform a graceful server shutdown.

Refer to your Application Guide for more information. October 2003 . This server gets the client request. exclude disable|enable Enables or disables exclusionary string matching. this option is disabled. This option is used if you want to designate a specific server to assign cookies only. cookser disable|enable Enables or disables the real server to handle client requests that don’t contain a cookie. An Intrusion Detection System gathers and analyzes information from various areas within a computer or a network to identify possible security breaches.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/real <server number>/layer7 Real Server Layer 7 Configuration [Layer 7 Commands Menu] addlb . By default. By default.Remove URL path for URL load balance cookser . which include both intrusions (attacks from outside the organization) and misuse (attacks from within the organization).Enable/disable cookie assignment server exclude . and embeds the IP address of the real server that will handle the subsequent requests from the client. Table 7-3 Layer 7 Commands Menu Options (/cfg/slb/real/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage addlb <URL path ID [1-128]> Adds the predefined URL loadbalance string ID to the real server.Add URL path for URL load balance remlb . cur Displays the current real server configuration.Enable/disable exclusionary string matching cur . 290 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. /cfg/slb/real <real server number>/ids Real server IDS Configuration Menu Intrusion Detection System (IDS) is a type of security management system for computers and networks. this option is disabled. assigns the cookie. remlb <URL path ID [1-128]> Removes the predefined URL loadbalance string ID from the real server.Display current real server configuration This menu is used for entering commands and strings for Layer 7 processing.Alteon OS 21.

Override community string for SNMP HC cur . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This OID overrides the OID for SNMP health checks.0 Command Reference [Real Server 1 IDS Menu] idsvlan . October 2003 „ 291 . comm <SNMP health check community string to override group community string> Overrides community string for SNMP health checks.Override OID for SNMP HC comm .Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current real server configuration.Set Port for ID Server oid . oid <SNMP health check object identifier to override group OID> Specifies the object identifier (OID).Display current real server configuration Table 7-4 IDS Configuration Menu options (/cfg/slb/real/ids) Command Syntax and Usage idsvlan <vlan number (1-4090> Defines VLAN ID for Intrusion Detection Server. NOTE – IDS can only be configured on real servers between 1-62. idsport <port number> Defines port for Intrusion Detection Server.Set Vlan ID for ID Server idsport .

Set an advance group health check formula mhash .Set health check type backup . Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage metric leastconns|roundrobin|minmisses|hash|response|bandwidth|phash Set the load balancing metric used for determining which real server in the group will be the target of the next client request.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection idsrprt . The default is tcp.Delete real server group cur .Display current group configuration This menu is used for combining real servers into real server groups.Set metric used to select next server in group content . Each real server group should consist of all the real servers which provide a specific service for load balancing. content <filename>|//<host>/<filename>|none This option defines the specific content which is examined during health checks.Enable/disable VIP health checking in DSR mode ids .Set backup real server or group name . Each real server can belong to more than one group. 292 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set health check content health . The content depends on the type of health check specified in the health option (see below).Remove real server del . See “SLB Health Check Types” on page 294.Set real server failure threshold viphlth .Set real server group name realthr .Set Intrusion Detection Port idsfld . October 2003 . health link|arp|icmp|tcp|http|dns|pop3|smtp|nntp|ftp|imap|sslh |radius-auth|radiusacc|script<n>|udpdns|wsp|wtp|wtls|ldap |snmp<n>|tftp Sets the type of health checking performed.Enable/disable Intrusion Detection Group Flood advhlth .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/group <real server group number> Real Server Group SLB Configuration [Real server group 1 Menu] metric .Set minmisses hash parameter add . Real server groups are used both for Server Load Balancing and Application Redirection.Alteon OS 21.Add real server rem . The default setting is leastconns. Each group must consist of at least one real server. See “Server Load Balancing Metrics” on page 297.

This feature is enabled by default. idsfld disable|enable Enables or disables the Intrusion Detection flood. The default threshold is 0. realthr <real servers (1-15. the number reaches this minimum limit. the backup server/server group comes online to provide additional processing power until one of the original servers becomes desaturated. Then.Alteon OS 21. When viphlth is disabled. which also means the option is disabled viphlth disable|enable Enables or disables VIP health checking in a service. This feature can only be configured on real server groups between 1-63. the switch will activate the backup real server /server group until one of the original real servers becomes operative again. a SYSLOG ALERT message is sent to the configured SYSLOG servers stating that the real server threshold has been reached for the concerned server load balancing group. use this option to assign a backup real server/real server group number. ids disable|enable Enables or disables this group of servers for IDS load balancing. idsrprt <real server port (2-65534)>|any Sets real server port for the Intrusion Detection Server. if the real server group becomes inoperative. If all the servers in the real server group reach their maxcon (maximum connections) limit. The same backup/overflow server/server group may be assigned to more than one real server group at the same time. name <maximum 31 characters>|none Defines a 15-character alias for each Real Server Group. it works only when the service has DSR (Direct Server Return) feature enabled. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage backup r<real server number (1-256)>|g<group number>|none Sets the real server or real server group used as the backup/overflow server/server group for this real server group. October 2003 „ 293 . whether DSR is enabled or disabled. the switch uses RIP to perform all health checks. To prevent loss of service if the entire real server group fails. This will enable the network administrator to quickly identify the server group by a natural language keyword value. If any time. 0 for disabled)> Specifies a minimum number of real servers available. However. The backup server/server group is also used in overflow situations.

You will be prompted for the ID number for the real server to remove from this group.Alteon OS 21. You will be prompted to enter the number of the real server to add to this group. This removes the group from operation under all virtual servers it is assigned to. or you can also set the formula expression as none. This command also supports a string expression which is up to 128 characters long. 294 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Refer to your Application Guide for their detailed description. you can specify the type of health check for the group of real servers. 128>|none Defines an advanced health check formula expression for the real servers. the virtual server will become inoperative. mhash 24|32 <number of sip bits used for minmisses hash> Defines the minmisses hash parameter for this real server as either 24 or 32 bits. SLB Health Check Types Using the health command. Using parenthesis with the boolean operators. The health check options are described in the following table. This command supports two boolean operators. del Deletes this real server group from the Layer 4 software configuration. cur Displays the current configuration parameters for this real server group. you can create a boolean expression to state the health of the server group. rem <real server number (1-1023)> Remove a real server from this real server group. October 2003 . By default the minmiss algorithm uses the upper 24-bits of the source IP address to calculate the real server that the traffic should be sent to when the minmiss metric is selected. Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description link Checks status of port for each server for IDSLB group only. Use this command with caution: if you remove the only group that is assigned to a virtual server.0 Command Reference Table 7-5 Real Server Group Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/group) Command Syntax and Usage advhlth <(1&2|3.. This command allows you to create a boolean expression to health check the real server group based on the state of the virtual services. AND or OR that are used to manipulate TRUE or FLALSE values.). add <real server number (1-1023)> Adds a real server to this real server group.You can also select all 32-bits of the source IP address to hash to the real server.

0 GET occurs. check that the filename specified in content is accessible on the server through anonymous login.1 GETS when a HOST: header is required to check that the URL content is specified in content command. nntp For newsgroup services. the user and server exchange security certificates.Alteon OS 21. dns For Domain Name Service. check that the domain name specified in content can be resolved by the server. tcp Opens and closes a TCP/IP connection to the server for TCP service. use HTTP 1. and establish a session ID for each session. pop3 For user mail service. pings the server. During the handshake. http For HTTP service. smtp For mail-server services. Note: If the content is not specified. the health check will revert back to TCP on the port that is being load balanced. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. icmp For Layer 3 health checking. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the serve sslh Enables the switch to query the health of the SSL servers by sending an SSL client “Hello” packet and then verify the contents of the server’s “Hello” response. negotiate an encryption and compression method.0 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description arp Sends an ARP request for Layer 2 health checking. October 2003 „ 295 . check that the newsgroup name specified in content is accessible on the server. check that the user specified in content is accessible on the server. imap For user mail service. ftp For FTP services. an HTTP/1. check that the user:password account specified in content exists on the server. Otherwise.

0 Command Reference Table 7-6 SLB Health Check Types (/cfg/slb/group/health) Option and Description radius-auth. snmp <n> Enables the use of SNMP-based health checks. The content under /cfg/ slb/adv/waphc (see page 338) must also be configured. wsp Enables connectionless WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. wtp Enables connection-oriented WTP + WSP content health checks for WAP gateways. check that the user:password value specified in content exists on the Alteon Application Switch and the server. The health check fails if the switch receives an error packet from the real server. October 2003 . The secrt value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. script <n> Enables the use of script-based health checks in send/expect format to check for application and content availability. The content under /cfg/slb/adv/waphc (see page 338) must also be configured wtls Provides Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) Hello-based health check for encrypted and connection-oriented WTLS traffic on port 9203. the switch transmits TFTP read requests (RRQ) to all servers in the group. <n> denotes the health script number (1-5). tftp Sets the health check type to TFTP. radius-acc For RADIUS remote access server authentication. At regular intervals. ldap Sets the health check type to LDAP. This protocol enables the user to request a file from the server. 296 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. <n> denotes the health script number (1-8). the network administrator must also configure the /cfg/slb/ secrt parameter. udpdns Allows the user to perform health checking using UDP DNS queries. The health check is successful if the server responds to the RRQ.Alteon OS 21. To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server.

Server load with this metric becomes most evenly balanced as the number of active clients increases. For Application Redirection. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server. new connections are issued to each server in turn: the first real server in this group gets the first connection. With this option. When all the real servers in this group have received at least one connection. leastconns Least connections. with the fastest servers typically getting the most connections over time. you can set a number of metrics for selecting which real server in a group gets the next client request. the second real server gets the next connection. and so on. and shut down connections faster than slower servers. it is not as effective as minmisses when servers leave and reenter service. For Server Load Balancing. the issuing process starts over with the first real server. roundrobin Round robin. With this option. process. The hash metric should be used if the statistical load balancing achieved using minmisses is not as optimal as desired. This option is the most self-regulating. This is particularly useful for maximizing successful cache hits. the hash metric uses IP address information in the client request to select a server. When minmisses is specified for a real server group performing Application Redirection. These metrics are described in the following table: Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description minmisses Minimum misses. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. October 2003 „ 297 . helping to maximize successful cache hits. followed by the third real server. Although the hash metric can provide more even load balancing at any given instance. hash Like minmisses. This metric is optimized for Application Redirection. the number of connections currently open on each real server is measured in real time. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained on the server between sessions. This is particularly useful in caching applications. all requests from a specific client will be sent to the same server.0 Command Reference Server Load Balancing Metrics Using the metric command. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. due to their ability to accept. consider using the hash metric. This is useful for applications where client information must be retained between sessions. The server with the fewest current connections is considered to be the best choice for the next client connection request. Best statistical load balancing is achieved when the IP address destinations of load balanced frames are spread across a broad range of IP subnets. Minmisses can also be used for Server Load Balancing. all requests for a specific IP destination address will be sent to the same server. When specified for a real server group performing Server Load Balancing. If the Load Balancing statistics indicate that one server is processing significantly more requests over time than other servers.Alteon OS 21.

With this option. The weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to a moving average of response time. NOTE – Under the leastconns and roundrobin metrics. With the phash metric. the real server weights are adjusted so they are inversely proportional to the number of octets that the real server processes during a given interval. October 2003 . Weights are not applied when using the hash or minmisses metrics.0 Command Reference Table 7-7 Real Server Group Metrics (/cfg/slb/group/metric) Option and Description response Real server response time.Alteon OS 21. The higher the bandwidth used. the first hash will always be the same even if a real server is down. a higher proportion of connections are given to servers with higher weights. it will rehash for that request based on the actual number of servers that are up. With this option. 298 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This can improve load balancing among servers of different performance levels. the switch monitors and records the amount of time that each real server takes to reply to a health check. If the first hash hits a dead server. This results in a request always being sent to a server that is up. phash The phash metric utilizes the best features of the hash and minmiss metrics. the smaller is the weight assigned to that server. With phash enabled. bandwidth Bandwidth Metric. when real servers are configured with weights (see the weight option on page 287). the switch supports an even load distribution (hash) and stable server assignment (minmiss) even when a server in the group goes down. The response time is used to adjust the real server weights.

and so on. www2. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. specify the name as none.Alteon OS 21. and the Internet group code (. An example would be foocorp. and so forth). The virtual server created within the switch will respond to ARPs and PINGs from network ports as if it was a normal server. To clear the dname. The maximum number of characters that can be used in a domain name is 34.edu. To define the hostname. and so forth).com. Client requests directed to the virtual server’s IP address will be balanced among the real servers available to it through real server group assignments. see the sport command on page 309. . ftp.org. ftp.com. dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for this virtual server.gov. vip <virtual server IP address> Sets the IP address of the virtual server using dotted-decimal notation. . To get more information about well-known ports. It does not include the hostname portion (www. the service number. see hname below.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number> Virtual Server SLB Configuration [Virtual Server service vip dname cont layr3 ena dis del cur 1 Menu] Virtual Service Menu Set IP addr of virtual server Set domain name of virtual server Set BW Contract Enable/disable layer 3 only balancing Enable virtual server Disable virtual server Delete virtual server Display current virtual configuration This menu is used for configuring the virtual servers which will be the target for client requests for Server Load Balancing. The virtual port name can be a well-known port name. To view services menu options. The domain name typically includes the name of the company or organization. see page 301. Configuring a virtual server requires the following parameters: „ „ „ Creating a virtual server IP address Adding TCP/UDP port and real server group Enabling the virtual server (disabled by default) Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage service <virtual port or name> Displays the Virtual Services Menu. such as http. . October 2003 „ 299 .

ena Enables this virtual server.Alteon OS 21. 300 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 7-8 Virtual Server Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt) Command Syntax and Usage cont <BWM contract (1-256)> Enter a new Bandwidth Management Contract for this virtual service. This option activates the virtual server within the switch so that it can service client requests sent to its defined IP address. This option is necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is divided across different simultaneous connections. When the layr3 option is enabled (disabled by default). If the real server to which the client is assigned becomes unavailable. October 2003 . and also in applications where TCP fragments are generated. the client IP address is used with the client Layer 4 port number to produce a session identifier. layr3 disable|enable Normally. del This command removes this virtual server from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. the Layer 4 software will allow the client to connect to a different server. By default. all services under this virtual server are assigned this BW contract. However. All the frames that match this virtual server services are assigned this BW contract if the previously assigned contract for the frame has lower or equal precedence of the virtual server contract. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual server. the BW contract can be changed for a selected virtual server with /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <number>/cont. cur Displays the current configuration of the specified virtual server. It associates all the connections from the same client with the same real server while any connection exists between them. The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. Use this command with caution. dis This option disables the virtual server so that it no longer services client requests. the switch uses only the client IP address as the session identifier.

October 2003 „ 301 .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name> Virtual Server Service Configuration This menu is used for configuring services assigned to a virtual server. The following example shows a menu for http (port 80) services. See page 305 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 554 for RTSP. [Virtual Server group rport hname httpslb cont urlcont pbind rcount dbind udp frag nonat dnsslb direct del cur - 1 http Service Menu] Set real server group number Set real port Set hostname Set HTTP SLB processing Set BW contract for this virtual service Set BW cont of an SLB string specific to this service Set persistent binding type Set multi response count Enable/disable delayed binding Enable/disable UDP balancing Enable/disable remapping UDP server fragments Enable/disable only substituting MAC addresses Enable/disable DNS query load balancing Enable/disable direct access mode Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. NOTE – Select virtual service port 554 to configure RTSP traffic.Alteon OS 21.

based on browser type „ urlhash: Enable or disable URL hashing based on URI „ headerhash: Hashes on any HTTP header value.com” would be the full host/ domain name for the service. 302 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Note: If you enter 0 for the service contract. You will be prompted to enter the number (1 to 256) of the real server group to add to this service. „ others: Requires inputs for a particular header field You may choose to combine or select applications to load balance using the commands and and/or or. October 2003 . you could specify www as the hostname. For example: „ „ httpslb <application> httpslb <application> and|or <application> cont <BWM Contract (0-256). to add a hostname for Web services. The format for this command is: # hname <hostname> For example.Alteon OS 21.com” was defined (above). The default number of contracts is set at 256 for Alteon OS. this is the same as the virtual port (service virtual port). starting point of the cookie value. To clear the hostname for a service. rport <real server port (0-65534)> Defines the real server TCP or UDP port assigned to this service. use the command: # hname none httpslb urlslb|host|cookie|browser|urlhash|headerhash|others Load balances on the following applications: „ urlslb: Enable or disable URL SLB „ host: Enable or disable for virtual hosting „ cookie: Enable or disable cookie-based SLB for cookie-based preferential load balancing. You will be prompted for the following: Cookie name. the switch will map the virtual port to this real port. hname <hostname>|none Sets the hostname for a service added. enable/disable checking for cookie in URI „ browser: Enable or disable SLB. number of bytes to be extracted. By default. If rport is configured to be different than the virtual port defined in /cfg/slb/virt <number>/service <virtual port>.0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets a real server group for this service. it will carry the value entered for the Virtual Server IP (vip) contract. “www. If a dname of “foocorp. The default is set at 1.foocorp. This is used in conjunction with dname (above) to create a full host/domain name for individual services. 0 for VIP default> Sets a Bandwidth Management contract for this virtual service.

different services from the same client may not map to the same server. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. and security. The disable option allows you to disable presistent binding. HTTPS). The cookie option uses a cookie defined in the HTTP header or placed in the URI for hashing. which is a set of protocols built on top of TCP/IP that allow an application server and user to communicate over an encrypted HTTP session.Alteon OS 21. This option is disabled by default. The session ID is a value comprising 32 random bytes chosen by the SSL server that gets stored in a session hash table. Enabling this command protects the server from Denial of Service (DoS) attacks. if it has previously been enabled for a particular application. they will be connected to the most appropriate real server based on the load balancing metric. This may be necessary for some server applications where state information about the client system is retained on the server over a series of sequential connections. such as with SSL (Secure Socket Layer. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple virtual services and each service requires a separate bandwidth. In Alteon OS 21. Web site search results. non-repudiation.0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract of a string specific to this virtual service. An alternative approach may be to use the real server group metrics minmisses or hash (see Server Load Balancing Metrics). or until the maximum count is reached. HTTP and HTTPs traffic from the same client will map to the same server irrespective of the load balancing metric used. October 2003 „ 303 . The Alteon Application Switch will examine each server response until the cookie is found. The default number is 1. all subsequent SSL sessions which present the same session ID will be directed to the same real server.2 Application Guide. For detailed information on Cookie-Based Persistence. When the client resumes activity after their connection has been aged out. Whereas. SSL provides authentication. see the Persistence chapter in the Alteon OS 20. dbind disable|enable Enables or disables Layer 4 Delayed Binding for TCP service and ports. By enabling the sslid option. or multi-page Web forms. pbind clientip|cookie<p|r|i>|sslid|disable Enables or disables persistent bindings for a real server (disabled by default). with clientip command enabled. „ „ „ „ The clientip option uses the client IP address as an identifier. see “Cookie-Based Persistence” on page 305. since the services are related. rcount <response count number (1–16)> Sets the maximum response counter for cookie-based persistence. The sslid option is for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL).0. and associates all connections from the same client with the same real server until the client becomes inactive and the connection is aged out of the binding table. The connection timeout value (set in the Real Server Menu) is used to control how long these inactive but persistent connections remain associated with their real servers. The default is set at 1024. For more information on cookie option.

frag disable|enable Enables or disables remapping server fragments for virtual port. you have to bind to a new server every time. you must activate UDP balancing for the particular virtual servers that clients will communicate with using UDP. 304 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. Since no session is created. This option is used for Direct Server Return (DSR) in an one-armed load balancing setup. In those environments. disable caching on that filter for optimal performance. You can configure this option if the service(s) to be load balanced include UDP and TCP: for example. no session table entry is created. so that frames returning from server to the client do not have to pass through the switch. as it will delete the options that have been set for this virtual service. Note: If applying a filter to the same virtual server IP address on which UDP load balancing is enabled. DNS uses UDP and TCP. nonat disable|enable Enables or disables substituting only the MAC address of the real server (disabled by default).0 Command Reference Table 7-9 Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service) Command Syntax and Usage udp disable|enable|stateless Enables or disables UDP load balancing for a virtual port (disabled by default). see the cache command in Table 7-14 on page 314. For more information. October 2003 . When stateless is enabled. This option is enabled by default. direct disable|enable Enables or disables Direct Access Mode (DAM) on the selected virtual service. dnsslb disable|enable Enables or disables DNS-based Layer 7 content load balancing. This option does not substitute IP addresses. Use this command with caution. cur Displays the current configuration of services on the specified virtual server. del This command removes this virtual service from operation within the switch and deletes it from the Layer 4 switching software configuration. This command takes precedence over the command to globally enable or disable direct access mode on the switch.

See “Virtual Server Service Configuration Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service)” on page 302 for details on how to configure group. rtspslb hash|patternMatch|dis This Layer 7 load balancing option sets the type of rtspslb (hash|patternMatch. del Deletes this virtual service. [Virtual Server group rtspslb del cur 1 rtsp Service Menu] Set real server group number Set RTSP URL load balancing type Delete virtual service Display current virtual service configuration Table 7-10 Virtual Server Service Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/virt 1/service 554) Command Syntax and Usage group <real server group number (1-1024)> Sets real server group number. or disables rtspslb service altogether with dis command. group must be configured under the menu / cfg/slb/virt <virtual server number>/service 80. thereby enabling the service).Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 305 . which is group 1. service 80 and service RTSP will load balance the default group. and has the following command syntax and usage: pbind cookie <mode> <name> <offset> <length> <URI> Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. See “/cfg/ slb/virt <server number>/service <virtual port or name>” on page 301 to view the menu options for configuring virtual services on port 80. If you don’t configure group.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/virt <server number>/service 554 Virtual Server RTSP Configuration This menu displays virtual services configured on service port 554 for RTSP traffic. Cookie-Based Persistence The cookie option is used to establish cookie-based persistence. cur Displays the current virtual service configuration. To enable Layer 7 load balancing for RTSP service.

For cookie rewrite.. Table 7-11 Command Syntax and Usage for pbind cookie Options (/cfg/slb/virt/service/pbind cookie) Option <mode> Description Specify the mode for cookie-based persistence. enter d to disable this option. Look for cookie in the URI. a date <MM/dd/yy[@hh:mm]> (e. If you want to look for cookie name or value in the URI. 306 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Enter the starting point of the cookie value (1-64) Enter number of bytes to extract (1-64).. Insert cookie mode expiration parameters are as follows: Enter insert-cookie expiration as either: „ „ „ „ <name> <offset> <length> <URI> .Alteon OS 21. „ i: Insert mode. The switch intercepts this persistence cookie and rewrites the value to include server-specific information before sending it to the client. The following three modes are available: p: Passive mode. 12/31/01@23:59) .. The switch uses this cookie to bind to the appropriate server. a duration <days[:hours[:minutes]]> (e.. the extracting length must be 8 or 16. „ r: Rewrite mode.g. 45:30:90) . see the Alteon OS 21. In active cookie mode (or cookie rewrite mode). the switch. and not the network administrator. the network administrator configures the Web server to embed a cookie in the server response that the switch looks for in subsequent requests from the same client.g.0 Application Guide. October 2003 . enter e to enable this option. and the switch inserts an Alteon persistence cookie into the data packet. When a client sends a request without a cookie. or none <return> Enter the name of the cookie.0 Command Reference Each parameter is explained in the following table. generates the cookie value on behalf of the server.. In this mode. For more information on Cookie-Based Persistence. the server responds with the data. To look for cookie in the HTTP header..

Disable filter del . page 312) that can be used to provide more information through syslog.Display current filter configuration The switch supports up to 2048 traffic filters.Set source TCP/UDP port or range dport .Set destination IP mask proto .Set source MAC address dmac .Set destination MAC address sip .Set destination IP address dmask . deny.Set destination TCP/UDP port or range action .Enable/disable filter inversion ena .Set source IP address smask . The types of information include: „ „ „ „ IP protocol TCP/UDP ports TCP flags ICMP message type Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This command is disabled by default.Set which addresses are network address translated vlan .Delete filter cur .Set real server group for redirection rport . redirect or perform Network Address Translation on traffic according to a variety of address and protocol specifications. There are several options available in the Filter Advanced Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv.Set source IP mask dip .Set action group .Enable filter dis . Each filter can be configured to allow.Filter Advanced Menu name .Set vlan id invert .Set real server port for redirection nat .Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 307 . and each physical switch port can be configured to use any combination of filters.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> SLB Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Menu] adv .Set filter name smac .Set IP protocol sport .

308 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. To view menu options.255. dmac any|<MAC address (such as. and/or protocol that will be affected by the filter Set the filter action (allow. smask <IP subnet mask (such as.255. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the source MAC address. dmask <IP subnet mask (such as. 255. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the dmask below. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 311.0> This IP address mask is used with the sip to select traffic which this filter will affect. or any. name <31 character name>|none Allows the user to assign a name to a filter. The default is any. see page 312. or any.255. masks. 00:60:cf:40:56:00)> Sets the destination MAC address. See details below for more information on producing address ranges. dip any|<IP address> If defined. deny. 255. October 2003 . The default is any. nat) Enable the filter Add the filter to a switch port Enable filtering on the Alteon Application Switch port Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage adv Displays the Filter Advanced Menu. sip any|<IP address> If defined.0 Command Reference The following parameters are required for filtering: „ „ „ „ „ Set the address. redirect.Alteon OS 21. The default is any if the source MAC address is any. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. For more information. For more information. smac any|<MAC address (such as. traffic with this destination IP address will be affected by this filter.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. traffic with this source IP address will be affected by this filter. A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the smask below.0)> This IP address mask is used with the dip to select traffic which this filter will affect. see “Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters” on page 311. The default is any if the destination MAC address is any.

traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will be affected by this filter.0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage proto any|<number>|<name> If defined. traffic with the specified real server TCP or UDP destination port will be affected by this filter. or “any”. Listed below are some of the well-known ports: Number 20 21 22 23 25 37 42 43 53 69 70 79 80 109 110 Name ftp-data ftp ssh telnet smtp time name whois domain tftp gopher finger http pop2 pop3 dport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. Number 1 2 6 17 89 112 Name icmp igmp tcp udp ospf vrrp sport any|<name>|<port>|<port>-<port> If defined. The default is any. October 2003 „ 309 . Specify the port number. Listed below are some of the well-known protocols. Specify the protocol number. name. range. traffic from the specified protocol is affected by this filter. or “any”. name.Alteon OS 21. or “any”. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. range. Specify the port number. The default is set at any. The default is any. just as with sport above. name.

This is used in conjunction with the nat option (mentioned in this table) and can also be combined with proxies. nat source|dest When nat is set as the filter action (see above). This can be used to map the source or destination IP address and port information of a private network scheme to/from the advertised network IP address and ports. This defines the real server TCP or UDP port to which redirected traffic will be sent. The “goto” action causes filter processing to jump to a designated filter. this command specifies whether Network Address Translation (NAT) is performed on the source or the destination information. Perform generic Network Address Translation (NAT). the frame’s destination IP address (dip) and port number (dport) are replaced with the sip and sport values. such as for web cache redirection. effectively skipping over a block of filter IDs. group <real server group number (1-1024)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. use the /cfg. if transparent proxies are used for Network Address Translation (NAT) on the Alteon Application Switch (see the pip option in Table 7-21 on page 321). Layer 4 processing must be activated (see the /cfg/slb/on command on page 284). For valid Layer 4 health checks. this must be configured whenever TCP protocol traffic is redirected. If dest is specified. rport must be configured for all Application Redirection filters. Discard frames that fit this filter’s profile. Define a real server group (1 to 16) to which redirected traffic will be sent. This can be used for building basic security profiles. the frame’s source IP address (sip) and port number (sport) are replaced with the dip and dport values. The default is set at 0. In addition. Redirect frames that fit this filter’s profile. nat goto 310 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Allows the user to specify a target filter ID that the filter search should jump to when a match occurs. October 2003 .0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage action allow|deny|redir|nat|goto Specify the action this filter takes: allow deny redir Allow the frame to pass (by default).slb/filt/adv/goto command. If source is specified. Destination (dest) is set as the default filter.Alteon OS 21. Also. To specify the new filter to goto. The default is group 1 rport <real server port (0-65535)> This option applies only when redir is specified at the filter action. Filter searching action will then continue from the designated filter ID.

which means the switch will match any VLAN ID of the incoming packet This command allows filters to be configured on per VLAN basis. A VLAN has a set of member ports. The default is any. You have to manually add the filter to the port. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. October 2003 „ 311 . This option is disabled by default. don’t act. But by applying this filter to a VLAN. and applies a filter to a VLAN that already has been configured. del Deletes this filter. ena Enables this filter.Alteon OS 21. dis Disables this filter.0 Command Reference Table 7-12 Filter Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt) Command Syntax and Usage vlan any|<VLAN ID (1 . Defining IP Address Ranges for Filters You can specify a range of IP address for filtering both the source and/or destination IP address for traffic. For example. to determine if a client request’s destination IP address should be redirected to the cache servers attached to a particular switch. When a range of IP addresses is needed. perform the assigned action. cur Displays the current configuration of the filter. If the conditions for the filter are not met. and the smask (source) or dmask (destination) is the mask which is applied to produce the range. If the conditions of the filter are met. This option allows you to match the VLAN ID of the switch against the VLAN ID of the incoming packet. the sip (source) or dip (destination) defines the base IP address in the desired range.4090)> Sets the ID of the VLAN that is to be filtered. the filter does not get applied to all the member ports of this VLAN. invert disable|enable Inverts the filter logic. the destination IP address is masked (bitwise AND) with the dmask and then compared to the dip.

0.Set NAT or L7 lookup session timeout idshash .0 128.255.0 255. you could define the following parameters: Table 7-13 Filtering IP Address Ranges Filter #1 #2 Internet Address Range dip dmask 128. To view menu options.255.0.0.Enable/disable delayed binding for redirection pbind .0. you could configure the switch with two filters so that each would handle traffic filtering for one half of the Internet.0. To do this.0.Security Menu icmp .Alteon OS 21.0. October 2003 .0 .Enable/disable WAN link load balancing dbind .0 128. 312 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0.127.Layer 7 Advanced Menu security .Set ICMP message type cont . ip Sets IP advanced menu.Set GOTO filter ID proxy .IP Advanced Menu layer7 .Enable/disable client proxy cache .Enable/disable caching sessions that match filter log .0 /cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv Advanced Filter Configuration [Filter 1 Advanced Menu] tcp .0 Command Reference As another example.TCP Advanced Menu ip .0.255 128.Set hash parameter for Filter goto .Enable/disable firewall redirect hash method linklb . see page 315.255 0. To view menu options.Enable/disable logging fwlb .0. see page 314.Enable/disable persistent binding for redirection cur .255.0.Set hash parameter for intrusion detection SLB thash .Display current advanced filter configuration Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage tcp Displays the TCP Flags advanced menu.255.0.0 0.Set BW contract tmout .

To view menu options. or both. thash auto|sip|dip|both|sip+sport Allows you to choose hash parameter to use for filter redirection. idshash sip|dip|both Sets the hash metric parameter for Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing: source IP (sip). For a list of ICMP message types. tmout <even number of minutes (4-32768)> Sets the session timeout in an even number of minutes. The default is set at 4 minutes. By default. For a detailed description of filtering and ICMP. see page 319 icmp any|<number>|<type. "icmp list" for list> Sets the ICMP message type. see page 317. destination IP (dip). By default. or when other forms of translation (such as Application Redirection or NAT) are preferred. the action on this filter must be set to goto. any proxy defined for the switch port using the pip command (see page 321) is not performed for traffic meeting the filter criteria. The option sip+sport allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and source port at the same time. The default is set at any. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables client proxy. The sip option allows you to perform tunable hash on source IP address for this filter.Alteon OS 21. goto <filter ID> Defines ID for the GOTO filter. see the Alteon OS 21. this is enabled. The option both allows you to perform tunable hash on both source IP address and the destination IP address at the same time. This option applies only when redir or nat is specified as the filter action. October 2003 „ 313 . The option dip allows you to perform tunable hash on destination IP address for this filter. cont <BWM Contract (1-256)> Sets the Bandwidth Management Contract. The Default is auto. This is useful when certain traffic must retain original IP address information. security Displays the filter Security Menu.0 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage layer7 Displays Layer7 advanced menu. To view menu options. If disabled.0 Application Guide. Enable or disable proxy IP address translation for traffic matching the filter criteria. In order to use this feature. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. the contract number is set at 256. see Table 7-17 on page 316.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number>/adv/tcp Advanced Filter TCP Configuration [TCP Advanced urg ack psh rst syn fin ackrst cur Menu] . this option is disabled. a hashing algorithm is used to ensure that inbound packets and outbound packets for a pair of IPSA/IPDA traverse through the same firewall.Display current TCP configuration 314 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable TCP RST matching . this option is disabled. enabling this option changes the hash of the filter from a WCR hash to a FWLB hash. By default.Enable/disable TCP SYN matching .Enable/disable TCP ACK or RST matching . October 2003 . dbind disable|enable Enables or disables delayed binding for redirection on this filter. Cache is enabled by default. log disable|enable Enables or disables logging filter messages. A cache-enabled filter creates a session entry in the switch. pbind disable|enable Enables or disables persistent binding for redirection on this filter.Enable/disable TCP FIN matching .Enable/disable TCP PSH matching . Note: Cache should be disabled if applying a filter to virtual server IP address while performing UDP load balancing (see “udp disable|enable|stateless” on page 304). fwlb disable|enable To ensure that the stateful inspection behavior of firewalls is maintained. By default. This option is disabled by default. If the dport is 80 or 21.Enable/disable TCP ACK matching .0 Command Reference Table 7-14 Advanced Filter Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv) Command Syntax and Usage cache disable|enable Enables or disables caching sessions that match the filter. so that the switch can bypass checking for subsequent frames that match the same criteria. cur Displays the current advanced filter configuration.Alteon OS 21. Exercise caution while applying cacheenabled and cache-disabled filters to the same switch port.Enable/disable TCP URG matching . linklb disable|enable Enables or disables WAN Link Load Balancing.

/cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/ip IP Advanced Menu [IP Advanced Menu] tos . ack disable|enable Enables or disables TCP ACK (acknowledgement) flag matching. By default. cur Displays the current Access Control List TCP filter configuration. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. this option is disabled. By default. October 2003 „ 315 . syn disable|enable Enables or disables TCP SYN (synchronize) flag matching. ackrst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP acknowledgement or reset flag matching.Set IP Type of Service tmask . Table 7-15 Advanced Filter TCP Menu (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/tcp) Command Syntax and Usage urg disable|enable Enables or disables TCP URG (urgent) flag matching.Alteon OS 21. this option is disabled. rst disable|enable Enables or disables TCP RST (reset) flag matching. By default. fin disable|enable Enables or disables TCP FIN (finish) flag matching.0 Command Reference These commands can be used to configure packet filtering for specific TCP flags.Enable/disable IP option matching cur .Display current IP configuration Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. By default. this option is disabled. this option is disabled.Set new IP TOS length . By default.Set IP TOS mask newtos .Set IP maximum packet length option . By default. this option is disabled. psh disable|enable Enables or disables TCP PSH (push) flag matching. By default.

ICMP Message Types The following ICMP message types are used with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp command. tmask <0-255> Sets IP type of service mask.Alteon OS 21. You can list all ICMP message types with the /cfg/slb/filt/adv/icmp list command. 64-65535>|any Defines the limit of IP packet’s length.0 Command Reference Table 7-16 IP Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt #/adv/ip) Command Syntax and Usage tos <0-255> Sets IP type of service (ToS) and the value of the type of service. newtos <0-255> Sets new IP type of service. refer to RFC 1340 and 1349. October 2003 . Table 7-17 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 0 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 echorep destun quench redir echoreq rtradv rtrsol timex param Description ICMP echo reply ICMP destination unreachable ICMP source quench ICMP redirect ICMP echo request ICMP router advertisement ICMP router solicitation ICMP time exceeded ICMP parameter problem 316 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. Any packet exceeding the maximum length will not match the filter. For more information on ToS. option disable|enable Enables or disables IP option matching. cur Displays the current advanced IP settings for the selected filter. length <IP packet length (in bytes).

then send back an HTTP redirection message back to the client that contains information in the second string ID.Alteon OS 21. This command tells the filter that if it matches on the first string id.Add HTTP redirection mapping remrd .Enable/disable WAP RADIUS Snooping rdswap .Remove HTTP redirection mapping addstr .Remove string for layer 7 filtering rdsnp .Enable/disable RADIUS/WAP Persistence ftpa .Enable/disable Layer 7 content lookup parseall . Strings are defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/slb/add.0 Command Reference Table 7-17 ICMP Message Types Type # Message Type 13 14 15 16 17 18 timereq timerep inforeq inforep maskreq maskrep Description ICMP timestamp request ICMP timestamp reply ICMP information request ICMP information reply ICMP address mask request ICMP address mask reply /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/layer7 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Configuration Menu [Layer 7 Advanced Menu] urlcont .Set BW cont of an URL path specific to this filter addrd . addrd [1>2] Adds an HTTP redirection mapping. Only use this command when a string is shared by multiple filters and each filter requires a separate bandwidth. October 2003 „ 317 . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable active FTP NAT l7lkup .Display current layer 7 configuration Table 7-18 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage urlcont <URL path ID> <BW contract> Sets the URL path BW contract for this filter.Add string for layer 7 filtering remstr .Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets cur .

some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/layer7/ slb/add. When combined with a filter action (e. This command is enabled by default. rdswap enable|disable or just d|e Enables or disables WAP radius persistence on this filter. The string is defined under: /cfg/slb/ layer7/slb/add. When enabled. However. rdsnp disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables WAP radius snooping on this filter. this option is disabled. October 2003 . cur Displays the current configuration. redir). 318 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. remstr <string id (1-512)> Removes the string ID for Layer 7 filtering. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. the filter performs a lookup on layer 7 content such as HTTP strings or headers. parseall disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables parsing of all packets in a session where layer 7 lookup is being performed. l7lkup disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables layer 7 lookup on this filter.0 Command Reference Table 7-18 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage remrd <string id to redirect from (1-512)> <string id to redirect to (2-512)> Removes an HTTP redirection mapping that was added using the addrd command described above. this feature enables content-intelligent redirection or content-intelligent deny filtering. When parseall is disabled. ftpa disable|enable or just d|e Enables or disables active FTP Client Network Address Translation (NAT). Once this packet is found. The real server port (RPORT) will be replaced with a proxy port (PPORT). the switch will look into the data part of the frame and replace the client ’s private IP address with a proxy IP (PIP) address. that is PIP:PPORT. subsequent packets can be ignored. By default.g. layer 7 lookup is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. deny. When a client in active FTP mode sends a PORT command to a remote FTP server. addstr <string id (1-512)> Adds the string ID to this filter for L7 filtering.Alteon OS 21. This command replaces the urlp and l7deny commands found in earlier releases of Alteon OS.

the switch allows rate limiting to be enabled on TCP. matchall disable|enable Enables or disables matching of all configured patterns before the filter can perform the deny action. Once this packet is found. To view menu options see page 320.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security SLB Filter Advanced Security Menu [Security Menu] ratelim addgrp remgrp pmatch matchall parseall cur Rate Limiting Menu Add pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Remove pattern match group for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable pattern matching Enable/disable match-all criteria for layer 7 filtering Enable/disable layer 7 lookup (parsing) of all packets Display current Security configuration Table 7-19 Layer 7 Advanced Filter Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/security) Command Syntax and Usage ratelim Displays the Rate Limiting Menu. UDP. The protocol-based rate limiting limits the traffic coming from specific clients based on the IP address of the client. and normally all data packets in a session are examined by the filter. remgrp <pattern match group id> Removes a pattern group from this filter. Pattern groups are added using the /cfg/security/ pgroup/add command. October 2003 „ 319 . addgrp <pattern match group id> Adds a pattern group to this filter. cur Displays the current configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. When parseall is disabled.Alteon OS 21. some sessions may contain only one packet containing the layer 7 content. and ICMP protocols. However. subsequent packets can be ignored. pmatch disable|enable Enables or disables pattern matching on this filter. parseall disable|enable Enables or disables pattern string lookup (parsing) of all packets in a session where pattern matching is being performed. This feature enables the switch to detect and block UDP or ICMP-based DOS attacks that slow down or decapitate the servers. pattern matching is turned off for the remaining packets in the session. Currently. This command is enabled by default.

The supported protocols are: TCP. 2-65535> Defines hold down duration for rate limiting. or ICMP rate limiting. cur Displays the current rate limiting configuration. any new TCP connection requests or UDP/ICMP packets from the client are blocked. The time window can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. 1-65535> Defines time window for rate limiting. When the number of new connections or packets exceeds the configured limit.Alteon OS 21. after which new TCP connection requests or packets from the client are allowed once again to pass through. UDP. or ICMP rate limiting Disable TCP. Rate limiting is applied to the protocol configured on the filter. UDP. dis Disables TCP. timewin <seconds. The hold-down duration can be configured per filter and not globally on all the filters. The client is held down for a specified number of minutes. A time window is a configured period of time (in seconds) during which packets are allowed to be received. or ICMP rate limiting Display current rate limiting configuration Table 7-20 Rate Limiting Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/filt/adv/security/ ratelim) Command Syntax and Usage maxconn <# of connections in units of 10 (0-255)> Defines maximum connections for rate limiting. UDP. the client is said to be held down.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/filt <filter number> /adv/security/ ratelim Advanced Security Rate Limiting Configuration Menu [Rate Limiting maxconn timewin holddur ena dis cur Menu] Set maximum connections for rate limiting Set time window for rate limiting Set hold down duration for rate limiting Enable TCP. ena Enables the protocol for rate limiting. When blocking occurs. October 2003 . and ICMP. UDP. holddur <minutes. 320 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.

Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. or another switch. re-mapping virtual server IP addresses and port values to real server IP addresses and ports.Enable/disable use of PIP for ingress traffic filt . clear the session binding table for the port (see the clear command in Table 8-3 on page 350).0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/port <port number> Port SLB Configuration [SLB port 1 Menu] client .Enable/disable filtering add .Remove filter from port idslb .Enable/disable inter-switch processing proxy . NOTE – When changing the filters on a given port.Enable/disable server processing rts .Alteon OS 21.Add filter to port rem . Ports configured to process client request traffic bind servers to clients and provide address translation from the virtual server IP address to the real server IP address. To make port filter changes take effect immediately.Enable/disable intrusion detection server load balancing cur . directly or through a hub. When server processing is enabled.Enable/disable client processing server . Maximizing the number of these ports on the Layer 4 switch will improve the switch’s potential for effective Server Load Balancing. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally. the port can be enabled or disabled to process client Layer 4 traffic.Display current port configuration Alteon OS switch software allows you to enable or disable processing independently for each type of Layer 4 traffic (client and server) on a per port basis. Table 7-21 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) Command Syntax and Usage client disable|enable For Server Load Balancing. This option is disabled by default. This option is disabled by default. expanding your topology options. October 2003 „ 321 . the switch port re-maps real server IP addresses and Layer 4 port values to virtual server IP addresses and Layer 4 ports.Enable/disable RTS processing hotstan . router. server disable|enable Ports configured to provide real server responses to client requests require real servers to be connected to the Layer 4 switch. Traffic not associated with virtual servers is switched normally.Enable/disable hot-standby processing intersw . it may take some time before the port session information is updated so that the filter changes take effect.

Use this option and the intersw option in conjunction with VRRP hot-standby failover. When the PIP is defined. In Server Load Balancing applications. cur Displays the current system parameters. this forces response traffic to return through the switch. This option is enabled for ports connected to a peer switch and is disabled by default. add <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Adds a filter or a block of filters for use on this port. rem <filter ID (1 to 2048)|block of IDs (first-last)> Removes a filter or a block of filters from use on this port. This option is disabled by default. For more information on using rts. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. as is possible in complex routing environments.Alteon OS 21. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs. Enable rts on all client-side ports to ensure that traffic ingresses and egresses through the same port. idslb disable|enable Enables or disables Intrusion Detection System Server Load Balancing for this port. This option is disabled by default. This option is disabled by default. For example. This option is used for firewall load balancing or VPN load balancing applications. This option is disabled by default. This option is disabled by default. 322 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. see the “Firewall Load Balancing” and “VPN Load Balancing” chapters in the Alteon OS 21. hotstan disable|enable Enables or disables hot-standby processing. October 2003 . filt disable|enable Enables or disables filtering on this port. When pip is used with Application Redirection filters. 1-100. each filter’s rport parameter must also be defined (see rport on page 308). Proxies are also useful for Application Redirection and Network Address Translation (NAT). For example. proxy disable|enable Enables or disables a proxy for traffic that ingresses this port. Enabling the filter sets up the Real Server to look into the VPN session table. rather than around it.0 Command Reference Table 7-21 Port Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/port) rts disable|enable Enables or disables Return to Sender (RTS) load balancing on this port.0 Application Guide. intersw disable|enable Enables or disables inter-switch processing. 1-100. Enter filter ID (1 to 2048) or a contiguous block of filter IDs.

Enable/disable HTTP redirects usern .Remote Site Menu lookup . alway. The options in this menu will overwrite the geographic awareness (IANA table) during DNS queries. A lower value may increase the ability of the GSLB system to adjust to sudden changes in traffic load.Enable/disable geographic awareness http . Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage site <remote site (1-64)> Displays the Remote Site Menu for one of up to 64 remote sites.Enable/disable DNS responses with only local addresses one . one.Enable/disable encrypting remote site update on . To view menu options. Higher numbers may reduce the amount of DNS traffic. this option is disabled.Display current Global SLB configuration NOTE – The local.Enable/disable no remote real SLB encrypt . but may slow GSLB’s response to sudden traffic changes.Enable/disable HTTP redirect to real server name norem . and geo options have no effect on lookup.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb Global SLB Configuration [Global SLB Menu] site .Set interval between remote site updates weight .Globally turn Global SLB OFF cur .Set minimum number of site connections inter .Alteon OS 21.Set local weight dns .Network Preference Lookup Menu ttl . October 2003 „ 323 .Enable/disable DNS responses with only one address alway . see page 327.Globally turn Global SLB ON off . see page 326. By default. lookup Displays the Global SLB Lookup Menu. To view menu options. with default at 60) that the DNS response from the switch (indicating site of best service) will remain in the cache of DNS servers.Enable/disable DNS responses at least one address geo . but will generate more DNS traffic. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable DNS handoffs local .Set Time To Live of DNS resource records mincon . ttl <time to live in seconds (0-65535)> Specifies the duration (from 0 to 65535 seconds.

as long as the virtual server IP address has healthy real servers with an aggregate number of available connections equal to the total from each server’s configured maxcons value. At the most one IP address is included in each DNS response. weight <server weight (1-48)> Sets the local weight. This option is disabled by default. When enabled. If disabled. The higher the weight value. the local VIP is returned in DNS response to eliminate long DNS timeouts caused by an empty response. the more connections that will be directed to the local site. The default is 1 minute. dns disable|enable Enables or disables DNS handoffs to peer sites by this switch. traffic won’t be redirected to the site. geo disable|enable Enables or disables geographic awareness. If the site’s available sessions fall below this value.Alteon OS 21. Even if all remote sites cannot handle another request. The default is 1. inter <interval in minutes (1-120)> Sets the time between Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates between this switch and its peers. whenever the switch receives a DNS request for a configured service. the switch will respond to DNS requests using normal GSLB rules. Remote site response times are divided by the real server weight before selection occurs. The default is set at 1024. all clients and sites will be assumed to exist in the same geographic region. alway disable|enable Enables or disables DNS responses (with) at least one address. allowing all sites to be eligible for each client. This option is enabled by default. one disable|enable Enables or disables DNS responses with only one address. A site is not eligible for more requests (such as DNS or HTTP redirects) once the number of available connections at a site drops below this threshold. The range is between 1 and 120 minutes. October 2003 . This should be enabled for proper GSLB operation. This option is disabled by default. local disable|enable Enables or disables switch responses to DNS queries with local virtual server IP addresses. 324 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. minus the server’s current number of connections. regardless of performance or load considerations. If this option is disabled. When the real servers for the local virtual server IP addresses are unavailable or saturated. the switch will always respond to DNS queries by providing a local virtual server IP address. The response time of this site is divided by this weight before the best site is assigned to a client. such as the IANA table. At least one IP address is included in each DNS response.0 Command Reference Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage mincon <minimum connections. This option is disabled by default. This option is enabled by default. it will respond only with its own virtual server IP address. 0-65535> Sets the minimum number of available site connections.

this switch will redirect client requests to peer sites if its own real servers fail or have reached their maximum connection limits. GSLB is turned off.Alteon OS 21. If usern is enabled. cur Displays the current Global SLB configuration. the client is redirected to the new site's IP address. the switch will not encrypt the DSSP messages going out of the switch. off Turns GSLB off for this switch. If disabled. This option can be performed only once the optional GSLB software is activated (refer to “Activating Optional Software” on page 353). This option allows the GSLB feature to work with older versions of Web OS that do not encrypt DSSP messages. If disabled.<virtual server domain name> norem disable|enable This command enables or disables no-remote real server load balancing. you need to disable the http parameter in the same menu. the switch will not do remote real server load balancing for non-http protocols. the client will be redirected to the domain name specified by the remote real server name plus virtual server domain name: <remote real server name>. but will instead drop requests for new connections and cause the client’s browser to eventually issue a new DNS request. October 2003 „ 325 . encrypt disable|enable This command enables or disables encrypting of DSSP updates. if you want to do no-remote-real-server load balancing. usern disable|enable Enables or disables an HTTP redirect to a real server name. When enabled (default). If enabled. Any active remote sites will still perform GSLB services with each other. the switch will not perform HTTP Redirects. This option is disabled by default.0 Command Reference Table 7-22 Global SLB Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb) Command Syntax and Usage http disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP redirects to peer sites by this switch. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. but will not hand off requests to this switch. When a site redirects a client to another site using an HTTP redirect. For HTTP protocols. By default. on Activates Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) for this switch.

Enable/disable remote site updates ena .Set primary switch IP address of remote site secon .Set secondary switch IP address of remote site name . the Alteon OS Web-based interface also uses port 80.Delete remote site cur . By default. the local switch will address the remote site secondary switch instead. configure the Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface (BBI) to use a different service port (see the /cfg/sys/access/wport option on page 193). secon <server IP address> If the remote site is configured with a redundant switch. name <31 character name>|none Sets the name of the remote site. disable the updates. enter the IP address of the IP interface for the remote secondary switch here.Display current remote site configuration Up to 64 remote sites can be configured.Disable remote site del . October 2003 . If the remote site primary switch fails. Note: When update is enabled.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/gslb/site <site number> GSLB Remote Site Configuration [Remote site 1 Menu] prima . Table 7-23 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage prima <server IP address> Defines the IP interface IP address of the primary switch at the remote site used for Global Server Load Balancing. Global Server Load Balancing uses service port 80 on the IP interface for DSSP updates. The default is set at none. ena Enables this remote site for use with Global Server Load Balancing.Set remote site name update . 326 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable remote site dis . the switch will not send state updates. this switch will send regular Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) updates to its remote peers using HTTP port 80. If enabled (default). If disabled. Both services cannot use the same port. If both are enabled. update disable|enable Enables or disables remote site updates. If your local firewall does not permit this traffic.Alteon OS 21. Use dotted decimal notation.

If enabled. del Removes this remote site from operation and deletes its configuration.Enable or disable network preference lookups hostlk . hostlk disable|enable Enables or disables lookups based on host or domain name in a GSLB configuration. see page 328. To view menu options. When enabled.0 Command Reference Table 7-23 GSLB Remote Site Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/site) Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables this remote site. The switch will no longer use this remote site for Global Server Load Balancing. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default is set at none. dname <34 character domain name>|none Sets the domain name for the internal lookup table. cur Displays the current remote site configuration. When disabled. only the domain name will be used to match. lookups disable|enable Enables or disables network preference lookups.Internet Network Preference Menu dname .Set domain name for internal lookup table lookups . the hostname specified in the Virtual Service configuration in addition to the domain name field (dname command in the CLI) will be used to resolve the IP address for the domain.Enable or disable hostname matching in lookups cur .Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 327 . /cfg/slb/gslb/lookup GSLB Lookup Configuration [Global SLB Lookup Menu] network .Display current lookup configuration Table 7-24 GSLB Lookup Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/lookup) Command Syntax and Usage network <internal static (1-1024)><internet network preference number (1-1024)> Displays the Internet Network Preference Menu. This option is disabled by default. The maximum number of characters that a domain name can use is 34. the switch responds to DNS requests based on the configured dname and Internet Preference Menu option settings.

There is an entry match in the Network Preference Menu. VIP1 and VIP2 are not healthy—they are down or over the minimum number of connections (mincon). Client IP address doesn’t match address in the Network Preference Menu and no default entry is configured.Alteon OS 21. You should use regular GSLB to respond to a DNS request under the following conditions: „ „ „ Queried domain is not matched. using the options in this menu. All client networks not in the Network Preference Menu will use this entry to respond to a DNS request.Set VIP address del . The default entry is one where the source IP address and mask are not configured (both are 0. You can overwrite the IANA table by defining client networks.0) and only the VIP1 and VIP 2 are configured.Display current internet network entry configuration Up to 1024 network preference numbers can be set.Set Source IP address mask .Set net mask vip1 . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mask option. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation. 328 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference Table 7-24 GSLB Lookup Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/lookup) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current lookup configuration.Set VIP address vip2 . Table 7-25 GSLB Internet Network Preference Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/ lookup/network) Command Syntax and Usage sip <IP address> Sets the source (client) IP address.0. October 2003 . However. /cfg/slb/gslb/lookup/network <preference number> GSLB Internet Network Preference Lookup Configuration [Network 1 Menu] sip .Delete internet network entry cur .0.

October 2003 „ 329 . see page 330. dbindtm <10-60 seconds> Sets the timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections. cur Displays the current Internet network entry configuration.Display current Layer 7 configuration Table 7-26 Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7) Command Syntax and Usage redir Displays the Web Cache Redirection Menu. The address can either be a local or remote virtual server. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. cur Displays the current Layer 7 configuration. see page 331. del Deletes the network entry. To view menu options. vip2 <IP address> Sets the second virtual server IP address. To view menu options.Server Load Balancing Menu dbindtm . vip1 <IP address> Sets the first virtual server IP address. /cfg/slb/layer7 Layer 7 SLB Resource Definition Menu [Layer 7 Resource Definition Menu] redir . The switch returns the VIP address with the least response time that is over the mincon (minimum number of available connections).Web Cache Redirection Menu slb .0 Command Reference Table 7-25 GSLB Internet Network Preference Menu Options (/cfg/slb/gslb/ lookup/network) Command Syntax and Usage mask <IP address> This IP address mask is used with the source IP SIP address to find a correct virtual server IP address to respond to a DNS request.Set timeout for incomplete delayed binding connections cur . slb Displays the Server Load Balancing Menu.

cookie disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for cookie to origin servers. the switch will only use the host header field to calculate the hash key.Display current WCR configuration Table 7-27 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage urlal disable|enable Enables or disables auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. nocache disable|enable Enables or disables no-cache control header to origin servers.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/layer7/redir Web Cache Redirection Configuration [Web Cache Redirection Menu] urlal . the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether all non-GET requests should be redirected to a cache server or origin server. „ „ If this command is enabled. „ If hashing is enabled.1 header. the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to the origin server.0 header to the origin server. If this command is enabled.Enable/disable no-cache control header to origin servers hash . you can set the length of URI that will be used to hash into the cache server by specifying a number from 1-255. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect all requests that contain Cookie: in the HTTP header to a cache server or origin server. This option is enabled by default. This option is disabled by default.1 header. „ „ If this command is enabled.0 header to a cache server or origin server. October 2003 . the switch will redirect all non-GET requests to the origin server.Enable/disable URL hashing based on URI header . 330 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This option is disabled by default.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for non-GETs to origin servers cookie . the switch will redirect all requests that contain Cache-Control: nocache in HTTP/1. or Pragma: no-cache in HTTP/1. This option is enabled by default. If this command is disabled.Enable/disable server loadbalance based on HTTP header cur . „ If this command is disabled. „ If hashing is disabled. „ If this command is disabled.Enable/disable auto-ALLOW for Cookie to origin servers nocache . hash disable|enable <number (1-255)> Enables or disables URL hashing based on the URI.Alteon OS 21. the switch will compare the URI against the expression table to determine whether it should redirect requests that contain Cache-Control: no-cache in HTTP/ 1.

cur Displays the currently configured SLB strings and their associated string IDs (index numbers).Remove SLB string for load balance cont .” add <SLB string> Adds the SLB string for load balancing.Add SLB string for load balance rename . /cfg/slb/layer7/slb Server Load Balance Resource Configuration Menu [Server Loadbalance Resource Menu] message . The default message is “No available server to handle this request. cur Displays the current URL expression table.Display current configuration Table 7-28 Server Load Balance Resource Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/slb) Command Syntax and Usage message <64 byte error message> Sets the message that will be displayed when an error occurs. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set BW contract for the SLB string cur .0 Command Reference Table 7-27 Web Cache Redirection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/layer7/redir) Command Syntax and Usage header disable|enable host|useragent|others Enables or disables server load balancing based on HTTP header. rename <SLB string ID> <SLB string> Renames the SLB string for load balancing. cont <SLB string ID [1-512]> <BW contract number [1-256]> Sets the Bandwidth Management contract for a specified string for the SLB string ID. rem <SLB string ID> Removes the SLB string from load balancing.Set HTTP error message add .Alteon OS 21. This option is disabled by default.Rename SLB string for load balance rem . October 2003 „ 331 .

October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.Display current WAP configuration Table 7-29 WAP Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/wap) Command Syntax and Usage tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP external notification for Add/Delete session requests.WAP debug level cur . The default is set at 0. cur Displays the current WAP configuration 332 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This option is disabled by default. debug <wap debug level (0-10)> Sets the debug level for tracing the WAP related messages.Enable/disable WAP TPCP external notification debug .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/wap WAP Configuration [WAP Options Menu] tpcp .

Enable/disable syncing BWM configuration state . filt disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing filter configuration. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable syncing proxy IP addresses peerpips . a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch. To view menu options.Enable/disable syncing filter configuration ports . see page 334. This option is enabled by default. This option is enabled by default.Enable/disable syncing port configuration prios . peerpips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing the peer proxy IP addresses. Peers are sent SLB.Set stateful failover update period cur . This option is disabled by default. and VRRP configuration updates using /oper/slb/ synch. This option is enabled by default.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/sync Synchronize Peer Switch Configuration [Config Synchronization Menu] peer .Synch Peer Switch Menu filt . This option is disabled by default. pips disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing proxy IP addresses.Enable/disable syncing persistent session state update .Display current Layer 4 sync configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. prios disable|enable Enables or disables syncing VRRP priorities. October 2003 „ 333 . FILT. This option is disabled by default. Table 7-30 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage peer <peer switch number (1-2)> Displays the Sync Peer Switch Menu.Enable/disable syncing VRRP priorities pips . Peer proxy IP addresses are used in VRRP Active/Active configuration.Alteon OS 21.Enable/disable syncing peer proxy IP addresses bwm . Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password. ports disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Layer 4 port configuration.

this option is disabled. This option is enabled by default. Switches being synchronized must use the same administrator password.0.Enable peer switch dis . The default is 0.Alteon OS 21. state disable|enable Enables or disables stateful failover for synchronizing the persistent session state. Table 7-31 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage addr <IP address> Sets the peer switch IP address.0 ena Enables the peer for this switch.0 Command Reference Table 7-30 Synchronization Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync) Command Syntax and Usage bwm disable|enable Enables or disables synchronizing Bandwidth Management configuration between Master and backup switches. 334 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. The default value is 30 seconds. update <seconds. dis Disables the peer for this switch.0. 1–60> Sets the stateful failover update interval. October 2003 . The active server sends update packets of persistent binding entries to the backup switch at the specified update interval.Set peer switch IP address ena .Delete peer switch cur . This option is disabled by default. By default.Disable peer switch del . cur Displays the current Layer 4 synchronization configuration. /cfg/slb/sync/peer <peer switch number> Peer Switch Configuration [Peer Switch 1 Menu] addr .Display current peer switch configuration To synchronize the configuration between two switches. a peer must be configured and enabled on each switch.

/cfg/slb/adv Advanced Layer 4 Configuration [Layer 4 Advanced Menu] synatk . see page 337.Set virtual and real IP address mask mnet .SYN Attack Detection Menu imask .255. imask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Set persistent mask submac .0)> Configures the real and virtual server IP address mask using dotted decimal notation.Enable/disable Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol vstat .255.Set management network mmask .Enable/disable Virtual Matrix Architecture tpcp .Enable/disable graceful real server failure matrix .Enable/disable Direct Access Mode grace . October 2003 „ 335 .Enable/Disable Source MAC address substitution direct .Alteon OS 21.Enable/disable using VLAN info for real server lookup fastage .255.Display current Layer 4 advanced configuration Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage synatk Displays SYN Attack Detection Menu.0 Command Reference Table 7-31 Peer Switch Configuration Menu Options (/cfg/slb/sync/peer) Command Syntax and Usage del Deletes the peer for this switch cur Displays the current peer switch configuration. management traffic with this source IP address will be allowed direct (non-Layer 4) access to the real servers.255. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.Enable/disable Virtual Service Statistics rtsvlan .Set management subnet mask pmask . A range of IP addresses is produced when used with the mmask option. The default is 255.Session table slow-age (2 min) period bit shift cur .Session table fast-age (1 sec) period bit shift slowage .255. To view menu options. mnet <IP address> If defined.

this option is enabled.255.0)> Sets persistent mask. By default. see “Service Failure” in the Alteon OS 21. The default is 255.255. This command is used for security reasons—the UDP port can be closed. matrix disable|enable Enables or disables the use of Virtual Matrix Architecture on the Alteon Application Switch.255. Typically.255. The default is 0. But if you enable this command. By default. vstat disable|enable Enables or disables reporting of virtual service statistics. this option is disabled. submac disable|enable Enables or disables Source MAC address substitution.0 Application Guide).255. pmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255. the switch will substitute the source MAC address (for the packets going to the server) with the MAC address of the switch. October 2003 . Allows existing sessions to remain bound to a server after the server has been placed in the service failed state (for more information.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage mmask <IP subnet mask (such as 255.255. The default interval is two seconds. By default. grace disable|enable Enables or disables graceful real server failure. The fastage scan is used to remove TCP sessions that have been closed with a FIN and sessions that have been identified by the slowage scan as idle for the maximum allowed period. rtsvlan disable|enable Enables or disables the use of VLAN for Return to Sender information on the real server. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. By default. This option also allows any virtual server to load balance any real server.255. tpcp disable|enable Enables or disables the TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol). the source MAC is not modified for the packets going to the servers in an SLB environment.255. 336 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. a session can remain in the session table for a few minutes. this option is disabled. this option is disabled.0)> This IP address mask is used with the mnet to select management traffic which is allowed direct access to real servers.255. direct disable|enable Enable/disables Direct Access Mode to real servers/services. The default is 255. fastage <shift the fast-age (1sec) period 0-7 bits> Controls how frequently a fastage scan is performed.255. If a large value of fastage is used.

Display current SYN attack detection configuration Table 7-33 SYN Attack Detection Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/synatk) Command Syntax and Usage intrval <SYN attack check interval in seconds (2-3600)> Sets the interval of SYN attack inspection. If a large value of slowage is used.Set SYN attack alarm threshold cur . thrshld <SYN attack alarm threshold (new half-open sessions/second) (1-100000)> Sets the threshold of SYN attack alarm. The default is 0.Alteon OS 21. The slowage scan is used to remove idle or non-TCP sessions from the session at the specified intervals. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. cur Displays the current SYN attack detection configuration. Each incremental increase of the value doubles the length of the interval. (Value is set in bits rather than seconds.Set SYN attack detection interval thrshld .0 Command Reference Table 7-32 Layer 4 Advanced Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv) Command Syntax and Usage slowage <shift the slow-age (2min) period 0-14 bits> Controls how frequently a slowage scan is performed. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced configuration. /cfg/slb/adv/synatk SYN Attack Detection Configuration [SYN Attack Detection Menu] intrval . a session can remain in the session table for months. The default interval is two minutes. October 2003 „ 337 . which causes the time to double per increment).

see page 340. 338 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . like HTTPs. To view menu options.Enable/disable Allow HTTP Health Check on any port ldapver .Scriptable Health Check Menu snmphc . Enabling it will allow you to use it on any port.Set RADIUS secret minter . The default is 2.LDAP version secret .Display current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration Table 7-34 Advanced Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc) Command Syntax and Usage script <health script number (1-16)> Displays the Scriptable Health Check Menu. The default is set at 10. see page 341. snmphc <SNMP health check number (1-5)> Displays the SNMP Health Check Menu. To view menu options. The default is none. this option is disabled. When disabled. waphc Displays the WAP Health Check Menu. minter <number of seconds between updates (1-256)> This command sets the interval of response and bandwidth metric updates.WAP Health Check Menu aphttp . The secret value is a field of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that is used by the switch to encrypt a password during the RSA Message Digest Algorithm (MD5) and by the RADIUS server to decrypt the password during verification. cur Displays the current Layer 4 advanced health check configuration. you can use HTTP health checks only for HTTP service. aphttp disable|enable Enables or disables HTTP health checks on any port. the network administrator must configure two parameters in the switch: the /cfg/slb/secret value and the cntnt parameter with a username:password value. secret <1-32 character secret> To perform application health checking to a RADIUS server.SNMP Health Check Menu waphc .Set interval of response and bandwidth metric updates cur . see page 339. ldapver <LDAP version> Sets the LDAP version to 2 or 3.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc Advanced Health Check Configuration Menu [Layer 4 Advanced Health Check Menu] script . To view menu options. By default.

October 2003 „ 339 .” The total number of characters cannot exceed 1024 bytes.alteon.Add send command to end of script expect .Add close command to end of script rem . send <text string> Sends an ASCII string through open TCP port. "GET /default.Alteon OS 21. del Deletes the current script. cur Lists the current script configuration. such as an HTTP response: HTTP/1.asp HTTP/1.Add expect command to end of script close .com\\r\\n\\r\\n. Up to eight scripts can be configured.Delete script cur . For example.1 200 close Closes TCP connection.Display current script configuration The Health Script menu provides commands that can be used to define the health “script. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. such as.Add open command to end of script send . an HTTP request. rem Removes the last entered line from the script. Table 7-35 Scriptable Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/script) Command Syntax and Usage open <real port or name (such as: http)> Sets the TCP port to be opened.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/script <health script number> Scriptable Health Checks Configuration [Health Script 1 Menu] open ." expect <text string> Expects an ASCII string for successful health check on open TCP port.Remove last command from script del .1\\r\\nHOST: www.

such as. maximum 32 characters> Enter the community string used in the SNMP get request packet. comm <community string. 340 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. an OID is of the form 1.2. The format of the OID depends on the MIB file.5.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/snmphc SNMP Health Check Configuration [SNMP Health Check 1 Menu] oid .Enable/disable inversion of expected value weight .Enable/disable readjusting of weights based on response del .2.1.6.1.6. the health check fails if the response packet contains the value specified in the receive content (rcvnt) field. del Deletes the current SNMP health check.Display current SNMP health check configuration Table 7-36 SNMP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/snmphc) Command Syntax and Usage oid <object identifier.3.3. The default community string is public.OID to be sent in the SNMP request packet comm .0 max 30 sub-identifiers> Specify the Object Identifier (OID) to be sent in the SNMP GET request packet.1.1. When the invert option is enabled.Delete SNMP health check cur .1.1. the real server weights are dynamically adjusted based on SNMP health check response.7.1872. for example.Expected value in the SNMP response packet invert .11. rcvcnt <expected content an integer value or a string> Enter the content the switch expects to receive from the SNMP agent on the real server. weight disable|enable When enabled.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . 1. cur Displays the current SNMP Health Check configuration.4. invert disable|enable Enables or disables the inversion of the expected value.Community string used in the SNMP request packet rcvcnt .

ports 9200 and 9202 and connectionoriented (WTP) traffic runs on ports 9201 and 9203. WTLS+WTP+WSP). For further details. WTP+WSP. Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable coupling with RADIUS Accounting Service cur . To view menu options. Alteon OS provides a content-based health check mechanism where customized WSP packets are sent to the WAP gateways. The default port number is 9200. October 2003 „ 341 . see page 342. [WAP Health Check Menu] wspcnt .Alteon OS 21. WSP content health checks can be configured in two modes: connectionless and connectionoriented. WTLS+WSP. Connectionless WSP runs on UDP/IP protocol.WTP port number to health check wtlswsp .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc WAP Health Check Configuration Wireless Session Protocol (WSP) is used within the Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) suite to manage sessions between wireless devices and WAP content servers or WAP gateways. deployed on WAP gateways/ servers.WTLS port number to health check couple .WTLS+WSP port number to health check wtlsprt . The default port number is 9201. and the switch verifies the expected response. see page 343.WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu wspport . To view menu options. Application switches can be used to load balance the gateways in both modes of operation.WSP port number to health check wtpport . in a manner similar to scriptable health checks. wtpcnt Displays WTP and WSP Health Check Content Menu. wspport <wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WSP health checks will be performed. Alteon OS allows you to configure three WAP gateway health check types for all four WAP services (WSP. refer to the Application Guide. wtpport <wtp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTP port number to health check.Display current WAP health check configuration Table 7-37 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wspcnt Displays WSP Health Check Content Menu.WSP Health Check Content Menu wtpcnt .

Content to be sent to the WAP gateway rcvcnt .Alteon OS 21. wtlsprt <port number (0-65534)> Enter the port number on which WTLS health checks will be performed. The connectionless encrypted WTLS traffic uses default port 9202.Display current WSP health check content configuration Table 7-38 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <Offset in the received WSP packet (0-512)> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packages. October 2003 . sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a connectionless WSP request to a WSP gateway. An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of the content of the received packet. If the health check to any one of the four WAP services or Radius Accounting Service fails. The connection-oriented WTLS traffic uses default port 9203. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway. rcvcnt <receive content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. WTP+WSP. WTLS+WTP+WSP) with Radius Accounting Service.Content to be received from the WAP gateway cur . cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration.Offset in received WSP packet sndcnt . WTLS+WSP. /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt WSP Content Health Check [WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . 342 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. then all of the four WAP services and Radius Accounting Service are disabled.0 Command Reference Table 7-37 WAP Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/adv/waphc) Command Syntax and Usage wtlswsp <wtls+wsp port number to health check (0-65534)> Defines the WTLS (Wireless Transport Layer Security) and WSP port number to health check. couple disable|enable Enables or disables coupling together of all the four WAP services (WSP.

GET PDU to be sent to the WAP rcvcnt . An offset value of 0 (default) sets the switch to start comparisons from the beginning of WSP PDU of the received packet.CONNECT PDU to be sent to the sndcnt .Alteon OS 21.Offset in received WSP PDU connect .Display current WTP+WSP health WAP gateway gateway the WAP gateway check content configuration Table 7-39 WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/ waphc/wtpcnt) Command Syntax and Usage offset <offset in the received WSP PDU> Enter the offset value content of the received WSP packets.REPLY PDU to be received from cur . at which the comparison begins to match with the expected receive content. connect <connect content as hexstring> Enter the content for the first switch-generated WSP session packet. [WTP+WSP Health Check Content Menu] offset . sndcnt <send content as hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents a WSP request to a WSP gateway. rcvcnt <receive content as a hexadecimal string> Enter a hexadecimal string that represents the content that the switch expects to receive from the WSP gateway. This string will be delivered to the WSP gateway.0 Command Reference Table 7-38 WSP Content Health Check Options (/cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wspcnt) Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays the current WAP Health Check configuration. October 2003 „ 343 . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. This command allows you to customize the headers in the connect message. The offset value is the number of bytes from the beginning of the WSP PDU. /cfg/slb/advhc/waphc/wtpcnt WTP and WSP Content Health Check Menu This menu is used for configuring the health check for connection-oriented unencrypted WAP traffic. cur Displays current WTP+WSP health check content configuration.

cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. October 2003 . the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds.Set Proxy IP address for port 26 pip4 . pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled. When the pip is defined. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 13 to 24.Set Proxy IP address for persistent SP pgarp .Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-40 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 2224 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 2224) for SP1 ports 1 to 12 and 25 using dotted decimal notation on SP1. pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4. pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on port 26.Alteon OS 21.Set Proxy IP address for ports 1-12 and 25 pip2 . 344 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E.Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur .0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2224 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 .Set Proxy IP address for ports 13-24 pip3 .

the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds.Alteon OS 21. pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on port 26.Set Proxy IP address for port 28 pgarp . October 2003 „ 345 . pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4 on port 28. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 13 to 24 and 27. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address.Set Proxy IP address for port 13 to 24 and 27 pip3 . Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 2424 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 .Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur .Set Proxy IP address for port 26 pip4 .Set Proxy IP address for port 1 to 12 and 25 pip2 . When the pip is defined.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Table 7-41 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 2424 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 2424) for SP1 on ports 1 to 12 and 25 using dotted decimal notation on SP1. cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration.

cur Displays the current Proxy IP address configuration. and 9 using dotted decimal notation on SP1. pip3 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP3 on ports 3.Set Proxy IP address for ports 4. pip2 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP2 on ports 2. 8. and 11.Set Proxy IP address for ports 3. 5. 7 and 10 pip4 . and 10.Enable/disable Proxy Ip Gratuitous ARP cur . 346 „ Chapter 7: The SLB Configuration Menu 315393-E. When the pip is defined. the switch will send gratuitous ARPs for enabled proxy IP addresses (PIPs) every 30 seconds. pgarp disable|enable When this command is enabled. 6 and 11 pip3 . October 2003 . 7. client address information in Layer 4 requests is replaced with this proxy IP address. pip4 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address for SP4 on ports 4. 5 and 9 pip2 . 6. and 12.Set Proxy IP address for ports 2.0 Command Reference /cfg/slb/pip Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu For Alteon 3408 [Proxy IP Address Menu] pip1 . 8 and 12 pgarp .Alteon OS 21.Display current Proxy IP address configuration Figure 7-1 Proxy IP Address Configuration Menu Options for Alteon Application Switch 3408 (/cfg/slb/pip) Command Syntax and Usage pip1 <IP address> Sets the proxy IP address (in Alteon Application Switch 3408) for SP1 on ports 1.Set Proxy IP address for ports 1.

Operational Bandwidth Management Menu ip . October 2003 . with the understanding that when the switch is reset. but do not alter permanent switch configurations.Operational Server Load Balancing Menu vrrp . For example.CHAPTER 8 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immediately.Clear syslog messages The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration.Operational Port Menu slb . Port Mirroring menu options are accessible only to the Alteon AD4 and Alteon 184 WebSwitches.Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu bwm .Enter software feature to be removed clrlog . the port returns to its normally configured operation. you can use the Operations Menu to immediately disable a port (without the need to apply or save the change). 347 315393-E.Operational IP Menu swkey . /oper Operations Menu [Operations Menu] port .Enter key to enable software feature rmkey .

vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu. To view menu options. see page 350. see page 352. see page 351. see page 354. the Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu. see page 353.Alteon OS 21. swkey <16-hexadecimal digit key to enable software feature> Enter key to enable software feature. To view menu options. To view menu options. clrlog Clears all syslog messages. see page 351. To view menu options. slb Displays the Operational Layer 4 Menu. which has one sub-menu/option. rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSL|BWM|Security)> Enter software feature to be removed. bwm Operational Bandwidth Management Menu. For details. To view menu options. For details. 348 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. see page 349. ip Displays the IP Operations Menu.0 Command Reference Table 8-1 Operations Menu Options (/oper) Command Syntax and Usage port <port number> Displays the Operational Port Menu. October 2003 .

October 2003 „ 349 . ena Temporarily enables the port.Current port state Operations-level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port. cur Displays the current settings for the port.Disable port cur . dis Temporarily disables the port.0 Command Reference /oper/port <port number> Operations-Level Port Options [Operations Port 1 Menu] rmon . The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. Table 8-2 Operations-Level Port Menu Options (/oper/port) Command Syntax and Usage rmon disable|enable Temporarily enables/disables Remote Monitoring on the port.Alteon OS 21.Enable port dis . Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset. The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.Enable/Disable RMON for port ena . and for changing Remote Monitoring (RMON) status on a port.

0 Application Guide.Clear session table cur . port. NOTE – This command provides for orderly server shutdown to allow maintenance on a server. see “Disabling and Enabling Real Servers” in the Alteon OS 21. and VR priorities on a peer switch (a switch that owns the IP address). 350 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /oper/slb Operations-Level SLB Options [Server Load Balancing Operations Menu] sync . the operations-level Server Load Balancing options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling real servers and synchronizing the configuration between the active/active switches.0 sessions) by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server „ Using the n (none) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server by removing the real server from operation within its real server group and virtual server The real server will be returned to its configured state after a switch reset. For more information.0 sessions] p|n The disable command is used to temporarily disable real servers as follows: „ Using the p (persistent) option—immediately suspends assignment of connections to the specified real server (except for persistent http 1. dis <real server number. ena <real server number (1-1023)> Temporarily enables a real server. October 2003 . To take effect.Alteon OS 21.Enable real server dis . VRRP.Synchronize SLB. filter. peers must be configured on the Alteon Application Switch and the administrator password on the switch must be identical. VRRP and other configurations on peers ena .Disable real server clear . Bandwidth Management configuration.Current layer 4 operational state When the optional Layer 4 software is enabled.allow persistent http 1. 1-1023> [P . Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage sync Synchronizes the SLB. The real server will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset.

/oper/vrrp Operations-Level VRRP Options.Alteon OS 21. Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. the current master gives up control and initiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 (lowest). NOTE – This command disrupts current SLB and Application Redirection sessions.0 Command Reference Table 8-3 Server Load Balancing Operations Menu Options (/oper/slb) Command Syntax and Usage clear Clears all session tables and allows port filter changes to take effect immediately. After the new election. October 2003 „ 351 . the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases: „ „ „ This switch owns the virtual router (the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same) This switch’s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled. cur Displays the current SLB operational state. This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure.Set virtual router to backup Table 8-4 Virtual Router Redundancy Operations Menu Options (/oper/vrrp) Command Syntax and Usage back <virtual router number (1-256)> Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode. There are no other virtual routers available to take master control. When this command is executed. [VRRP Operations Menu] back .

352 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E.0 Command Reference /oper/bwm Operations-Level Bandwidth Management Options [Bandwidth Management Operations Menu] sndhist .Alteon OS 21. October 2003 . /oper/ip Operations-Level IP Options [IP Operations Menu] bgp .Send BW History to SMTP server Table 8-5 Bandwidth Operations Menu Options (/oper/bwm/sndhist) Command Syntax and Usage sndhist Sends the bandwidth history to a system administrator specified under /cfg/bwm/user (see page 212). To view the menu options see page 353.Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 8-6 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu.

you must register each License Certificate with Nortel Networks and provide the MAC address of the Alteon OS switch that will run the optional software. Nortel Networks will then provide a License Password. /oper/swkey Activating Optional Software The swkey option is used for activating any optional software you have purchased for your switch. Currently the following software packages are available for purchase and installation: „ „ „ Security Pack Bandwidth Management Global Server Load Balancing To obtain a software key. Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. you must obtain a software license from your Nortel Networks representative or authorized reseller. One software license is needed for each switch where the optional software is to be used.0 Command Reference /oper/ip/bgp Operations-Level BGP Options [Border Gateway start stop cur Protocol Operations Menu] Start peer session Stop peer session Current BGP operational state Table 8-7 IP Operations Menu Options (/oper/ip) Command Syntax and Usage start <peer number (1-16)> Starts the peer session. Before you can activate optional software. cur Displays the current BGP operational state. You will receive a Licence Certificate for each software license purchased.Alteon OS 21. October 2003 „ 353 . stop <peer number (1-16)> Stops the peer session.

“The Command Line Interface”). To deactivate optional software.0 Command Reference NOTE – Each License Password will work only on the specific switch which has the MAC address you provided when registering your Licence Certificate. Once you have your License Password.Alteon OS 21. 3. enter: Main# oper 2. At the Main# prompt. For example: Enter Software Feature to be removed: [GSLB]|BWM|security: GSLB 354 „ Chapter 8: The Operations Menu 315393-E. At the Operations# prompt. perform the following actions: 1. October 2003 . Software feature enabled. 123456789ABCDEF)> If the correct code is entered. you will see the following message: Valid software key entered. enter: Operations# swkey 4. Connect to the switch’s command line interface and log in as the administrator (see Chapter 1. enter your 16-digit software key code. Deactivated software is still present in switch memory and can be reactivated at any later time. /oper/rmkey Removing Optional Software The rmkey option is used for deactivating any optional software. When prompted. enter the code for software to be removed. For example: Enter Software Key: <16 hexadecimal-digit key to enable software feature (such as. enter the following at the Operations Menu: Operations# rmkey <software feature to be removed (GSLB|BWM|security)> When prompted.

October 2003 .Select software image to use on next boot .Reset switch [WARNING: Restarts Spanning Tree] .Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections.Upload selected software image via TFTP . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator.CHAPTER 9 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu.Scheduled Switch Reset Menu . 355 315393-E.Select config block to use on next boot .Download new software image via TFTP . The Boot Options Menu provides options for: „ „ „ Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via TFTP /boot Boot Menu [Boot Options sched image conf gtimg ptimg reset cur Menu] .

if your active image is currently loaded into image1. you would probably load the new image software into image2.Set switch reset time cancel . cancel a previously scheduled reboot.Cancel pending switch reset cur . and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub-menu: /boot/sched Scheduled Reboot Menu [Boot Schedule Menu] set . and comes pre-installed on the device. October 2003 . This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off-peak hours. You can set the reboot time.Alteon OS 21. image2. 356 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. as well as boot software. A version of the image ships with the switch. if needed. you must specify where it should be placed: either into image1. When you download new software. Upgrading the software image on your switch requires the following: „ „ „ Loading the new image onto a TFTP server on your network Downloading the new image from the TFTP server to your switch Selecting the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Downloading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images. As new versions of the image are released. called boot.0 Command Reference Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future. For example. or boot. This lets you test the new software and reload the original active image (stored in image1).Display current switch reset schedule Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the Alteon Application Switch. called image1 and image2. you can upgrade the software running on your switch.

The system prompts you to confirm your request. However. 5. you will need the following: „ „ „ „ The image or boot software loaded on a TFTP server on your network The hostname or IP address of the TFTP server The name of the new software image or boot file Setup the TFTP option (/cfg/sys/mgmt/tftp) for the TFTP connection. However. NOTE – The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames.Alteon OS 21. enter: Boot Options# gtimg 2. Enter the name of the new software file on the server. as described below. This sets the default option for the gtimg and ptimg commands. note that you can override this setting with the option provided to these operational commands.0 Command Reference To download a new software to your switch. At the Boot Options# prompt. Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. use the following procedure to download the new software to your switch. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced: Enter name of switch software image to be replaced ["image1"/"image2"/"boot"]: <image> 3. the file location is normally relative to the TFTP directory (usually /tftpboot). Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> The exact form of the name will vary by TFTP server. You should next select a software image to run. October 2003 „ 357 . 1. When the above requirements are met. Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. See “Domain Name System Configuration Menu” on page 258). Enter the hostname or IP address of the TFTP server.

Enter the name or the IP address of the TFTP server: Enter hostname or IP address of TFTP server: <server name or IP address> 4. Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot.0 Command Reference Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image (image1 or image2) you want to run in switch memory for the next reboot. Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the TFTP server: Enter name of file on TFTP server: <filename> 358 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. Enter the desired image: Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded ["image1"|"image2"|"boot"]: <image> <hostname or server-IP-addr> <server-file- name> 3. October 2003 . and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use switch software "image1" on next reset. 1. enter: Boot Options# ptimg 2. 1. Specify new image to use on next reset ["image1"/"image2"]: Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a TFTP server. The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. enter: Boot Options# image 2. At the Boot Options# prompt.Alteon OS 21. The system prompts you for information. At the Boot Options# prompt.

2. your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block.7 Upload will transfer image2 (1889411 bytes) to file "test" on TFTP server 192. Under certain circumstances.1. you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset. Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset: 1. Specify new block to use ["active"/"backup"/"factory"]: Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. enter: Boot Options# conf 2. There is also a factory configuration block. The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block.Alteon OS 21. When you perform the save command. Confirm upload operation [y/n]: y Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the Alteon Application Switch. image2 currently contains Software Version 20.0. and prompts you to enter a new choice: Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset. enter Y. This can be useful when a custom-configured Alteon Application Switch is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a different purpose. it may be desirable to reset the switch configuration to the default. At the Boot Options# prompt.1.1. This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your Alteon Application Switch was manufactured. To have the file uploaded. October 2003 „ 359 . Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use: The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset. The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered.0 Command Reference 5.

at the Boot Options# prompt. 360 „ Chapter 9: The Boot Options Menu 315393-E. depending on the topology of your network.0 Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur. To reset the switch. This process can be lengthy. October 2003 . NOTE – Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Protocol to restart.Alteon OS 21. enter: >> Boot Options# reset You are prompted to confirm your request.

System Maintenance Menu fdb . and then causes the switch to reboot. The switch administrator enters the switch reset key combination on a device that is attached to the console port.CHAPTER 10 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database information. October 2003 .Clear FLASH dump panic .IP Route Manipulation Menu uudmp .Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp . The switch reset key combination is <Shift><Ctrl><->.ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route . found in the Maintenance Menu.Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu debug . „ „ 361 315393-E. causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory. The panic option.tftp put FLASH dump to tftp server cldmp . you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator. The watchdog timer forces a switch reset. It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting. /maint Maintenance Menu NOTE – To use the Maintenance Menu.Tech support dump Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the Alteon Application Switch after any one of the following occurs: „ The switch administrator forces a switch panic. The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes.Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp .Debugging Menu arp . [Maintenance Menu] sys .

To view menu options. To view menu options. 362 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. For details. Table 10-1 Maintenance Menu Options (/maint) Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu. fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu. For details. and send it to Nortel Networks Tech Support for debugging purposes. October 2003 .You can log the tsdump output into a file. debug Displays the Debugging Menu. statistics. see page 363. see page 366. For details. To view menu options. uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format. see page 363. see page 368. see page 365. panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots. For details. cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory.Alteon OS 21. To view menu options. route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu. see page 367. see page 369. ptdmp hostname filename [-mgmt| -data] Saves the system dump information via TFTP. and configuration. arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu.0 Command Reference „ The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot. tsdmp Dumps all Alteon Application Switch information. see page 369. To view menu options. see page 368.

Show FDB entries for a single VLAN refpt . [System Maintenance Menu] flags .Show FDB entries for a single port trunk . Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E.Delete an FDB entry clear . October 2003 „ 363 . /maint/fdb Forwarding Database Options [FDB Manipulation Menu] find .Alteon OS 21.Show FDB entries referenced by a single port dump .0 Command Reference /maint/sys System Maintenance Options This menu is reserved for use by Nortel Networks Customer Support group.Set NVRAM flag word Table 10-2 System Maintenance Menu Options (/maint/sys) Command Syntax and Usage flags <new NVRAM flags word as 0xXXXXXXXX> This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group.Show all FDB entries del .Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port . The options are used to perform system debugging.Show FDB entries on a single trunk vlan .Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database. This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions.

refpt <SP number (1-4)> Displays all FDB entries reference by a single port. For details.0 Command Reference Table 10-3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/fdb) Command Syntax and Usage find <MAC address> [<VLAN>] Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. trunk <trunk number (1-12)> Displays all FDB entries for the specified trunk group. Use “0” for unknown port number. clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory. see page 61. October 2003 . dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database. You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device. del <MAC address> [<VLAN number>] Removes a single FDB entry. Enter the MAC address using the xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx format (such as 08:00:20:12:34:56) or xxxxxxxxxxxx format (such as 080020123456). 364 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN. 0 for unknown>> Displays all FDB entries for a particular port. port <port number.Alteon OS 21.

Header information similar to the following is shown: MP trace buffer at 13:28:15 Fri May 25. 2002. 2001. Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E.Clear all flash configs The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation. clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks.Show All SP trace buffers clrcfg . mask: 0x2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header. The buffer information is displayed after the header. You can view the following information using the debug menu: „ „ „ Events traced by the Management Processor (MP) Events traced by the Switch Processor (SP) Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30. sptb <port number (1-4)> Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer.Alteon OS 21. The output from these commands can be interpreted by the Nortel Networks Customer Support division. October 2003 „ 365 .0 Command Reference /maint/debug Debugging Options [Miscellaneous Debug Menu] tbuf . This buffer contains information traced at the time that a reset occurred. mask: 0x00800008. snap Displays the Management Processor snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer. Displays all SP trace buffers. Table 10-4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options (/maint/debug) Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer.Show MP snap (or post-mortem) trace buffer sptb .Show MP trace buffer snap . mask: 0x00800008 The buffer information is displayed after the header.Show SP trace buffer spall . spall Displays the Switch Processor trace buffer. the MP trace buffer and SP trace buffers are saved into the snap trace buffer area. 2002. Header information similar to the following is shown: SP 1 trace buffer at 10:56:35 Tue Jul 30.

80. /maint/arp/port <port number> ARP Entries on a Single Port IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port Referenced SPs --------------.Show all ARP entries clear .81 00:e0:81:24:ef:3c 1 1 empty 47.80.----.----------------. dump Shows all ARP entries.Show ARP entries on a single port vlan . vlan <VLAN number (1-4090)> Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN.Show a single ARP entry by IP address port .--------------47.4.169 00:04:75:db:1c:1a 1 1 empty 366 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E.---. refpt <SP number (1-4)> Shows all ARP entries referenced by a single port. addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests. clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory.17.----.80. October 2003 .17.101)> Shows a single ARP entry by IP address.Clear ARP cache addr .16. port <port number> Displays ARP entries on a single port.Show ARP entries on a single VLAN refpt . 192.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference /maint/arp ARP Cache Options [Address Resolution Protocol Menu] find .Show ARP address list Table 10-5 Address Resolution Protocol Menu Options (/maint/arp) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as.1 00:e0:16:7c:28:82 1 1 empty 47. See page 366 for a sample output.Show ARP entries referenced by a single SP dump .16.

/maint/route IP Route Manipulation [IP Routing Menu] find . 192.Show a single route by destination IP address gw . Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. port. For a description of IP routing types.44)> Shows routes to a default gateway.Clear route table Table 10-6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options (/maint/route) Command Syntax and Usage find <IP address (such as. vlan. you can also refer to “ARP Information” on page 69.Show routes of a single type tag .17. see Table 4-9 on page 68 tag fixed|static|addr|rip|ospf|bgp|broadcast|martian|vip Shows routes of a single tag. see Table 4-10 on page 69 if <interface number (1-256)> Shows routes on a single interface.Show all routes clear . or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above (find. For a description of IP routing tags. type indirect|direct|local|broadcast|martian|multicast Shows routes of a single type.4.Show routes of a single tag if .Show routes on a single interface dump .101)> Shows a single route by destination IP address.0 Command Reference NOTE – To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch. October 2003 „ 367 . gw <default gateway address (such as. dump Shows all routes. clear Clears the route table from switch memory.17.Show routes to a single gateway type . refpt. you can also refer to “IP Routing Information” on page 68.Alteon OS 21. 192. NOTE – To display all routes.4. dump).

the following appears: No FLASH dump available. Once entered. The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory. NOTE – Dump information is not cleared automatically. enter: Maintenance# uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and. and must be writable (set with proper permission. the uudmp command will cause approximately 23. To save dump information via TFTP. if you have configured your communication software to do so. In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory. at the Maintenance# prompt. /maint/ptdmp <server> <filename> TFTP System Dump Put Use this command to put (save) the system dump to a TFTP server. The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data. dump information is presented in uuencoded format.0 Command Reference /maint/uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command.Alteon OS 21. and not locked by any application). captured to a file. 368 „ Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu 315393-E. Using the uudmp command. NOTE – If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system. set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command. You can then contact Nortel Networks Customer Support for help analyzing the information. October 2003 . and filename is the target dump file. This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters. If you want to capture dump information to a file. at the Maintenance# prompt. This will ensure that you do not lose any information. For more information on clearing the dump region. enter: Maintenance# ptdmp <server> <filename> [-mgmt| -data] Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname. the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the ptdmp command. see page 369. If the dump region is empty. To access dump information. you must manually clear the dump region. dump information can be read multiple times.300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file.

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

/maint/cldmp Clearing Dump Information
To clear dump information from flash memory, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
Maintenance# cldmp

The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message:
FLASH dump region cleared.

If the flash dump region is already clear, the switch displays the following message:
FLASH dump region is already clear.

/maint/panic Panic Command
The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash memory and automatically reboot. To select panic, at the Maintenance# prompt, enter:
>> Maintenance# panic A FLASH dump already exists. Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot [y/n]:

Enter y to confirm the command:
Confirm dump and reboot [y/n]: y

The following messages are displayed:
Loading Image:.......... Alteon Application Switch 2424 Rebooted because of Software PANIC. Booting complete 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003: Version 20.2.7 from FLASH image1, active config block. Jan 9 19:15:32 NOTICE system: link up on port 25 Enter password:

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
315393-E, October 2003

„

369

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

Unscheduled System Dumps
If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory, the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch:
Note: A system dump exists in FLASH. The dump was saved at 19:15:23 Thu Jan 9, 2003. Use /maint/uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and /maint/cldmp to clear the FLASH region. The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved.

370

„

Chapter 10: The Maintenance Menu
315393-E, October 2003

APPENDIX A

Alteon OS Syslog Messages
The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages: <Time stamp><Log Label>Web OS<Thread ID>:<Message> where „ <Timestamp> The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour:minute:second format. For example: Aug 19 14:20:30 „ <Log Label> The following types of log messages are recorded: LOG_EMERG, LOG_ALERT, LOG_CRIT, LOG_ERR, LOG_WARNING, LOG_NOTICE, LOG_INFO, and LOG_DEBUG „ <Thread ID> This is the software thread that reports the log message. The following thread IDs are recorded: stp, ip, slb, console, telnet, vrrp, system, web server, ssh, and bgp „ <Message>: The log message

Following is a list of potential syslog messages. To keep this list as short as possible, only <Thread ID> and <Message> are shown. The messages are sorted by <Log Label>. Where the <Thread ID> is listed as mgmt, one of the following may be shown: console, telnet, web server, or ssh.

LOG_WARNING
FILTER “filter <filter number> fired on port <port number>, <source IP address> -> <destination IP address>, [<ICMP type>], [<IP protocol>], [<layer-4 ports>], [<TCP f1ags>]”

371
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ALERT
stp: IP vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: gslb: gslb: gslb: gslb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: bgp: vrrp: vrrp: dps: dps: syn_atk tcplim own BPDU received from port <port_id> cannot contact default gateway <ip_address> received errored advertisement from <ip_address> received incorrect password from <ip_address> received incorrect addresses from <ip_address> received incorrect advertisement interval <seconds> from <ip_address> cannot contact real server <ip_address> real server <ip_address> has reached maximum connections received update from <ip_address> for unknown remote server <ip_address> received update from <ip_address> for unknown virtual service received update for unknown remote server <ip_address> from <ip_address> received update for unknown service <ip_address:service> cannot contact real service <ip_address:real_port> real server failure threshold (<threshold>) has been reach for group <group_id> real server <ip_address> disabled through configuration Virtual Service Pool full. gSvcPool=MAX_SERVICES notification (<reason>) received from <BGP peer ip_address> session with <BGP peer ip_address> failed (<reason>) Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> Synchronization from non-configured peer <ip_address> was blocked hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes manual hold down: <ip_address> SYN attack detected: <count> new half-open sessions per se cond hold down triggered: <ip_address> for <min> minutes

372

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_CRIT
SYSTEM: temperature at sensor <sensor_id> exceeded threshold SYSTEM: internal power supply failed SYSTEM: redundant power supply failed SYSTEM: fan failure detected SSH can’t allocate memory in load_MP_INT

LOG_ERR
mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ntp: ntp: isd: stp: stp: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: PANIC at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> VERIFY at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> ASSERT at <file>:<line> in thread <thread id> cannot contact NTP server <ip_address> unable to listen to NTP port unable to listen to BOOTP_SERVER_PORT port Error: Error writing STG config to FLASH Error: Error writing config to FLASH Apply not done Save not done “ <““apply””|““save””> is issued by another user. Try later” Error: Error writing %s config to FLASH New Path Cost for Port <port_id> is invalid PVID <vlan_id> for port <port_id> is not created RADIUS secret must be 1-32 characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address STP changes can't be applied since STP is OFF Switch reset is required to turn STP on/off Trunk group <trunk_id> contains ports with different PVIDs

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

„

373

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: Trunk group <trunk_id> has more than <max_trunk_ports> ports Trunk group <trunk_id> contains no ports but is enabled Not all ports in trunk group <trunk_id> are in VLAN <vlan_id> Trunk groups <trunk_id> and <trunk_id> can not share the same port

port_mirr: Port Mirroring changes are not applied cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Broadcast address for IP interface <interface_id> is invalid IP Interfaces <interface_id> and <interface_id> are on the same subnet Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router <vr_id> must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have preemption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router <vr_id> must have an IP address Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same VRID and VLAN as <vlan_id> Virtual router <vr_id> cannot have same IP address as <ip_address> Virtual router <vr_id> corresponding virtual server <server_id> is not enabled Hot-standby must be enabled when a virtual router has a PIP address Virtual router <vr_id> IP interface should be <interface_id> Enabled real server <server_id> has no IP address Real server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Real server <server_id> (Backup for <server_id>) is not enabled Real server <server_id> has same IP address as virtual server <server_id> Real server <server_id> has same IP address as real server <server_id> Real server group <group_id> cannot backup itself Real server <server_id> cannot be added to same group

374

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Enabled virtual server <server_id> has no IP address Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address as switch Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> with same IP address must support same layr3 configuration Real server <server_id> cannot be backup server for both real server <server_id> and group <group_id> Virtual server <server_id> has same IP address and vport as virtual server <server_id> RS <server_id> can’t exist for VS <server_id> vport <virtual_port> Switch port <port_id> has same proxy IP address as port <port_id> Switch port <port_id> has same IP address as IP interface <interface_id> A hot-standby port cannot also be an inter-switch port There must be at least one inter-switch port if any hot-standby port exist “With VMA, ports 1-8 must all have a PIP if any one does” Client bindings are not supported with proxy IP addresses DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtual server to support FTP parsing Real server <server_id> and group %u cannot both have backups configured Virtual server <server_id> : port mapping but layer3 bindings Extracting length has to set to 8 or 16 for cookie rewrite mode DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for port <port_id> in order for virtural server <server_id> to support URL parsing Port filtering must be disabled on port <port_id> in order to support cookie based persistence for virtual server <server_id> Virtual server <server_id>: port mapping but Direct Access Mode Virtual server %lu: support nonat IP but not layer 3 bindings Virtual servers: all that support IP must use same group Virtual servers <server_id> and <server_id> that include the same real server <server_id> cannot map the same real port or balance UDP Virtual server <server_id>: UDP service <virtual_port> with out-of-range port number

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

„

375

Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference

LOG_ERR (Continued)
cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: Switch cannot support more than <MAX_VIRT_SERVICES> virtual services Switch cannot support more than <MAX_SMT> real services Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must have same L4 config Trunk group (<trunk_id>) ports must all have a PIP DAM must be turned on or a PIP must be enabled for ports <port_id> in order to do URL based redirection “Two services have same hostname, <host_name>.<domain_name>” Direct access mode is not supported with default gateway load balancing SLB Radius secret must be 16 characters long Dynamic NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> must have same smask and dmask NAT filter <filter_id> cannot have port ranges NAT filter <filter_id> must be cached NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes VIP <server_id> NAT filter <filter_id> dest range includes RIP <server_id> Redirection filter <filter_id> must be cached Filter with L4 ports configured <port_id> must have IP protocol configured “For Global SLB, Web server must be moved from TCP port 80” Remote site <site_id> does not have a primary IP address Primary and secondary remote site <site_id> switches must differ Remote sites <site_id> and <site_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and real server <server_id> must use different addresses Remote site <site_id> and virtual server <server_id> must use different addresses Only <MAX_SLB_SITES> remote servers are allowed per group Only <MAX_SLB_SERVICES> remote services are supported Enabled external lookup IP address has no IP address domain name must be configured

376

„

Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages
315393-E, October 2003

October 2003 „ 377 . <host_name>.0 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: cli: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Network <static_network_id> has no VIP address duplicate default entry BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> must have an IP address BGP peers <bgp_peer_id> and <bgp_peer_id> have same address BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> have same address as IP interface <ip_interface_id> BGP peer <bgp_peer_id> IP interface <ip_interface_id> is not enabled Filter with ICMP types configured (<icmp_type>) must have IP protocol configure to ICMP “Two services have same hostname.<domain_name>” Loadbalance string must be added to real server <server_id> in order to enable exclusionary string matching intrval input value must be in the range [0-24] unapplied changes reverted unsaved changes reverted Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output Attempting to redirect a previously redirected output cfg_sync_tx_putsn: ABORTED Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNREACEABLE Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.

Try later” new configuration did not validate (rc = ) new configuration did not apply (rc = ) new configuration did not save (rc = ) Sync config apply error Restoring Current Config Sync rx tcp open error Sync Version/Password Failed-No Version/Password Line Sync Version Failed . October 2003 .Resuming Console thread “<""apply""|""save""> is issued by another user.peer:%s config:%s Sync Password Failed-Bad Password Sync receive already in progress … cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync receive 378 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference LOG_ERR (Continued) vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: Synchronization connection early RCLOSE in RX Synchronization connection Wait-For-Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync transmit in progress … cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress … cannot start Sync Sync already in progress … cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout .

0 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE system: system: system: system: system: system: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: internal power supply ok redundant power supply present and ok temperature ok fan ok rebooted <last_reset_information> rebooted <last_reset_information> administrator logged in boot config block changed boot image changed switch reset from CLI syslog host changed to <ip_address> syslog host changed to this host second syslog host changed to <ip_address> second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block user password changed SLB operator password changed L4 operator password changed operator password changed SLB administrator password changed L4 administrator password changed administrator password changed scp <login_level> login “scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">” RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host %s PASSWORD FIX-UP MODE IN USE <login_level> login on Console Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 „ 379 .Alteon OS 21.

0 Command Reference LOG_NOTICE (Continued) mgmt: mgmt: “<login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console” PANIC command from CLI port_mirr: “port mirroring is <""enabled""|""disabled"">” vlan: mgmt: mgmt: IP IP vrrp: vrrp: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: slb: bgp: Default VLAN can not be deleted <login_level> login from host <ip_address> “<login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from” “default gateway <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled"">” default gateway <ip_address> operational virtual router <ip_address> is now master virtual router <ip_address> is now backup “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""diabled""> for real server <server_id>” “backup server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “backup group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group group_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server <server_id>” “overflow server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” “overflow group server <ip_address> <""enabled""|""disabled""> for real server group <group_id>” real server <ip_address> operational real service <ip_address:real_port> operational No services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> Services are available for Virtual Server <virtual_server> session established with <BGP_peer_ip_address> 380 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.

" server key autogen starts server key autogen completes server key autogen timer timeouts new synch configuration applied new synch configuration saved Synchronizing from <host_name> Synchronizing to <host_name> Config Synchronization Transmit Successful Config Synchronization Receive Successful new configuration VALIDATED Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 „ 381 .Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference LOG_INFO SYSTEM: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: mgmt: ssh: ssh: ssh: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: vrrp: bootp response from <ip_address> new configuration applied new configuration saved unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes " <image1|image2> downloaded from host <ip_address>. file <file_name> <software_version>" serial EEPROM downloaded from host <ip_address> file <file_name> scp <login_level> login " scp <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout"">" <login_level> login on Console " <login_level> <""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Console" <login_level> login from host <ip_address> " <login_level> <""connection closed""|""idle timeout""|""logout""> from Telnet/SSH.

0 Command Reference 382 „ Appendix A: Alteon OS Syslog Messages 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.

TCP.mib -. Traps will not be sent if there is no host specified. The community string can be modified only through the Command Line Interface (CLI).mib cheetahSwitch.mib cheetahLayer7. ICMP.APPENDIX B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP Version 1. Alteon MIBs are registered as Vendor 1872. Interface.mib -.mib cheetahTrap.MIB II Extension (IFX table) 383 315393-E.mib cheetahPhysical.SynOptics Root MIB s5roo117. The default community strings are “public” for SNMP GET operation and “private” for SNMP SET operation. Security is provided through SNMP community strings.mib cheetahBwm. Address Translation.mib cheetahLayer4.MIB II (System. which requires the following SynOptics MIBS: „ „ „ „ synro193.Textual Convention MIB s5emt104. The agent will send the SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate. UDP.mib -.mib Added support for the ethernet multi-segment autotopology MIB.mib -. SNMP Groups) RFC 1573 . Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent can be found in the following enterprise MIB documents: „ „ „ „ „ „ „ „ Altroot.SynOptics Registration MIB s5tcs112. Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs: „ „ RFC 1213 .Ethernet Multi segment Autotopology MIB Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps.mib cheetahNetwork. IP. October 2003 .

Event Groups) RFC 1850 for OSPF RFC 1657 for BGP Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215: „ „ „ „ „ ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493: „ „ NewRoot TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS: Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwDefGwUp altSwDefGwDown altSwDefGwInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSwSlbRealServerUp altSwSlbRealServerDown altSwSlbRealServerMaxConnReached altSwSlbBkupRealServerAct altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeact Signifies that the default gateway is alive. Alarm.0 Command Reference „ „ „ „ „ RFC 1643 .Alteon OS 21.EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 . Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is alive but not in service Signifies that the real server is up and operational Signifies that the real server is down and out of service Signifies that the real server has reached maximum connections Signifies that the backup real server is activated due to availablity of the primary real server Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is available 384 „ Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E. Signifies that the default gateway is down.RMON MIB (Statistics. October 2003 . History.Bridge MIB RFC 1757 .

A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authentication type conflicts with this router’s authentication key or authentication type. altSwTempExceedThreshold Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E. The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to ’Backup’ state.Alteon OS 21. A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connection requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre-determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre-determined threshold. Implementation of this trap is optional.0 Command Reference Table 10-7 Alteon OS-Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwSlbBkupRealServerActOverflow altSwSlbBkupRealServerDeactOverflow altSwfltFilterFired altSwSlbRealServerServiceUp altSwSlbRealServerServiceDown altSwVrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is overflowed Signifies that the backup real server is deactivated due to the primary real server is out from overflow situation Signifies that the packet received on a switch port matches the filter rule Signifies that the service port of the real server is up and operational Signifies that the service port of the real server is down and out of service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to ’Master’ state. A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits. October 2003 „ 385 . A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username/password combination. altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure altSwSlbSynAttack altSwTcpHoldDown A altSwSlbSynAttack trap signifies that a SYN attack has been detected.

0 Command Reference 386 „ Appendix B: Alteon OS SNMP Agent 315393-E. October 2003 .Alteon OS 21.

Using the serial cable.2. 4. 1. Hold the <Shift> key down and hit D repeatedly until the following message appears: Alteon Application Switch . connect the Console port of an Alteon Application Switch to the serial port of your PC that supports XModem/1K XModem. October 2003 . Power on the switch.APPENDIX C Performing a Serial Download You can perform a serial download of the new Alteon Application Switch software if you are upgrading Alteon OS directly from any image. Start hyper terminal (part of Microsoft Windows) and set the following parameters: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 9600 8 None 1 None 2.PPCBoot 2. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 387 315393-E. This procedure requires the following: „ „ „ A computer running terminal emulation software A standard serial cable with a male DB9 connector (see your switch hardware installation guide for specifics) A binary switch firmware image (not the tftp file used for TFTP download) Use the following procedure to perform a serial upgrade. 3.

2.. protocol: 1K XMODEM It will take about 15 minutes for the transfer to complete. "21.0. To download a serial image use 1K Xmodem at 115200 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total bytes transferred: 0x4ff400 Extracting images. Press <Enter> on the key board of the PC that is connected to the console port of the switch. Select <Transfer-Send File> and choose the following: file: For example.0. When the Console Port is successfully communicating with the PC.. October 2003 . Do *NOT* power cycle the switch Updating flash. This file can be downloaded from the CD that is shipped with the switch. Reconfigure your terminal emulation software with the following parameters (only after you see the message displayed in step 4). otherwise.0_Serial. You should see the following sample log on your screen: Alteon Application Switch .. wait for a few seconds and power the switch on. 6. ################################################################# Change your baudrate to 9600 bps and power cycle the switch ! 388 „ Appendix C: Performing a Serial Download 315393-E. 8. you will see: CCCC. XMODEM will work too if you choose not to use 1K MODEM.PPCBoot 2. The switch will boot with the new software load.img" (Or the file previously downloaded to the computer) 7. NOTE – Although slower.: Parameter Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Value 115200 8 None 1 None NOTE – You can perform serial downloads at 57600 baud rate by pressing Ctrl f or at 115200 baud rate by pressing Ctrl d. the switch be inoperable. 9. Power off the switch.... CAUTION—Do not power off the switch until you see the message: “Change your baud rate to 9600 bps and power cycle switch”. Make sure that the new binary firmware file is available on the computer.Alteon OS 21.0 Command Reference 5.

OSPF. http-80/https-443/DNS-53) Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another address. The protocol of a frame. Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another. half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another. or a filter. In VRRP. UDP. No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated. because it translates the destination IP address from the Virtual Server IP address. In VRRP. Default is 100. Preemption Priority Proto (Protocol) Real Server Group 389 315393-E.) A group of real servers that are associated with a Virtual Server IP address. Minimum value is 1 and maximum value is 254. the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer(s). October 2003 . TCP. Virtual server-based load balancing uses half NAT by design. preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority. Can be any value represented by a 8-bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification (for example. A higher number will win out for master designation.Glossary DIP (Destination IP Address) Dport (Destination Port) NAT (Network Address Translation) The destination IP address of a frame. The destination port (application socket: for example. to that of one of the real servers. network address translation can be said to have taken place. In general. ICMP. and so on.

In redirection-based load balancing. a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation (with preemption enabled). Tracking can be very valuable in an active/active configuration. A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers. spam filter.0 Command Reference Redirection or Filter-Based Load Balancing A type of load balancing that operates differently from virtual server-based load balancing. The action on a filter can be Allow. The source IP address of a frame. Real Server IP Address. redirection-based load balancing is designed to load balance devices that normally operate transparently in your network—such as a firewall. Filters can be configured to filter on the SIP/Range (via netmask). the destination IP address is not translated to that of one of the real servers. RIP (Real Server) SIP (Source IP Address) SPort (Source Port) Tracking The source port (application socket: for example.Alteon OS 21. requests are transparently intercepted and “redirected” to a server group. Instead. Deny. Therefore. An IP addresses that the switch load balances to when requests are made to a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). This filter intercepts traffic based on certain IP header criteria and load balances it. or NAT (translation of either the source IP or destination IP address). Redirect to a Server Group. or transparent Web cache. a filter is configured in the switch. October 2003 . “Transparently” means that requests are not specifically destined for a Virtual Server IP address that the switch owns. You can track the following: „ Vrs: Virtual Routers in Master Mode (increments priority by 2 for each) „ Ifs: Active IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch (increments priority by 2 for each) „ Ports: Active ports on the same VLAN (increments priority by 2 for each) „ l4pts: Active Layer 4 Ports. VIP (Virtual Server IP Address) VIR (Virtual Interface Router) 390 „ Glossary 315393-E. With this type of load balancing. In VRRP. HTTP-80/HTTPS-443/DNS-53). client or server designation (increments priority by 2 for each „ reals: healthy real servers (increments by 2 for each healthy real server) „ hsrp: HSRP announcements heard on a client designated port (increments by 10 for each) An IP address that the switch owns and uses to load balance particular service requests (like HTTP) to other servers. DIP/Range (via netmask). SPort/Range or DPort/Range. Protocol.

then the VRID number needs to be identical on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows whom to share with.18. This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned.0. If you have a VRRP address that two switches are sharing. These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224.Alteon OS 21. the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification. If the backup switch didn’t do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network. If the frames were not half NAT’ed to the address of one of the RIPs. The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP. and advertisements. the two switches would fight for ownership of the Virtual Server IP address. Virtual Server Load Balancing VRID (Virtual Router Identifier) VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) VSR (Virtual Server Router) Glossary 315393-E. One virtual router is associated with an IP interface. Should the master stop advertising. and the ARP tables in the devices around them would have two ARP entries with the same IP address but different MAC addresses. a value between 1 and 255 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address. as requests come and go. then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member. a server would receive the frame that was destined for it’s MAC address. Classic load balancing. The master is always advertising via the broadcasts.0. This process of replacing the destination IP (VIP) with one of the real server addresses is called half NAT. and forwards the frame to the server for which it is now destined. since the packet would have the DIP of the VIP and not that of the server (RIP). Network address translation is done back and forth. one switch is considered the master and the other the backup. The backup switch is always listening for the broadcasts. as defined in RFC 2338.0 Command Reference Virtual Router A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP. For a more detailed description. In VRRP. which is owned by the switch. The switches must be able to share Virtual Server IP addresses. With VRRP. Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements. updates the relevant checksums. Frames come to the switch destined for the VIP. are load balanced to a real server contained in the group associated with the VIP. All IP interfaces on the Alteon Application Switch must be in a VLAN. If there is more than one VLAN defined on the Alteon Application Switch. The server would then drop the frame. by the switch. The switch then replaces the VIP and with one of the real server IP addresses (RIP’s). The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available. Requests destined for a Virtual Server IP address (VIP). refer to RFC 2338. as well as IP interfaces. If they didn’t. A VRRP address that is a shared Virtual Server IP address. VSR is Alteon WebSystems’ proprietary extension to the VRRP specification. October 2003 „ 391 . The VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00-00-5E-00-01-{VRID}. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco’s proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol. forcing the packet up to Layer 3.

Alteon OS 21. October 2003 .0 Command Reference 392 „ Glossary 315393-E.

........................................ 366 administrator account ........... 17 admpw (system option) ........ 359 backup server activations (SLB statistics) ........................ 50 access control system .... 196 advertisement of virtual IP addresses ........ 178................ 212 contracts ......................................... 282 ptcfg ........................ 206....................................... 239 autonomous system filter path action ............................................. 213 bandwidth management contract precedence value ............................................. 200..................................................................... 204..... 271 active port VLAN .......................................................................................................................................... 271 active switch configuration gtcfg ......................................... 221 STP information ........ 214 bandwidth management contract configuration ........................ 310 filter states............. 271 active Layer 4 processing ................................................................................ 32...... 292 / command .. 32 link.............................................. 239 as ....................................................................... 83 filters ....................................... 282 add SLB port option .......................... 282 active switch.......... 32.......... 193 action (SLB filtering option) ................... 214 393 315393-E......................................................................... 27 B backup SLB real server group option ................... October 2003 ............................................ 33 port speed.................... 20 autoconfiguration duplex mode ...... 47 [ ]................................................... 32 auto-negotiation ..................................................................................... saving and loading configuration ..... 178............................................... 182............. 310 activating optional software .............. 359 active FTP SLB parsing statistics ............................................ 322 addr ARP entries............................. 366 IP route tag ......... 63 application redirection ...... 241 aging STP bridge option ......Index Symbols (MD5) .............................. 142 active IP interface ................................ 293 backup configuration block ...................................... 353 active configuration block ............................................................................. 282 restoring ..................... 177 applying configuration changes ...... 285 within real server groups .......... 150 bandwidth management configuration . 387 3000 series.............................................................. 33 autonomous system filter action ........................................................ 239 aspath ....................... 32 enable/disable on port ................................................................................................................ 24................... 177 ASCII terminal ................................... 292 apply (global command) ........................................................... 201 A abbreviating commands (CLI) ........................... 209 setup......................... 287................. 239 Numerics 1K XModem ............................................................... 338 (SLB real server group option) content ..................................... 69 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) address list ...................................................................

.............................215 underlimit TOS ....................69 configuration...21 setup (enable/disable) .......................355 BOOTP ........................................................................................... 369 FDB entry .. 68 broadcast domains .......................251 eBGP ............................................................................... bridge parameter menu.....63 STP transmission frequency ...353 BPDU..............................252 peer configuration ...................215 over the limit TOS .19 BGP configuration.......20 serial download .................................................................................................................................251 iBGP ...............0 Command Reference Bandwidth Management options operations-level options ............69 keep-alive time . 19 BWM contract rate statistics................. 154 C capture dump information to a file.............................. 155 contract statistics ...................................251 in route ................................ 367 clearing SLB statistics ............................. 36 Browser-Based Interface .. 321 command (help) .........................................219 bridge priority ......303 BLOCKING (port state).......................................................253 peer ..255 remote autonomous system ...................................................................................................................................................... border router ..................... See Bridge Protocol Data Unit.................................................................................. for STP ..........................220 broadcast IP route tag ......... 388 BBI .........................................388 binding failure ...... 368 Cisco Ether Channel ........... 150 client traffic processing ....................63 Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) .. 47 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ............... 27....................................................................................... 45 commands abbreviations ..............................253 router hops...152 banner (system option)....................... 50 tab completion ..................... 364 routing table ..............180 bootstrap protocol .....352 bandwidth management policy configuration .........................................................215 soft bandwidth limit ............................................254 IP address............................................................ 156 port ........................................................................................ 50 stacking ..259 Border Gateway Protocol .....251 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) operations-level options .................................................................................................................. 153 switch processor contract statistics .......................................... 154 history statistics .............................215 buffer limit ................................... 69 IP route type .......................... 50 394 „ Index 315393-E........................................................................................................................ 19 to 25..... 17 global commands ........................ 47 shortcuts ..... 50 conventions used in this manual ..............253 redistribution configuration ................................................................................................................................ 224 broadcast IP address ......... October 2003 ...................................................................................................................................................149 binding table ....................................................220 Bridge Spanning-Tree parameters .31 system option .........387 binary firmware image ....254 binary ........................................................................215 hard bandwidth limit .....................................................387.......Alteon OS 21...........................................................................................................................63 boot options menu .................. 153 switch processor rate contract statistics ........253 IP route tag ...... 366 dump information .........215 bandwidth management statistics ......................215 reserve limit ...................................................................... 222 clear ARP entries ...........................................................................180 baud rate console connection ........................................................................................................

.......... 222 route cache.................. 121 Domain Name System (DNS) health checks ... 202................................... 175 configuring routing information protocol ................................... ... 177 Fast Ethernet ................................. 311 DNS statistics ......................................... 222 counters................................... 356 dropped frames (No Server Available) counter ................................ 177 VLAN default (PVID) ....... 162 CPU utilization ... 149 D date setup................................................................................................... 32 dynamic routes ........................ 311 direct (IP route type) ..................0 Command Reference configuration administrator password .... October 2003 Index „ 395 ....... 233 DISABLED (port state) .......................... 25 Distributed Site State Protocol (DSSP) setting update interval ....... 202 cost STP information ........... 208 VRRP .............. 359 configuration menu ......... 71 diff (global) command.....................................Alteon OS 21.......................... 20 serial download settings ........... 281 effect on Spanning-Tree Protocol ........................................................... 281 switch IP address .......... 188.......... 228 VLAN tagging .................................................................................... bandwidth management .......... 24 delete FDB entry ............................................ 275 default password ...................... 150 designated port. 150 dump configuration command .......................... 295 peer site handoffs ............................................ 198......................................................... 68 directed broadcasts........ 229 default gateway IP address ......................... 56.......... 211 port trunking .................................. 387........ 195 view changes................................................................................................ 200... 240 connecting via console ........................................................................... 177 setup .................................................................. 32 link status ......................................................................... 364 deny (filtering) ............ 233 save changes ... 21 connection timeout (Real Server Menu option) ....................... 177 dip (destination IP address for filtering) ....................... 63 disconnect idle timeout ........................... 209 Gigabit Ethernet ........................... for health checks ...... 292 contracts........ 52................ 203...... 150 CPU statistics .................................................................... 30 system option ................................................... 324 dmask destination mask for filtering .... 204................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 188 debugging ............. 206.............................................. 281 maintenance ......... 180 daylight savings time ................... 228 user password ..................................... 177 default gateway interval............................. 361 default gateway information ........................... 230 Layer 4 administrator password ... 199.............................................. 229 metrics ................ 388 content SLB real server group option ... 205........................ 196 operating mode .......... 90 setup............................. 361 state information ........................................ 359 selection ...................... 198........................................................................ 203...... 66 interval............................................. viewing changes ............................ 281 setup command ........ 209 port link speed ............................................ 20 connecting ........... 303 console port communication settings .............. 367 315393-E................. 359 backup..................................... 189 current bindings ................ 204 IP static route ........................................................................ No Server Available (dropped frames) .......................................................... 213 copper ports ......... 20 via Telnet............................................. 202...................... 229 dump command ............................. 198 flow control .......................... 275 round robin.......... 324 downloading software ......................................................... 369 duplex mode.................... 196 apply changes . for health checks .................................... 63 STP port option ........... 162 cur (system option) ............. 198................... 203............... 202..... load balancing for ...... 209 port mirroring .......... 359 factory ................................................................ 260 configuration block active .... 207 VLAN IP interface ................................................................... 200............................................

.........................................................................................................336 FDB statistics ................................ HTTP application health checks ......................... See Hot Standby Router Protocol............................................. 27............................................................................................................................47 396 „ Index 315393-E... 274 Hot Standby Router VLAN (HSRV) use with VRRP .............61.................. 204 global commands ............. number of failed health checks ............................................................................. 82 parameters for most protocols ......................Alteon EMS ..................................................................... 27 to 43 fixed IP route tag ...........................................295 FTP SLB maintenance statistics .................................................143 FTP SLB statistics dump......... 229 script ....... 241 Hot Standby Router on VLAN (HSRV) use with VLAN-tagged environment ... SLB .................................................................................................................. 297 health check types........................ 272 hot-standby failover .......... 47 host routes .............................................198......... 295 redirection (rport).... 193 G gig (Port Menu option) ..... 341 hello STP information ....................... 90 configuring ..................204 File Transfer Protocol .................... 275 Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) priority increment value for L4 client ports ............................. 133 gtcfg (TFTP load command) ...............................................................................60 Forwarding Database Menu........220 FwdDel (forward delay)...... 274 use with VRRP . 265 VRRP priority increment value . 63. October 2003 ................ 229 IDSLB.............................................................................. 340 WAP ..............................................................................................................Alteon OS 21........198.............32.39 emulation software ............150 filters IP address ranges ........................... 325 system option ..................................................................... 32 hash metric ..25............... bridge port ........................... 204 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link ..................................... 193 http ..109 fiber optic ports ...................387 EtherChannel as used with port trunking .. 202..............233 forwarding database (FDB) ...................................... 19 hprompt system option ............................................... 294 health checks....................... 134 grace graceful real server failure ...............................................................................................................198 fastage ................ configuring ports for ......... 282 H half-duplex .. 310 retry.................... 206.............198 Fast Ethernet.........311 Final Steps..........134 filtered (denied) frames ......... 136 global SLB statistics ...... 188 Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) ..... 209 setup ......... 28 Fast Ethernet Physical Link .38 first-time configuration ..................................... 188 group . 265..... 272 VRRP priority increment value .........................359 factory default configuration .................................. HSRV...............71 flow control ............................................. 180 HSRP...... 202................................ 294 layer information .... 33 forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ........................................ retries . 203.............................. 63 help ........................... See Hot Standby Router Protocol..........................................222 F factory configuration block .52.........32 fwd (STP bridge option) .................................................... 288 default gateway interval....................................................63 global SLB maintenance statistics ................................................. 202.. 296...................................... 204 Gigabit Ethernet configuration................................................................. 295 redirects (Global SLB option) .........69 flag field............................. 64 FTP server health checks ............................ 339 SNMP ................................................................................................. 336 Greenwich .............................200...............................363 forwarding state (FWD) .........144 full-duplex .....142 filter statistics ............361 delete entry ........................................................................... 269 HP-OpenView ............................198.............364 Forwarding Database Information Menu ........0 Command Reference E EMS.............................................. 25...............

..................................... 68 local network for route caching ................................ 56.................................................................... 56........... 35 local route cache ranges . 274 IP network filter configuration ................ 21 configuring default gateway ................. 115 interface statistics ...................................... 311 IP interface ............................................................. 52 command ................................................ 353 license password ................... 203................. 228 active .................................................................................... 64 Information Menu .......................... 35 IP forwarding ....................................... 25 IDSLB health checks ....... 68 Information Trunk Group Information.................................................... 63 lmask (routing option) ...................................................... 363 switch location ......................... 68 information .............. 209 link status....... 294 IEEE standards 802.. 234 Telnet ...................... M MAC (media access control) address 53......................... 66 local (IP route type) .................... 353............................................ 79 IP interface .... 338 IP Route Manipulation Menu ................................................................................................................. 138 layer7 redirection statistics ................................................................................................ 63 least connections (SLB Real Server metric) .................. 335 incorrect VIPs (statistic) ................................. October 2003 Index „ 397 ................ 66 IP Information Menu .................... 24 Layer 4 processing active .................................................................................................................................. 218 image downloading ........................... 35 ARP information ................................................................................... 257 directed broadcasts ........ 192 LISTENING (port state) ...... 137 LDAP version ............................... 257 L l4apw (L4 administrator system option) ................................................................ 353 link speed.. 235 IP port configuration . 35 tag parameters ............... 233 local route cache IP address ranges for.............. 66.. 228 IP interfaces ....................................................... 230 IP statistics ........ 233 local networks for route caching ....................... 90 port speed..Alteon OS 21.................................... 35 IP subnets VLANs ................... 69 priority increment value (ifs) for VRRP .....0 Command Reference HTTP health checks on any port (aphttp) ..................... 229 filter ranges .............. 233 IP forwarding information .................... 367 IP routing .................. 297 licence certificate ................................... 295........................................................................................................... 199................................................ 52................................................................................................................... 150 indirect (IP route type) ............................................................................ 123 IP address ........................... selecting .............................. 69 IP Static Route Menu ...... 90 duplex mode ....................................... 139 layer 7 SLB string statistics ......... 358 IMAP server health checks ...................... 271 layer 7 SLB maintenance statistics ........................................ 338 LEARNING (port state) ............ 271 configuring address ....... 121 idle timeout overview.. 181 logical segment............................................. 228 configuring VLANs .................................................. 51 Interface change stats ...... 21 315393-E.... 335 IP configuration via setup ....... 356 software..................................................... 234 log syslog messages ....... 90 linkt (SNMP option) .............................. 196 Layer 4 administrator account....................... 21 IP address mask for SLB ....... 224 I ICMP statistics ......... 70..................................................................................1d Spanning-Tree Protocol .............................................................. configuring ......................... 90 Link Status Information ....... 295 imask (IP address mask) ...................................... 35....................................................................... 116 IP subnet mask ................................... See IP subnets...... 66 lnet (routing option) .... 66 IP route tag ........................................ 60............................................. 149 incorrect Vports (dropped frames counter) ..................... 70 BOOTP .... 52......... 62...............................................

..............297 minimum misses (SLB real server metric) ........................... 242................................. 112 hello.17 martian IP route tag (filtered) .. 243 authentication key ................... 293 MD5 authentication key .180 NTP server menu ............................... 353 operations-level BWM options ..292 metrics.............................247 media access control............................ 250 fixed routes ....................159 MP............................................25 summary ..............64...........365 display MAC address ........................................................................................... 241 ospf area index .................................... SLB .......................................... 241 cost of the selected path ........... health parameter of a hello packet ......................................68 mask IP interface subnet address ...335 monitor port...............................................228 MaxAge (STP information) .............................................244 MD5 key ..........0 Command Reference Main Menu .................336 mnet management traffic IP address for SLB ............. 351 optional software ................................................ configuring ............. 350 operations-level VRRP options .......... 209 operations menu ................................... 247 configuration ............................................... 112 global ...............19 non TCP/IP frames .............Alteon OS 21................................... 352 Operations-Level Port Options ........................................................................................................................... 93 activating ................................................................. N nbr change statistics.....................220 O octet counters .......................................................... 47 operating mode.................................... See Management Processor.................................................................... 246 dead.................. See MAC address......................... metric SLB real server group option................................................................................................................. 52.361 Management Processor (MP).... 248 export .. authentication parameter of a hello packet ...... multicast IP route type ...................................................................................189 NTP time zone ............................. 203...............................................................................................................................................243 MD5 cryptographic authentication ............................... 297 Miscellaneous Debug Menu .................... declaring a silent router to be down .................................. 349 operations-level SLB options ......... 222 mxage (STP bridge option) ........................................................... 74............... 200....................53 manual style conventions ...................................................................................310 network management....................45 Command-Line Interface (CLI) ..........................................46 Maintenance Menu .............................69 IP route type (filtered out) .....................188 398 „ Index 315393-E.............365 mmask IP address mask for SLB ................188 NTP synchronization .........................................68 multi-links between switches using port trunking...114 Network Address Translation (NAT) filter action ..........211 mp packet ............. 252 general ........................... 354 OSPF area types ...294............. 353 removing ...... 249 dead....149 notice .......150........... 347 operations-level BGP options ............................... 352 operations-level IP options ... October 2003 ............................. 246 cost value of the host .................................... 132 online help .63 mcon (maximum connections) ...................

.... 61 port trunking description ........................................................................................... 244 summary range configuration ................................. 210 information . 288 persistent bindings real server ....................... 242 route redistribution configuration ........................................................................................................... 32 port states UNK (unknown) ............................................................................................... shortest path first ... 91 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority ..................................................... 287 PIP ............................... 56............................................ 246 range number .. 202............................................. 63 RJ-45 ............... 83 STP port priority .............................Alteon OS 21............................ 244 transit delay .... 77 OSPF general ....... 222 ports configuration ............................................... 246 type ............................... 187 proxies IP address translation ......................... 52....................... 74 OSPF Information Route Codes ............... 69 type ............................................................ 243 Not-So-Stubby Area .................. 244 stub area ................... 68 Passive FTP SLB Parsing Statistics ....... 344............. 242 redistribution menu ............. as used with split horizon ........................................ 195 password administrator account ................................................ 250 spf........................................................................................ 270 priority virtual router .... 242 virtual link configuration .......... 24 L4 administrator account ......................... 52........................................ 150 overflow servers ............ 198 configuring Gigabit Ethernet (gig) .......... 75 OSPF General Information .................................. 289 Index P panic command ............. 244 priority value of the switch interface........................... 143 Password user access control ................... 273 passwords .............. 270 priority (STP port option) ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 59............................................................................ 246 link state database ....................................... 90 port speed .............................. 242 interface configuration ........ 222 VLAN ID.. 263............................... 32 setup...... 211 Port number ....... 152 port configuration .... 76 OSPF Information ................ 197 port flow control...................................................................................................................................................................................... 244 virtual link .................................................... 240 POP3 server health checks......0 Command Reference 248 host entry configuration ......... 111 overflow server activations ....... 48.................... 23 315393-E......... 245 transit area ..................... 248 OSPF Database Information ....................................................... 91 IP status ....................................... 222 prisrv primary radius server ................................... 345 poisoned reverse................................... 369 switch (and Maintenance Menu option) ......... 78 OSPF statistics ..................................................................................................................................... 66 membership of the VLAN ........................ 249 host routes ............. 303 ping .............................................. 295 port bandwidth management switch processor statistics 153 switch port contract statistics menu................ router ID ................. 24 user account ... 198................................... October 2003 „ 399 ................................................ 202 configuring Fast Ethernet ............ 24 default ............................................................. Port Menu configuration options ............................................................................................ 222 port trunking configuration .................... 24 VRRP authentication .......... 242 MD5 authentication key................................ 247 virtual neighbor.. 204 port mirroring configuration ......................................... 90 auto-sense ................ 242 interface ..... 65 priority................................................................. 361 parameters tag ............. 31 disabling (temporarily)...... 264 virtual router .. 197 SLB state information .......................................................................... See flow control............................................

.....................................289 removing optional software ............... 33 Rx/Tx statistics............133 real server SLB configuration .............................. 209...... 339 scriptable health checks configuration ........... 295.......131 real server global SLB statistics .................282 PVID (port VLAN ID) ............... See Routing Information Protocol..............................361 restarting switch setup .......................................................................................................................................... 287 400 „ Index 315393-E..... 275 roundrobin SLB Real Server metric ........................................... 254 routing information protocol configuration ..................................................................................... 369 receive flow control 32.............. 240 version 1 parameters.....................................187 read community string (SNMP option) ..................................................................... See IP subnets........ 203................ 302 RTSP SLB statistics .82 reboot ...48 rmkey ......29 retries radius server ................................................... 113 Q quiet (screen display option)............. 240 rport SLB virtual server option .................................................................. 177 noback option ............................................................Alteon OS 21............... 240 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ................... 186 security VLANs.............................0 Command Reference proxy IP address (PIP) .. 178 save command.......... segments................................................................ 350 real server weights ............. 187 Secure Shell ...293 priority increment value (reals) for VRRP .......286 real servers backup .............133 real server groups combining servers into ...................................292 statistics .......................................................52..... 297 route cache configuration ................................................135 real server group global SLB statistics . 354 round robin as used in gateway load balancing ................ October 2003 ................................. 187 secsrv secondary radius server ...................296 RADIUS server menu ... 20 serial download ............ 224 segmentation........................................................................................................ serial cable ................135 real server group options add .............................294 real server group SLB configuration..............................................71 remote monitoring on the port (rmon) ..................... 118 router hops ................................................................................................................ 33..............187 retry health checks for default gateway .............................................................................................................292 real server group statistics .............. 345 ptcfg (TFTP save command) .............48 R RADIUS server authentication .............................................344........................ See IP subnets......... 240 poisoned reverse ....................................................... S save (global command) .............................................................................................................................................. 145 rx flow control ........................................................ 200............274 SLB state information ...................................... 69 options ..... 387 Server Load Balancing IDS .............................. 91 pwd ........ 206....... 359 script health checks .61 referenced port ................... 210 redir (SLB filtering option) ....................................................................................................................................... 240 split horizon ................................................................83 proxy IP address (PIP) configuration .......... 290 operations-level options ..............................361..... 233 route statistics .......349 remote site servers .....354 reset key combination ......................191 real server statistics .................................229 rip IP route tag ............ 339 secret radius server .....................69 RIP.................. 32...................................310 reference ports ............

.............. 296 wtls ........ October 2003 Index „ 401 ........................ 288 RIP...................................... 294 health check types ............ 295 imap .................................................................................................................. 32 IP configuration ......................................................... 295 http........................................................................................ 27 BOOTP ......................................... configuration ............................ 294 metrics ........................... 82 server traffic processing ................................ 295 tcp ................. 30 VLAN name ........................................................................... 296 SLB real server group option application health checking .................. 170 141.................................0 Command Reference server load balancing client traffic processing................................. 149 server port mapping ........................................... 29 Spanning-Tree Protocol .................................................. 281 setup facility .......................... 300 setup configuration .................................................................................................... 191 SNMP Agent ..... 191 set and get access ....... 29 system date ............................... 202 SIP (source IP address for filtering) ................................................................................................... alias for each real server ...................... 204 shortcuts (CLI) .. 292 metric ................................................................... 296 sslh.................................... real server IP address ................................................ 310 SLB Information . 288 intr (interval) ................................... 31 port flow control ...................................................................... 19 menu options ........ 295 dns .......................................................................................... 311 SLB filtering option action ....................................... 383 SNMP health check configuration ............. 32..................................................... 340 SNMP health checks ....................................... 288 maxcon (maximum connections) ........................................................................................................................................................... 322 server traffic processing ........................ 296 script .......... 96 health checks ............. 287 submac .............. 337 smask source mask for filtering . 295 udpdns .................................. 284 Server Load Balancing Maintenance Statistics Menu ........................................................ 288 session identifier ................. 289 tmout (time out) .......................... 295 ftp ................... 82 SLB layer7 statistics . 292 SLB real server option backup ...................................... 137 315393-E....... 33 port configuration .................. 33 VLANs ........................................................................ 33 SFD statistics mp specific . 295 SNMP .................................................................. SLB real server group health checks arp..................................................................................... 281 setup command.................. 288 weights ........ 295 ldap ......... 28 stopping......................................................... 35 IP subnet mask ............................................................................................................... 296 radius .... 35 port auto-negotiation mode ........ 296 smtp ................................................................................................................................................................................... 296 wsp .............. 32........... 288 retry ................................. 31 duplex mode ........................................................................ 162 SFP GBIC ports ................................................ 321 health check ....................... 287 slowage ............................................................................................................................................................................. 296 SNMP statistics . 321 Session Binding Table ........................................ 19....................................................................................... 295 snap traces buffer .................. 295 icmp ... 287 restr (restore) SLB real server UDP option ........................................................................................... 292 health checking ........................... 311 smtp ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 340 HP-OpenView ............................. 34 VLAN tagging ..... 32 restarting ................................................................. 142.............................................. 365 SNMP .......... 180 SMTP server health checks ..... 297 port options ..........................................................Alteon OS 21............... 321 server load balancing configuration options ......... 50 single-mode ports ..................................................... 25................................ 31 starting .......... 33 port speed ......... 30 system time ........ 34 VLAN port numbers ................................................ 287 name...............

.................................................... 196 BOOTP ...................................................... 282 TFTP server ..........................133 management processor ........................... 53 location (SNMP option) ..............63 state information..............69 static route rem ................................................................................................................................................303 secure socket layer statistics ............................................................................353 software image .....................................................................................................................................................................................95 stopping switch setup............ 350 syslog system host log configuration ..................................240 statis route add .........................................162 spanning tree configuration.... 193 System Maintenance Menu ................ 189 T tab completion (CLI) ..........................................365 display trace buffer ................................................. 180 hprompt ....................................... 281 telnet radius server ............................................................................................................................................................................... 295 source and destination ports............... 21 configuring switches using ..................63.........................................................................240 SSL .....64..................................29 subnet address maskconfiguration IP subnet address ................................................................................................ current ...................39 software image file and version ... 363 system options admpw (administrator password) ......................................................... 17 TFTP ............................ October 2003 .............356 SP specific statistics ..................................................................................................................................................50 starting switch setup ............................................ 125..220 bridge priority ...158 Statistics Menu ........................................... 188.......................................... 195 system parameters..............230 statistics group .........................................................360 Switch Processor (SP).........................218 Spanning-Tree Protocol ......................................................337 402 sync ............................ 350 synchronization VRRP switch..............................................................................228 switch resetting .....222 port priority option ............. 180 time................................................53 license ... 189 date ................................................. 193 tnport ...... 21 BOOTP ..................63 port cost option ........................................... 282 „ Index 315393-E... 51............. 180 tnet.............................35 subnets ........................... 193 usrpw (user password) ......... 193 l4apw (Layer 4 administrator password) .............. 357 PUT and GET commands .................... 180 cur (current system parameters) ...................... 191 date and time ......................................................................................................Alteon OS 21...........................................31 switch reset effect ............... 187 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support ....................... 20 text conventions .....................................................222 root bridge ............................ 39 terminal emulation .... 309 TCP statistics ........................35 IP interface .............................. 149.. 288 health checks ..............................141 stacking commands (CLI) ............. 181 system contact (SNMP option) .............. 161 Telnet .........360 split horizon .... client system............................................ 196 login banner ............................................................ 50 TCP fragments .......................365 swkey .............................303 static IP route tag .................................................... 300 health checking using ........................... 188......................... 177 bridge aging option ................0 Command Reference SNMP Support optional setup for SNMP support ............................................221 bridge parameters ................................228 subnet mask .................................................................. 180 HTTP access ........................28 state (STP information) ..................................................................................353 SYN attack detection configuration ............................................... 333........................ 220 setup (on/off) .. 191 system access control configuration...........................230 static routes Routing Information Protocol (RIP) .......

.............. 195 Uuencode Flash Dump .................................. 270 master preemption (prio) .......... 310 Trunk Group Information ............ 83 user account .. DNS response (global SLB menu option) V verbose ..................................... 33 323 tnet system option ..................................................... 64 ttl (time to live.......................................................... 262................................................... 263 priority tracking options ................................................................................. 25 timers kickoff.................... 265................................... 82 virtual router description ............. SLB information about .............................. 336 trace buffer ........... when used for NAT ......... 206... 294 SLB state information ....................... 271 priority................................... 32......................................... 48 Tracking VRRP .......................................................................... 188 U UCB statistics .......................................... 200......................... 33............... switch software ......... 351 password.............. 48 vip advertisement of virtual IP addresses as Host Routes ............................................. 133 virtual servers ............... 269 virtual router group priority tracking .............................................................. 272 HSRV priority increment value ..................................................... 264 virtual router group VRRP priority tracking ..................................................... 33 type of area ospf................. 208 port restrictions ................................................. 24 usrpw (system option) ...... 275 increasing priority level of . 270 virtual routers HSRP failover .............................. 68 typographic conventions..................................... 209.......... 365 Switch Processor ....................................... 273 group options (prio) ....... 198........... 262 master mode ............................................ 267 incrementing VRRP instance .. 368 315393-E................... 69 virtual IP address (VIP) ......................... 270 operations-level options .................... 365 traceroute................................................................................. 82 statistics ................ 270 tracking criteria ................................................................... 323 tx flow control.......... 271 configuration ............................. 272 HSRP priority increment value ....... October 2003 Index „ 403 ................................... 225 setup................................. 193 TPCP (Transparent Proxy Cache Protocol) .... 356 URL for health checks ........ 263 priority increment values (vrs) for VRRP .............................. 241 IP route tag ................ 274 HSRV.. 274 virtual server global SLB statistics ........................................................................... manual .................... 265 master preemption (preem) ........ 202.......................... 203..................... 135 virtual server SLB statistics ........... 149 server status using ............................... 269 virtual router group configuration ...................................... 288 source and destination ports .......... 266 transmit flow control32......Alteon OS 21... 253................................ 244 type parameters ........................................ 161 UDP datagrams ..... 82 virtual port state.............................................. 187 timeouts idle connection .................................................... 370 upgrade..................... 180 timeout radius server ....................................................... 126 unknown (UNK) port state ................................. 115 time-to-live............................................ authentication ............ 30 system option . 17 tzone .......... 224 VLAN tagging port configuration..... 264 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration 260 virtual router sharing .. 193 tnport system option ......0 Command Reference time setup ..................................................... 273 priority election for the virtual router .................................................................................... 133 VLAN active port ..................... 309 UDP statistics ............................................................................... 61 Unscheduled System Dump ................................................... 210 transparent proxies..................................... global SLB menu option) ................... 271 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) authentication parameters for IP interfaces .................................................. 264................... 205.......................................

...19 weights for SLB real servers ...................................... 342 WAP health check configuration .............................................262.....59.......................................... 65 port numbers .......................................................................64 interface ............................................33 Spanning-Tree Protocol ............................................59..................340.340.................. 342 404 „ Index 315393-E.................................... 341 wtlsprt WAP health check .........218 tagging ............263 tracking ..................................................120 W WAP health checks ............................................................................65 VRID (virtual router ID) ............................33....................................................................224 information ............................340.............147 watchdog timer ..34 port membership........34 security ................ 341 wtlsprt .................................... 225 VLAN Number ...........361 web-based management interface............. 204.................198.....298 setting virtual router priority values ................................................191 wspport WAP health check ...79 VRRP master advertisements time interval ............274 write community string (SNMP option) .....................................................................................274 virtual router sharing . 52.......................................................36 multiple spanning trees ...................... 387 207 setup ...263 VRRP Information ...........................................................................................262........................................................................................................Alteon OS 21..................................340............................341 WAP SLB statistics ............................. 266 tracking configuration .... 202..0 Command Reference VLANs ...................270 VRRP statistics ....................35 ARP entry information ..................................218 name ........................70 broadcast domains ...................................................... October 2003 ..... 91.. 65 name setup......................273 master advertisements ....................................................... 269 VRRP interface configuration ...............341 WAP health check wspport ............224 setting default number (PVID) . X XModem ..........

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful